Manual XGB Analog 10310000920 Eng V1.6

Right choice for ultimate yield
LSIS strives to maximize customers' profit in gratitude of choosing us for your partner.
Programmable Logic Controller
XGB Analog
Users Manual
z Read this manual carefully before
installing, wiring, operating, servicing
or inspecting this equipment.

z Keep this manual within easy reach
for quick reference.
XGT Series
http://eng.lsis.biz
XBF-AD04A
XBF-AD08A
XBF-DV04A
XBF-DC04A
XBF-RD04A
XBF-TC04S
XBF-AH04A
XBO-AD02A
XBO-DA02A
XBO-AH02A
XBO-RD01A
XBO-TC02A
Analog input

Analog output

Temperature input

Analog input/output
Analog input option board
Analog output option board
Analog input/output option board
Temperature input option board

Built-in PID

Safety Instructions

Before using the product

For your safety and effective operation, please read the safety instructions
thoroughly before using the product.

Safety Instructions should always be observed in order to prevent accident
or risk with the safe and proper use the product.

Instructions are divided into Warning and Caution, and the meaning of
the terms is as follows.

This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury
or death if some applicable instruction is violated

This symbol indicates the possibility of severe or
slight injury, and property damages if some
applicable instruction is violated

Moreover, even classified events under its caution category may develop into
serious accidents relying on situations. Therefore we strongly advise users to
observe all precautions properly just like warnings.

The marks displayed on the product and in the users manual have the
following meanings.
Be careful! Danger may be expected.
Be careful! Electric shock may occur.

The users manual even after read shall be kept available and accessible to
any user of the product.
Warning
Caution

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions for design process

Please install a protection circuit on the exterior of PLC so that the
whole system may operate safely regardless of failures from
external power or PLC. Any abnormal output or operation from PLC
may cause serious problems to safety in whole system.
- Install protection units on the exterior of PLC like an interlock circuit
that deals with opposite operations such as emergency stop,
protection circuit, and forward/reverse rotation or install an interlock
circuit that deals with high/low limit under its position controls.
- If any system error (watch-dog timer error, module installation error,
etc.) is detected during CPU operation in PLC, all output signals are
designed to be turned off and stopped for safety. However, there
are cases when output signals remain active due to device failures
in Relay and TR which cant be detected. Thus, you are
recommended to install an addition circuit to monitor the output
status for those critical outputs which may cause significant
problems.

Never overload more than rated current of output module nor
allow to have a short circuit. Over current for a long period time may
cause a fire .

Never let the external power of the output circuit to be on earlier
than PLC power, which may cause accidents from abnormal output or
operation.

Please install interlock circuits in the sequence program for safe
operations in the system when exchange data with PLC or modify
operation modes using a computer or other external equipments
Read specific instructions thoroughly when conducting control
operations with PLC.
Warning

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions for design process

Safety Instructions on installation process
I/O signal or communication line shall be wired at least 100mm
away from a high-voltage cable or power line. Fail to follow this
instruction may cause malfunctions from noise
Caution

Use PLC only in the environment specified in PLC manual or
general standard of data sheet. If not, electric shock, fire, abnormal
operation of the product may be caused.

Before install or remove the module, be sure PLC power is off. If
not, electric shock or damage on the product may be caused.

Be sure that every module is securely attached after adding a
module or an extension connector. If the product is installed
loosely or incorrectly, abnormal operation, error or dropping may be
caused. In addition, contact failures under poor cable installation will
be causing malfunctions as well.

Be sure that screws get tighten securely under vibrating
environments. Fail to do so will put the product under direct
vibrations which will cause electric shock, fire and abnormal
operation.

Do not come in contact with conducting parts in each module,
which may cause electric shock, malfunctions or abnormal operation.
Caution

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions for wiring process

Prior to wiring works, make sure that every power is turned off. If
not, electric shock or damage on the product may be caused.

After wiring process is done, make sure that terminal covers are
installed properly before its use. Fail to install the cover may cause
electric shocks.
Warning
Check rated voltages and terminal arrangements in each product
prior to its wiring process. Applying incorrect voltages other than
rated voltages and misarrangement among terminals may cause fire
or malfunctions.

Secure terminal screws tightly applying with specified torque. If
the screws get loose, short circuit, fire or abnormal operation may be
caused. Securing screws too tightly will cause damages to the module
or malfunctions, short circuit, and dropping.
*
Be sure to earth to the ground using Class 3 wires for FG
terminals which is exclusively used for PLC. If the terminals not
grounded correctly, abnormal operation or electric shock may be
caused.

Dont let any foreign materials such as wiring waste inside the
module while wiring, which may cause fire, damage on the product
or abnormal operation.

Make sure that pressed terminals get tighten following the
specified torque. External connector type shall be pressed or
soldered using proper equipments.

Caution

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions for test-operation and
maintenance

Dont touch the terminal when powered. Electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.

Prior to cleaning or tightening the terminal screws, let all the
external power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or
abnormal operation may occur.

Dont let the battery recharged, disassembled, heated, short or
soldered. Heat, explosion or ignition may cause injuries or fire.
Warning
Do not make modifications or disassemble each module. Fire,
electric shock or abnormal operation may occur.
Prior to installing or disassembling the module, let all the
external power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or
abnormal operation may occur.
Keep any wireless equipment such as walkie-talkie or cell phones
at least 30cm away from PLC. If not, abnormal operation may be
caused.
When making a modification on programs or using run to modify
functions under PLC operations, read and comprehend all
contents in the manual fully. Mismanagement will cause damages to
products and accidents.
Avoid any physical impact to the battery and prevent it from
dropping as well. Damages to battery may cause leakage from its
fluid. When battery was dropped or exposed under strong impact,
never reuse the battery again. Moreover skilled workers are needed
when exchanging batteries.
Caution

Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions for waste disposal

Product or battery waste shall be processed as industrial waste.
The waste may discharge toxic materials or explode itself.
Caution

Revision History

Version Data Important change Page
V 1.0 2007. 7
1. Adding contents
(1) Setting Sequence before operation
(2) Accuracy calculation example
2. Changing contents
(1) Wiring examples
(2) Configuration and Function of Internal
Memory
(3) Example Program

2-1,3-1,4-1
2-9,3-7

2-13,3-9,4-9
2-28,3-18,4-20

2-34,3-23,4-24,5-37
V 1.1 2008. 1
1. Adding model
(1) Thermocouple input module
(XBF-TC04S)
2. Adding contents
(1) Thermo electromotive force and
compensating cable
(2) Performance Specification
(3) Dimension
3. Changing chapter number
(1) CH.6 PID Function
(2) Appendix 3. Dimension

Chapter 5

Appendix 2

1-5
APP.3-3

CH.5 --> CH.6
App.2 --> App.3
V1.2 2008.4 1. Adding XGB compact H type Chapter 1
V1.3 2009.7 1. Adding contents about XGB IEC type
2. Adding model
(1) Analog combo module (XBF-AH04A)
3. Adding/changing contents
(1) Adding contents at chapter 1
(2) Adding dimension
-

Chapter 6

1-1,1-6,1-7
Appendix3-3
V1.5 2010.3 1. Adding new model
(1) Analog input module (XBF-AD08A)
2. Contents added/modified
(1) Contents added
(2) Name changed
Analog input module Analog input
module (4-channel)
(3) CH.7 PID moved to CH8
(4) Dimension added
(5) XGB Compact type S type added

Chapter 7

1-1, 1-3
Chapter 2

Chapter 8
App3-3
-
Version Data Important change Page
V1.6 2011.2 1. Adding new model
(1) Analog Input Option Board
(XBO-AD02A)
(2) Analog Output Option Board
(XBO-DA02A)
(3) Analog IO Option Board
(XBO-AH02A)
(4) RTD Input Option Board
(XBO-RD01A)
(5) Thermocouple Input Option Board
(XBO-TC02A)
2. Contents added/modified
(3) CH.8 PID moved to CH13

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

The number of Users manual is indicated right part of the back cover.
LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd 2007 All Rights Reserved.
About Users Manual

About Users Manual

Thank you for purchasing PLC of LS Industrial System Co., Ltd.
Before use, make sure to carefully read and understand the Users Manual about the functions,
performances, installation and programming of the product you purchased in order for correct use and
importantly, let the end user and maintenance administrator to be provided with the Users Manual.
The Users Manual describes the product. If necessary, you may refer to the following description and order
accordingly. In addition, you may connect our website(http://eng.lsis.biz/) and download the information as a
PDF file.
Relevant Users Manuals

Title Description
No. of Users
Manual
XG5000 users
manual
It describes how to use XG5000 software about online functions
such as programming, printing, monitoring and debugging by
using XGB series products.
10310000512
XG5000 users
manual (for
XGI/XGR/XEC)
It describes how to use XG5000 software about online functions
such as programming, printing, monitoring and debugging by
using XGB (IEC language)
10310000834
XGK/XGK
Instructions &
Programming
It is the users manual for programming to explain how to use
commands that are used PLC system with XGB CPU.
10310000510
XGI/XGR/XEC
Instructions &
Programming
It is the users manual for programming to explain how to use
commands that are used in XGB (IEC language)
10310000833
XGB hardware
It describes power, IO, extension specification and system
configuration, built-in high speed counter of XGB main unit.
10310000693
XGB hardware (IEC)
It describes power, IO, extension specification and system
configuration, built-in high speed counter of XGB (IEC) main unit.
10310000983
XGB Analog
users manual
It describes how to use the specification of analog input/analog
output/temperature input module, system configuration and built-in
PID control for XGB basic unit.
10310000920
XGB Position
Users manual
It describes how to use the specification of analog input/analog
output/temperature input module, system configuration and built-in
PID control for XGB basic unit.
10310000927
XGB Cnet I/F
It is the users manual about XGB Cnet I/F that describes built-in
communication function and external Cnet I/F module of XGB
basic unit
10310000816
XGB FEnet I/F It describes how to use XGB FEnet I/F module.
10310000873
Table of Contents

Chapter 1 General .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Anlog Produt List ............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Specification of Anlog Module ......................................................................................................... 1-2

Chapter 2 Analog Input Module (4-channel) ...................................................... 2-1
2.1 Setting Sequence before Operation ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Name of part and function ............................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4 Characteristic of I/O conversion .................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5 Conversion Characteristic according to Input Range .................................................................... 2-6
2.6 Accuracy ........................................................................................................................................ 2-9
2.7 Functions of Analog Input Module ............................................................................................... 2-10
2.8 Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.9 Operation Parameter Setting ...................................................................................................... 2-17
2.10 Special Module Monitoring Functions ....................................................................................... 2-20
2.11 Register U devices .................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.12 Configuration and Function of Internal Memory ........................................................................ 2-28
2.13 Example Program ...................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.14 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... 2-40

Chapter 3 Analog Onput Module ........................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Setting Sequence before Operation .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Specification .................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Designations and Functions .......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Characteristic of I/O Conversion ................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Characteristic of Input/Output ....................................................................................................... 3-6
3.6 Accuracy ........................................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.7 Functions of Analog Output Module .............................................................................................. 3-8
3.8 Wiring ............................................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.10 Special Module Monitoring Function ......................................................................................... 3-12
3.12 Internal memory ........................................................................................................................ 3-19
3.13 Example Program ...................................................................................................................... 3-24

Chapter 4 RTD Input Module ................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Setting Sequence before Operation .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Specification .................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.3 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................................................ 4-4
4.4 Temperature Conversion Characteristic ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.5 Conversion Speed ......................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.6 Accuracy ......................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.7 Temperature Display ..................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.8 Scaling Function ............................................................................................................................ 4-7
4.9 Disconnection Detection Function ................................................................................................. 4-8
4.10 Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.11 Filtering Function ....................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.13 Special Module Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 4-15
4.16 Example Program ...................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.17 Trouble Shooting ....................................................................................................................... 4-28

Chapter 5 Thermocouple Input Module ................................................................ 5-1
5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Specification .................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Function ........................................................................................................................................ 5-11
5.4 Installation and Wiring ................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.5 Operation Setting and Monitor .................................................................................................... 5-18
5.6 Configuration and Function of Internal Memory .......................................................................... 5-32
5.7 Example Program ........................................................................................................................ 5-47
5.8 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 5-52

Chapter 6 Analog I/O Module ................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Pre-operation Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Specification .................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Major Components .......................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4 Conversion Characteristics by I/O Range ....................................................................................... 6-6
6.5 Precision ....................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.6 Functions of Analog I/O Module .................................................................................................... 6-12
6.7 Wiring ............................................................................................................................................ 6-18
6.9 Special Module Monitor Function .................................................................................................. 6-24
6.10 Auto-registration of U-Device (Special Module Variable) ........................................................... 6-28
6.11 Constitution and Function of Internal Memory ............................................................................ 6-33
6.12 Example Program ....................................................................................................................... 6-40
6.13 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 6-46

Chapter 7 Analog Input Module (8-channel) ...................................................... 7-1
7.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.5 Accuracy ........................................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.6 Functions of Analog Input Module ................................................................................................. 7-8
7.7 Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.9 Special Module Monitoring Functions ......................................................................................... 7-19
7.12 Example Program ...................................................................................................................... 7-35

Chapter 8 Analog Input Option Board .................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.5 Accuracy ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.6 Functions of Analog Input Option Board ....................................................................................... 8-8
8.7 Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.12 Example Program ...................................................................................................................... 8-33

Chapter 9 Analog Output Option Board ............................................................... 9-1
9.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.5 Accuracy ........................................................................................................................................ 9-7
9.6 Functions of Analog Output Option Board .................................................................................... 9-8
9.7 Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.11 Internal memory .......................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.12 Example Program ...................................................................................................................... 9-29

Chapter 10 Analog I/O Option Board .................................................................. 10-1
10.1 Setting Sequence before Operation ............................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.3 Name of part and function ......................................................................................................... 10-5
10.4 Characteristic of I/O conversion ................................................................................................ 10-6
10.5 Accuracy .................................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.6 Functions of Analog Output Option Board .............................................................................. 10-12
10.7 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.8 Operation Parameter Setting .................................................................................................. 10-20
10.9 Special Module Monitoring Functions ..................................................................................... 10-22
10.10 Register U devices ................................................................................................................ 10-26
10.11 Configuration and Function of Internal Memory ...................................................................... 10-31
10.12 Example Program .................................................................................................................. 10-41
10.13 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... 10-43

Chapter 11 RTD Input Option Board ................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.4 Temperature Conversion Characteristic ..................................................................................... 11-5
11.5 Conversion Speed ....................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.6 Accuracy .................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.7 Temperature Display ................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.8 Disconnection Detection Function ............................................................................................. 11-7
11.9 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 11-8
11.10 Average Function .................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.11 Operation Parameter Setting ................................................................................................ 11-11
11.12 Special Module Monitoring Functions ................................................................................... 11-14
11.13 Register U devices ................................................................................................................ 11-17
11.15 Example Program .................................................................................................................. 11-25

Chapter 12 Thermocouple Input Option Module ............................................... 12-1
12.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.4 Characteristic of Thermocouple Temperature Conversion ......................................................... 12-5
12.5 Accuracy .................................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.6 Conversion Speed ....................................................................................................................... 12-7
12.7 Function ...................................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.8 Installation and Wiring ............................................................................................................... 12-10
12.9 Operation Setting and Monitor .................................................................................................. 12-12
12.11 Example Program .................................................................................................................. 12-31

Chapter 13 PID Function (Built-in function) ....................................................... 13-1
13.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 PID Control ................................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.3 PID Instructions .......................................................................................................................... 13-27
13.4 PID Auto-tuning ....................................................................................................................... 13-33
13.5 Example Programs .................................................................................................................. 13-42
13.6 Error/Warning Codes ............................................................................................................... 13-54

Appendix App.1-3
Appendix 1 Standard Resistor of Pt RTD .................................................................................... App.1-1
Appendix 2 Thermo Electromotive Force and Compensating Cable .......................................... App.2-1
Appendix 3 Dimension .................................................................................................................. App.3-1

Chapter 1 General
1 - 1

Chapter 1 General

Here describes about analog module and built-in PID function of XGB series.

1.1 Analog Product List

Classification Name
No. of
channel
Range Resolution Characteristic
0 ~ 10V 2.5
XBF-AD04A 4
0 ~ 20 mA
4~20
5.0 A
1.Range selection by external switch and
parameter setting
2. External DC24V used
4~20mA
0~20mA
5.0 A
1~5V
0~5V
1.25
Voltage/Current
input
XBF-AD08A 8
0~10V
2.5
parameter setting
2. Filter function, average function
Voltage output XBF-DV04A 4 0 ~ 10V 2.5
Current output XBF-DC04A 4
0 ~ 20
4~20
5.0 A
2.Designates output in case of Error and
CPU STOP
XBF-RD04A 4
RTD input
XBF-RD01A 1
PT100
JPT100
0.1
2. Filter function
Thermocouple
Input module
XBF-
TC04S
4 K / J / T / R Note1)
4~20mA
0~20mA
5.0 A
1~5V
0~5V
1.25
Analog combo
(voltage/current
I/O)
XBF-
AH04A
2 (input)
2
(output)
0~10V
2.5
parameter setting
2.Filter function, averaging function
3.Specifies output when error or CPU
STOP
4. Uses external DC24V
4~20 6.25 A
Analog Input
Option Board
XBO-
AD02A
2
0~20mA
5.0 A
Analog Output
Option Board
XBO-
DA02A
2
0~10V
2.5
1. Parameter setting
3. Internal VDD 5V

Note1) for more detail on thermocouple input module resolution, refer to Ch.5.2.6 accuracy/resolution.

Chapter 1 General
1 - 2

Classification Name
No. of
channel
Range Resolution Characteristic
4~20 6.25 A
1(Input)
0~20mA 5.0 A
Analog IO
Option Board
XBO-
AH02A
1(Output
0~10V 2.5
1. Parameter setting
3. Internal VDD 5V
RTD Input
Option Board
XBO-
RD01A
1
PT100
JPT100
0.1
1. Internal VDD 5V
Thermocouple
Input Option
Board
XBO-
TC02A 2 K / J Note2)
1. Internal VDD 5V

Note2) for more detail on Thermocouple Input Option Board resolution, refer to Ch.12.5 accuracy
Chapter 1 General
1 - 3

Here describes about specification of analog module of XGB series.

1.2.1 Analog input
Item XBF-AD04A
Type Voltage Current
Analog input
range
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Input resistance: 1 M min.)
DC 4 ~ 20mA
DC 0 ~ 20mA
(Input resistance: 250 )
Type 12 bit binary data
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Signed value -2000 ~ 2000
Precise value 0 ~ 1000 400 ~ 2000/0 ~ 2000
Digital output
Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
Max. resolution 2.5(1/4000) 5(1/4000)
Accuracy 0.5% or less
Max. conversion speed 1.5ms/channel
Absolute max. input DC 15V DC +25
No. of output channel 4 channels
Insulation method
Photo-coupler insulation between input terminal and PLC power
(No insulation between channels)
Connection Terminal 11 point terminal block
I/O points occupied Fixed type: 64 points
Max. number of equipment
7 (when using XBM(C)-DxxxS Stype)
10 (when using XB(E)C-DxxxH Htype)
Inner (DC 5V) 120mA
Consumption
current
External (DC 24V) 62mA
Weight 64g
Additional function Filter-processing, average-processing (time, count)

1.2 Specification of Analog Module
Chapter 1 General
1 - 4

Item XBF-AD08A
DC 1 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 10V
DC 4 ~ 20mA
DC 0 ~ 20mA
Analog input
range
Range
Input range can be voltage/current selector switch after being set
by user program or I/O parameter for each channel
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise value
100 ~ 500 (DC 1 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 500 (DC 0 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)
Digital output
Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
1/4000
Max. resolution
1.25 (DC 1~5V, 0~5V)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC4~20, 0~20)
Absolute max. input DC 15V DC +25
Insulation method
Filter function Digital filter (4~64,000ms)
Time average (4~16,000ms)
Count average (2~64,000 times) Average function
Moving average (2~100)
Additional
function
Alarm function Disconnection detection (DC 1~5V, DC 4~20mA)
Inner (DC 5V) 105mA
Consumption
current
Weight 81g
Chapter 1 General
1 - 5

1.2.2 Analog output
Item XBF-DV04A XBF-DC04A
Analog
output
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistance: 2k or
more)
DC 4 ~ 20mA
DC 0 ~ 20mA
(Load resistance: 510 or
less)
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000 0 ~ 4000
Signed value -2000 ~ 2000 -2000 ~ 2000
Precise value 0 ~ 1000 400 ~ 2000/0 ~ 2000
Digital input
Rang
e
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000 0 ~ 1000
Max. resolution 2.5(1/4000) 5(1/4000)
Max. conversion speed 1/channel
Absolute max. output DC 15V DC +25
Insulation method
Photo-coupler insulation between output terminal and PLC power
(no insulation between channel)
I/O points occupied 64 points
7 (when using XBM-DxxxS Stype)
Inner (DC 5V) 110mA 110mA
Consumptio
n current
External (DC 24V) 70mA 120mA
Weight 64g 70g
Additional function Designates output in case of error and CPU STOP

Chapter 1 General
1 - 6

1.2.3 RTD input
Item XBF-RD04A
No. of input channel 4 channels
PT100 JIS C1604-1997
Input sensor
type
JPT100 JIS C1604-1981 , KS C1603-1991
PT100 -200 ~ 600
Input temp.
range
JPT100 -200 ~ 600
PT100 -2000 ~ 6000
JPT100 -2000 ~ 6000 Digital output
Scaling display 0 ~ 4000
Normal temp. (25) 0.3% or less
Accuracy
Full temp. (0~55) 0.5% or less
Conversion speed 40ms / channel
Between channels No insulation
Insulation
method
terminal PLC power Insulation (Photo-Coupler)
Terminal block 15 point terminal
I/O points occupied 64 points
Sensor wiring method 3 line
Filter function Digital filter (160 ~ 64000ms)
Additional
function
Alarm function Disconnection detection
Inner DC5V 100mA
Consumption
current
External DC24V 100mA
Weight 63g

Chapter 1 General
1 - 7

1.2.4 Thermocouple input
Items XBF-TC04S
Number of input channel 4 channels
Type of input sensor
Thermocouple K / J / T / R type
JIS C1602-1995
K -200.0 ~ 1300.0
J -200.0 ~ 1200.0
T -200.0 ~ 400.0
Range of input
temperature
R 0.0 ~ 1700.0
Temp. display
Displaying down to one decimal place note1)
K, J, T type: 0.1, R type: 0.5
Unsigned scaling (0 ~ 65535)
Digital output
Scaling display
(user-defined scaling)
Signed scaling (-32768 ~ 32767)
Ambient temperature(25) Within 0.2% note 2)
Accuracy Temp. coefficient
(range of operating temp)
100 ppm/
Conversion velocity 50ms / channel
Terminal inner circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Terminal operating power DC/DC converter insulation
Insulation
method
Between channels Photo-moss relay insulation
Insulation pressure
400 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 1min,
leakage current 10 or below
Insulation
Insulation resistance 500 V DC, 10 M or above
Auto compensation by RJC sensing (Thermistor) Standard contact
point
compensation
Compensation amount 1.0
Warming-up time 20 min or above
I/O occupied points 64 points
Filter process Digital filter (200 ~ 64,000)
Time average (400~64,000)
Count average (2~64,000 times) Average process
Alarm Disconnection detection
Max./Min. display Display Max./Min.
Additional function
Scaling function Signed scaling / Unsigned scaling
Inner DC5V 100 Consumption
current External DC24V 100
Weight 63g

Note1), Note2) For more detail specification, refer to 5.2.6 accuracy/resolution.
Chapter 1 General
1 - 8

1.2.5 Analog Combo

(1) Input performance specification

Items XBF-AH04A
No. of input channel 2 channels
DC 1 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 10V
(input resistor: 1 M or above)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(input resistor 250 )

Analog
input
range
Range
Input range can be set through external voltage/current selector switch after
setting at user program or I/O parameter per input channel
Type 12bit binary data
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
100 ~ 500 (DC 1 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 500 (DC 0 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)

Digital
output Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
1/4000
Max. resolution 1.25 (DC 1~5V, 0~5V)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC4~20, 0~20)

Precision 0.5% or less
Max. conversion speed 1ms/channel
Absolute max. input DC 15V DC 25
Filter function Digital filter (4 ~ 64,000)
Time averaging (4~16,000)
Cyclic averaging (2~64,000cycle)
Averaging
function
Moving averaging (2~100samples)
Additional
function
Alarm function Disconnection detection (DC 1~5V, DC4~20)

Chapter 1 General
1 - 9

(2) Output performance specification
Items XBF-AH04A
DC 1 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistor: 2k or above)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(Load resistor 510 or less)

Analog
output
range
Range
Input range can be set through external voltage/current selector switch after
setting at user program or I/O parameter per input channel
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
100 ~ 500 (DC 1 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 500 (DC 0 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)

Digital
input Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
1/4000
Max. resolution 1.25 (DC 1~5V, 0~5V)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC4~20, 0~20)

Precision 0.5% or less
Max. conversion speed 1ms/channel
Absolute max. output DC 15V DC 25
Additional function
Function setting channel output status
(Can select one among Previous, Minimum, median, maximum)
(3) I/O common performance specification
Items XBF-AH04A
Insulation method
Photo coupler insulation between I/O terminal and PLC power (not
insulated between channels)
I/O terminal block 11 points terminal block
No. of I/O occupation point Fixed type: 64 points
7 (when using XBM-DxxxS S type)
10 (when using XB(E)C-DxxxH H type)
Internal (DC 5V) 120mA Consumption
current External (DC 24V) 130mA
Weight 73g

Chapter 1 General
1 - 10

1.2.6 Analog Input Option Board

Items XBO-AD02A
Number of channel 2 channels
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Input resistance: 1 or above)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(Input resistance 250 )
Analog input
range
Range
Set by external voltage/current selector switch after being set at user
program or I/O parameter per each channel
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)
Digital output
Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
1/4000 (DC 4~20: 1/3200)
Max. resolution
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)
Max. conversion speed 1ms/channel + scan time
Absolute max. input DC +12V / -10V DC 25
Average function Count average (2 ~ 64,000 times)
Additional
function
Gain adjustment
function
Gain adjustment (-40~40)
Insulation method
No insulation between channels
No insulation between input terminal and PLC main unit
Input terminal 5 - point terminal block
Max. no. of installation
1 (when using XBC-DR10E/DR14E Etype)
2 (when using XBC-DxxxS/SU Stype)
Supply power Inner DC 5V
Consumption current 50
Weight 20g

Chapter 1 General
1 - 11

1.2.7 Analog Output Option Board

Item XBO-DA02A
No. of channels 2 channels
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistance: 2 or more)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(Load resistance: 450)
Analog
output
range
Range
Output range can be set at user program or I/O parameter for each
channel
Type 12-bit binary data
Unsigned
value
0~4000
Precise value 0 ~ 1000 (DC0~10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC4~20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC0~20)
Digital
input
Range
Percentile value 0 ~ 1000
1/4000 (DC 4 ~ 20mA: 1/3200)
Maximum resolution
2.5 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
6.25 (DC 4~20)
Maximum conversion speed 1/channel + scan time
Additional function
Channel output state setting (former, min, middle, max value)
Gain adjustment function
Insulation method
no insulation between analog output channels
no insulation between output terminal and PLC main unit
I/O terminal 5-point terminal block
Power supply Internal 5V
Supply power Internal DC5V
Current consumption 150
Weight 20g

Chapter 1 General
1 - 12

1.2.8 Analog I/O Option Board

Items XBO-AH02A
Number of channels 1 channel
DC 0 ~ 10V
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
Analog
input
range
Range
Set by external voltage/current wiring after being set at user program
or I/O parameter per each channel
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)
Digital
output Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
1/4000 (DC 4~20: 1/3200)
Max. resolution
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
6.25 (DC 4~20)
Additional
function
Gain adjustment
function

Items XBO-AH02A
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistance: 2k or above)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(Load resistance: 450 )
Analog
output
range
Range
Set at user program or I/O parameter per each channel per each
channel
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20mA)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20mA)
Digital
input Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
1/4000 (DC 4 ~ 20: 1/3200)
Max. resolution
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
6.25 (DC 4~20)
Additional function
CH output status setting
(select among former, min, middle, max value)
Chapter 1 General
1 - 13

(3) I/O Common performance specification
Items XBO-AH02A
Insulation method
Non-insulation betweens analog I/O channels
Non-insulation between I/O terminal and PLC main unit
I/O occupation point Fixed type: 64 points
Max. installation count
1(when using XBC-DR10E/DR14E E type)
2(when using XBC-DxxxS/SU S type)
Weight 20g

1.2.9 RTD Input Option Board
XBO-RD01A
No. of input channels One channel
PT100 JIS C1604-1997
Input sensor
type
JPT100 JIS C1604-1981 , KS C1603-1991
PT100 -200 ~ 600
Temperature
input range
JPT100 -200 ~ 600
PT100 -2000 ~ 6000
Digital output
JPT100 -2000 ~ 6000
Accuracy Within 1.0%
Conversion speed 25m/1 channel
Channel to
Channel
Non-insulation
Insulation
Terminal to PLC
Power
Insulation (Photo-Coupler)
Terminal block 5-point terminal block
1 (when using XBC-DR10E/DR14E E type)
2 (when using XBC-DxxxS S type)
Wiring method 3-wire type
Averaging Count averaging function
Function
Weight 20g

Chapter 1 General
1 - 14

1.2.10 Thermocouple Input Option Module
Items XBO-TC02A
Thermocouple K / J type
(JIS C1602-1995)
K type sensor -200.0 ~ 1300.0 Range of input
temperature J type sensor -200.0 ~ 1200.0
Digital output Temp. display unit
16 bit binary data
Displaying down to one decimal place
(K, J, type: 0.1)
Conversion speed 50ms/2chanelles note1)
Auto compensation by RJC sensing (Thermistor) Reference
junction
compensation
Average process Count averaging Additional
function Alarm Input disconnection detection
Warming-up time 15 min or above note2)
Insulation method
Non-insulation between input channels
Non-insulation between input terminal and PLC
main unit
I/O occupied points Fixed type: 64 points
Weight 20g

Chapter 2 Analog Input Module (4-channel)
2 - 1


2.1 Setting Sequence before operation

Before using the analog input module, follow steps below.

XBF-AD04A

Checking performance specification
Wiring
Reading analog input data
Setting parameter
Programming
Setting external voltage/current switch
Specification (2.2 performance specification)
z Operating environment
z Input type and range
z Digital output range
Wiring
z Wiring power (External DC24V)
z Wiring analog input
Setting switch
z Setting voltage/current input type
Analog input test
z XG5000 special module monitor test mode
Parameter
z XG5000 I/O parameter
Programming
z Programming for reading analog data
(U device)
Refer to trouble shooting when there is error
or analog data is not normal.
2 - 2

2.2 Specifications

2.2.1 General specifications
General specifications are as follows.

No. Items Specification
Related
standards
1
Operating
temp.
0 ~ 55 C
2
Storage
temp.
25 ~ +70 C
3
Operating
humidity
5 95%RH (Non-condensing)
4
Storage
humidity
5 95%RH (Non -condensing)
For discontinuous vibration -
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Number
10 f < 57Hz 0.075mm
57 f
150Hz
9.8m/s
2
(1G)
For continuous vibration
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude
10 f < 57Hz 0.035mm
5 Vibration
57 f
150Hz
4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
Each 10
times in
X,Y,Z
directions
IEC61131-2
6 Shocks
Max. impact acceleration : 147 m/s
2
(15G)
Authorized time : 11ms
Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse (Each 3 times in X,Y,Z
directions)
IEC61131-2
Square wave
impulse noise
1,500 V LSIS standard
Electrostatic
discharging
Voltage : 4kV(contact discharging)
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Class
Power
module
Digital/
Analog I/O
communication interface
7 Noise
Fast
Transient
/burst
noise Voltage 2kV 1kV
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
8
Ambient
conditions
No corrosive gas or dust
9
Operating
height
2000m or less
10
Pollution
degree
2 or less
11 Cooling type Natural air cooling
2 - 3

2.2.2 Performance specifications
Performance specifications are as follows.
Items XBF-AD04A
Analog input
range
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
DC 4 ~ 20mA
DC 0 ~ 20mA
Signed value 0 ~ 4000
Unsigned
value
-2000 ~ 2000
Precise
value
0 ~ 1000 400 ~ 2000/0 ~ 2000
Digital output
Range
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
Max. resolution 2.5(1/4000) 5(1/4000)
Insulation method
Connection terminal 11 point terminal block
Max. no of installation
7 (when using XBM(C)-DxxxS S type)
Inner (DC 5V) 120mA
Consumption
current
Weight 64g
Additional function Filter-processing, average-processing (time, count)

Notes
1) When A/D conversion module is released from the factory, Offset/Gain value is as adjusted for respective
analog input ranges, which is unavailable for user to change.
2) Offset Value: Analog input value where digital output value is 0 when digital output format is set to
Unsigned Value.
3) Gain Value: Analog input value where digital output value is 16000 when digital output format is set to
Unsigned Value.
2 - 4

2.3 Name of part and function

Respective designations of the parts are as described below.

No. Description
RUN LED

Displays the operation status of XBF-AD04A
On: Operation normal
Flickering: Error occurs (page 12-30)
Off: Module error
Terminal block
Analog input terminal, whose respective channels can be connected with
external devices.
Voltage/Current selection switch

Switch for voltage and current selection of analog input

2 - 5

2.4 Characteristic of I/O conversion

Characteristics of I/O conversion are the inclination connected in a straight line between Offset and
Gain values when converting analog signal (voltage or current input) from PLCs external device to
digital value. I/O conversion characteristics of A/D conversion modules are as described below.

2 - 6

2.5 Conversion Characteristic according to Input Range

Voltage input range can be set through user program or special module package for respective
channels. Output formats of digital data are as specified below;

A. Unsigned Value
B. Signed Value
C. Precise Value
D. Percentile Value

2.5.1 If the range is DC 0 ~ 10V

Digital output value for voltage input characteristic is as specified below.
(Resolution (based on 1/4000): 2.5 mV)

Analog input voltage (V)
Digital output
range
0 2.5 5 7.5 10 10.11
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4047)
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2047)
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise value
(0 ~ 1011)
0 250 500 750 1000 1011
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1011)
0 250 500 750 1000 1011

2 - 7

2.5.2 If the range is DC 0 ~ 20mA

Digital output value for current input characteristic is as specified below.
(Resolution (based on 1/4000): 5 )

Analog input current ()
Digital output
range
0 5 10 15 20 20.23
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4047)
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2047)
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise value
(0 ~ 2023)
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2023
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1011)
0 250 500 750 1000 1011

2 - 8

2.5.3 If range is DC4 ~ 20mA

Digital output value for current input characteristic is as specified below.
(Resolution (Based on 1/4000): 5 )

Analog input current ()
Digital
Output range
0 4 8 12 16 20 20.23
Unsigned value
(-48 ~ 4047)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed value
(-2048 ~ 2047)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise value
(381 ~ 2023)
381 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2023
Percentile value
(-12 ~ 1011)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Notes
1) If analog input value exceeding digital output range is input, the digital output value will be kept to be
the max. or the min. value applicable to the output range specified. For example, if the digital output
range is set to unsigned value (0 ~ 4000) and the digital output value exceeding 4047 or analog
value exceeding 0 is input, the digital output value will be fixed as 0~4047.
2) Voltage and current input shall not exceed 15 V and 25 respectively. Rising heat may cause
defects.

2 - 9

2.6 Accuracy

Accuracy of digital output value does not changed even if input range is changed. Figure below
shows the range of the accuracy with analog input range of 0 ~ 10 V and digital output type of
unsigned value selected.
Accuracy of XBF-AD04A is 0.5%.

[ Accuracy ]

(1) Accuracy when using 5V input
4000 0.5% = 20
Therefore the range of the accuracy will become (2000-20) ~ (2000+20) = 1980 ~ 2020 when
using 5V input.

4000 0.5% = 20
using 10V input.

2 - 10

2.7 Functions of Analog Input Module

Functions of XBF-AD04A conversion module are as described below.
Function Description
Channel Run/Stop
setting
(1) Specify Run/Stop of the channel to execute A/D conversion.
(2) If the unused channel is set to Stop, whole Run time can be reduced.
Input voltage/Current
range setting
(1) Specify analog input range to be used.
(2) Select range in parameter setting after select Voltage/Current switch.
Output data format
setting
(1) Specify digital output type.
(2) 4 output data formats are provided in this module.
A/D conversion
methods
(1) Sampling processing
Sampling process will be performed if A/D conversion type is not specified.
(2) Filter processing
Used to delay the sudden change of input value.
(3) Average processing
Outputs average A/D conversion value based on frequency or time.

There are three A/D conversion methods, sampling processing, filter processing and average processing.

Sampling Processing
Filter Processing
Average Processing
A/D Conversion Methods
Time Average
Count Average

(1) Sampling processing
It collects analog input sign through general A/D conversion processing at a specific interval so to
convert to digital. The time required for A/D conversion of analog input sign till saved on the memory
depends on the number of channels used.

(Processing time) = (Number of channels used) X (Conversion speed)

(Ex.) If the number of channels used is 3, its process time will be
3 x 1.5 = 4.5

Sampling is to calculate the sampling value of continuous analog sign at a specific interval.

2 - 11

(2) Filter processing
Filter process function is used to obtain stable digital output value by filtering (delaying) noise or
sudden change of input value. Filter constant can be specified for respective channels through user
program or I/O parameters setting.

Setting range: 1 ~ 99 (%)

F[n] = (1 - ) x A[n] + x F [n - 1]

F[n]: Present filter output value
A[n]: Present A/D converted value
F[n-1]: Previous filter output value
: Filter constant (0.01 ~ 0.99: previous value added)

If filter setting value is not specified within 1 ~ 99, RUN LED blinks at an interval of 1 second. In
order to set RUN LED to On status, reset the filter setting value within 1 ~ 99 and then convert
PLC CPU from STOP to RUN. Be sure to use request flag of error clear (UXY.11.0) to clear the
error through modification during RUN.

Analog input range: DC 0 ~ 10 V, Digital output range: 0 ~ 4000
If analog input value changes 0 V 10 V (0 4000), filter output value based on value is
as specified below.
Filter output value value
1 scan 2 scan 3 scan
value
*1)
0.01 0 3600 3960 3997 1% inclined toward previous value
*2)
*3)
*1) 4000 output after about 4 scans
*2) 4000 output after about 18 scans
*3) 4000 output after about 950 scans(1.19 s for 1 channel Run)

If filter process function is not used, present A/D converted value will be output as it is. The filter
process function takes value-added data between Present A/D converted value and Previous
A/D converted value. And the value-added data can be decided with filter constant. If output
data shakes too much, set a big filter constant value.

(3) Average processing
This process is used to execute A/D conversion of the channel designated for specified frequency or
for specified time and save the average of the accumulated sum on memory. Average processing
option and time/frequency value can be defined through user program or I/O parameters setting for
respective channels.

(a) What is the average process used for
This process is used for A/D conversion of abnormal analog input signal such as noise to a value
near to normal analog input signal.

(b) Average processing type
Average processing type is of time average and count average.

1) Time average processing
Setting range: 4 ~ 16000 (ms)
Average processing count within specified time is decided based on the number of channels
used.

Speed) Conversion ( x used) Channels of (Number
time Setting
count processing Average =

0 scan
2 - 12

Ex.1) Channels used: 1, setting time: 16000 ms

times
ms
ms
10667
5 . 1 1
16000
=
= count processing Average

Ex.2) Channels used: 4, setting time: 4 ms

times
ms
ms
1
5 . 1 4
4
=
= count processing Average

If setting value of time average is not specified within 4 ~ 16000, RUN LED blinks at an interval
of 1 second. In order to set RUN LED to On status, reset the setting value of time average within
4 ~ 16000 and then convert PLC CPU from STOP to RUN. Be sure to use request flag of error
clear (UXY.11.0) to clear the error through modification during RUN.

Time average is processed after converted to average of the times inside the A/D conversion
module. In this case, a remainder may be produced when setting time is divided by (number of
channels used X conversion speed), which will be disregarded. Thus, the average processing
frequency will be the quotient of [(setting time) (number of channels used x conversion
speed)].

Ex.) If the number of channels used is 5, and setting time is 151 ms

151 ms (4 X 1.5 ms) = 26 times Remainder of 2 26 times

2) Count average process
Setting range: 2 ~ 64000 (times)
The time required for average value to be saved on memory when frequency average used
depends on the number of channels used.

Process time = setting frequency X number of channels used X conversion speed

If setting value of count average is not specified within 2 ~ 64000, RUN LED blinks at
an interval of 1 second. In order to set RUN LED to On status, reset the setting value
of frequency average within 2 ~ 64000 and then convert PLC CPU from STOP to
RUN. Be sure to use request flag of error clear (UXY.11.0) to clear the error through
modification during RUN.

Ex.) If the number of channels used is 4, and average processing frequency is 50
50 X 4 X (1.5 ms) = 300 ms
2 - 13

2.8 Wiring

2.8.1 Precaution for wiring
(1) Dont let AC power line near to A/D conversion modules external input sign line. With an enough
distance kept away between, it will be free from surge or inductive noise.
(2) Cable shall be selected in due consideration of ambient temperature and allowable current,
whose size is not less than the max. cable standard of AWG22 (0.3).
(3) Dont let the cable too close to hot device and material or in direct contact with oil for long, which
will cause damage or abnormal operation due to short-circuit.
(4) Check the polarity when wiring the terminal.
(5) Wiring with high-voltage line or power line may produce inductive hindrance causing abnormal
operation or defect.

2.8.2 Wiring examples
(1) Example of voltage wiring
- In case of voltage/current input, wiring is same. Adjust the voltage/current setting switch
according to the case.

+
-
CH0
+
-
CH2
+
-
CH1
+
-
CH3
DC power
(For analog
supply)
CH0+
CH0-
CH1+
CH1-
CH2+
CH2-
CH3+
CH3-
DC24V+
DC24V-

(a) Input resistance of current input circuit is 250 (typ.).
(b) Input resistance of voltage input circuit is 1 M (min.).
(c) Enable the necessary channel only.
(d) Analog input module doesnt support power for input device. Use the external power supplier.

2 - 14

(2) Wiring example of 2-Wire sensor/transmitter (current input)

(d) Analog input module doesnt support power for input device. Use the external power supplier.

2 - 15

(3) Wiring example of 4-Wire sensor/transmitter (Voltage/Current input)

(d) Analog input module doesnt support power for input device. Use the external power
supplier.

2 - 16

(4) Relationship between voltage input accuracy and wiring length
In voltage input, the wiring (cable) length between transmitter or sensor and module has an effect
on digital-converted values of the module as specified below;

Where,

Rc: Resistance value due to line resistance of cable

Rs: Internal resistance value of transmitter or sensor

Ri: Internal resistance value (1) of voltage input module

Vin: Voltage allowed to analog input module

% Vi: Tolerance of converted value (%) due to source and cable length in voltage input

( ) [ ] Ri Rc Rs
Vs Ri
Vin
+ +

=
2

100 1 %
=
Vs
Vin
Vi %

Vs
Rs
Rc
Rc
Ri
Load
Analog input (Voltage)
Vin
2 - 17

2.9 Operation Parameter Setting

A/D conversion modules operation parameters can be specified through XG5000s [I/O parameters].

(1) Settings
For the users convenience of A/D conversion module, XG5000 provides GUI (Graphical User
Interface) for parameters setting of A/D conversion module. Setting items available through [I/O
parameters] on the XG5000 project window are as described below in the table.

Item Details
[I/O parameter] (1) Specify the following setting items necessary for the module
operation.
- Channel Enable/Disable setting
- Setting ranges of input voltage/current
- Output data format setting
- Filter processing Enable/Disable setting
- Filter constant setting
- Average processing Enable/Disable setting
- Average processing method setting
- Average value setting
(2) The data specified by user through S/W package will be saved on A/D
conversion module when [Special Module Parameters] are
downloaded. In other words, the point of time when [Special Module
Parameters] are saved on A/D conversion module has nothing to do
with PLC CPUs status RUN or STOP.

(2) I/O Parameter setting
(a) Run XG5000 to create a project.
(Refer to XG5000 program manual for details on how to create the project)

(b) Double-click [I/O parameters] on the project window.

(c) On the I/O parameters setting screen, find and click the slot of the base A/D conversion
module is installed on. 4-channel voltage type of A/D conversion module is installed on Base No.0,
Slot No.4 in this description.

2 - 18

(d) Click the arrow button on the screen above to display the screen where an applicable module
can be selected. Search for the applicable module to select.

(e) After the module selected, click [Details].

(f) A screen will be displayed for you to specify parameters for respective channels as shown below.
Click a desired item to display parameters to set for respective items.

2 - 19

Functions of Special Module Monitoring are as described below.

(1) Monitor/Test
Through applicable XG5000 menu of [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring], A/D converted
value can be monitored and the operation of A/D conversion module can be tested.
(2) Monitoring the max./min. value
The max./min. value of the channel can be monitored during Run. However, the max./min. value
displayed here is based on the present value shown on the screen. Accordingly, when
[Monitoring/Test] screen is closed, the max./min. value will not be saved.

The parameters specified for the test of A/D conversion module on the Special Module
Monitoring screen of [Special Module Monitoring] will be deleted the moment the Special
Module Monitoring screen is closed. In other words, the parameters of A/D conversion module
specified on the Special Module Monitoring screen will not be saved in [I/O parameters] located

Test function of [Special Module Monitoring] is provided for user to check the normal operation of
A/D conversion module even without sequence programming. If A/D conversion module is to be
used for other purposes than a test, use parameters setting function in [I/O parameters].

2.10 Special Module Monitoring Functions
Not saved in [I/O
parameters]
2 - 20

2.10.1 How to use special module monitoring

Monitoring special module will be based on XBF-AD04A.

(1) Start of [Special Module Monitoring]
Go through [OnLine] -> [Connect] and [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring] to start. If the
status is not [OnLine], [Special Module Monitoring] menu will not be active.

(2) How to use [Special Module Monitoring]
(a) With XG5000 connected to PLC CPU (on-line status), click [Monitor] -> [Special Module
Monitoring] to display Special Module Select screen as in Fig. 5.1 showing base/slot
information in addition to special module type. The module installed on the present PLC system
will be displayed on the list dialog box.

2 - 21

(b) Select Special module and click [Module information] to display the information as below.

(c) Click [Monitor] on the Special Module screen in [Special Module List] to display [Special Module
Monitoring] screen as below, where 4 options are available such as [Reset max./min. value], [start
Monitoring], [Test] and [Close]. A/D conversion modules output value and max./ min. value are
displayed on the monitoring screen at the top of the screen, and parameters items of respective
modules are displayed for individual setting on the test screen at the bottom of the screen.

2 - 22

(d) [Start Monitoring]: Click [Start Monitoring] to display A/D converted value of the presently operated
channel. Below screen is the monitoring screen displayed when the whole channels are in Stop status.
In the present value field at the screen bottom, presently specified parameters of A/D conversion
module are displayed
.

Execution screen of [Start Monitoring]

(e) [Test]: [Test] is used to change the presently specified parameters of A/D conversion module.
Click the setting value at the bottom field of the screen to change parameters. Below screen
will be displayed after [Test] is executed with channels 0s input voltage range changed to -
0~20 mA in the state of input not wired.

Execution screen of [Test]

2 - 23

(f) [Reset max/min value]: The max/min value field at the upper screen shows the max. value and the min.
value of A/D converted value. Click [Reset max/min value] to initialize the max./min. value. Below
screen is after [Reset max/min value] button is clicked in the screen of Special Module Monitor, where
channel 0s A/D converted value can be checked as reset.

Execution screen of [Reset max/min value]

.
(g) [Close]: [Close] is used to escape from the monitoring/test screen. When the monitoring/test
screen is closed, the max. value, the min. value and the present value will not be saved any
more.

2 - 24

2.11 Register U devices

Register the variables for each module referring to the special module information that is set in the I/O
parameter. The user can modify the variables and comments.

(1) Procedure

(a) Select the special module type in the [I/O Parameter Setting] window.

(b) Double click Variable/Comment from the project window.

(c) Select [Edit] [Register U Device].

2 - 25

(d) Click Yes.

(e) As shown below, the variables are registered.

(f) For IEC type, as shown below, the variables are registered.

(2) Save variables
(a) The contents of View Variable can be saved as a text file.
(b) Select [Edit] -> [Export to File].
(c) The contents of View variable are saved as a text file.

2 - 26

(3) View variables
The example of XGB S type and H type is as follows.
(a) The example program of XG5000 is as shown below.

(b) Select [View] -> [Variables]. The devices are changed into variables.

(c) Select [View] -> [Devices/Variables]. Devices and variables are both displayed.

2 - 27

(d) Select [View] -> [Device/Comments]. Devices and comments are both displayed.

(e) In case of IEC, you can see variables with diverse option at View menu like (b)~(d). The following
is example selecting View Variable/Comment at IEC type.

2 - 28

2.12 Configuration and Function of Internal Memory

A/D conversion module has the internal memory to transmit/receive data to/from PLC CPU.

2.12.1 I/O area of A/D converted data
I/O area of A/D converted data is as displayed in table.

Device assigned
(S or H type)
Device assigned
(IEC type)
Details R/W Sign direction
UXY.00.0
UXY.00.F
%UX0.x.0
%UX0.x.15
Module ERROR flag
Module READY flag
R A/D CPU
UXY.01.0
UXY.01.1
UXY.01.2
UXY.01.3
%UX0.x.16
%UX0.x.17
%UX0.x.18
%UX0.x.19
CH0 Run flag
CH1 Run flag
CH2 Run flag
CH3 Run flag
R A/D CPU
UXY.02 %UW0.x.2 Ch0 digital output value R
A/D CPU

UXY.11.0 %UX0.x.176 Flag to request error clear W CPU A/D

- In the device assigned, X stands for the Base No. and Y for the Slot No. on which module is installed.
- In order to read CH1 digital output value of A/D conversion module installed on Base No.0, Slot No.4,
it shall be displayed as U04.03. (in case of IEC type, %UW0.4.3)

- In order to read Flag to detect CH4 disconnection of A/D conversion module installed on Base No.0,
Slot No.5, it shall be displayed as U05.10.4.

Device Type
% U W 0 . 4 . 3
Slot No.
Base No
Word
S or H type
IEC type
S or H type
Device Type
% U X 0 . 5 . 19
Slot No.
Base No
Bit
IEC type
2 - 29

(1) Module Ready/Error flag (U0x.00, x: slot number)
(a) U0x.00.F: It will be ON when PLC CPU is powered or reset with A/D conversion ready to
process A/D conversion.
(b) U0x.00.0: It is a flag to display the error status of A/D conversion module.

(2) Run channel flag (UXY.01, X: Base No., Y: Slot No.)
The area where Run information of respective channels is saved
* XGB series base number is 0

(3) Digital output value (UXY.02 ~ UXY.09, X: Base No., Y: Slot No.)
(a) A/D converted-digital output value will be output to buffer memory addresses UXY.02 ~ UXY.05
(%UW0.x.2 ~ %UW0.x.5) for respective channels.
(b) Digital output value will be saved in 16-bit binary.
XGB PLCs base number is 0.

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Channel 0 digital output value

Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
R
e
a
d
y

E
r
r
o
r


C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Error status
Bit On (1): error, Bit Off (0): normal
U0x.00
Module READY
Bit On (1): normal, Bit Off (0): error
Run channel information
Bit ON (1): During Run, Bit Off (0): Operation Stop
UXY.01
(UW0.x.0)
(%UW0.x.1)
U0x.02
U0x.03
U0x.04
U0x.05
U0x.02
U0x.03
U0x.04
U0x.05
(%UW0.x.2)
(%UW0.x.3)
(%UW0.x.4)
(%UW0.x.5)
2 - 30

(4) Flag to request error clear (( ) means the case of IEC type, x: slot number)
(a) If a parameters setting error occurs, address No.22s error code will not be automatically
erased even if parameters are changed correctly. At this time, turn the error clear request bit
ON to delete address No.22s error code and the error displayed in XG5000s [System Monitor].
In addition, RUN LED which blinks will be back to On status.
(b) The flag to request error clear shall be used surely together with UXY.00.0 attached thereon
for guaranteed Normal operation.
XGB PLC base number is 0

[How to use the flag to request error clear (S type or H type)]

[How to use the flag to request error clear (IEC type)]


E
C
R
Flag to request error clear (UXY.11.0)
Bit ON (1): Error clear request, Bit Off (0): Error clear standing-by
UXY.11.0
(%UX0.x.11)
2 - 31

2.12.2 Operation parameters setting area

Setting area of A/D conversion modules Run parameters is as described in Table.

Memory address
Hex. Dec.
Details R/W Remark
0
H
0 Channel enable/disable setting R/W PUT
1
H
1
Setting ranges of input
voltage/current
R/W PUT
2
H
2 Output data format setting R/W PUT
3
H
3
Filter processing enable/disable
setting
R/W PUT
4
H
4 CH0 filter constant
5
H
6
H
7
H
R/W PUT
C
H
12
Average processing enable/disable
setting
R/W
D
H
13 Average processing method setting R/W
E
H
14 CH0 average value
F
H
10
H
11
H
R/W
PUT
16
H
22 Error code R/W GET
R/W is to denote Read/Write if available from PLC program.

(1) Setting operation channels
If the channel to use is not specified, all the channels will be set to Prohibited.

(2) Setting input range
The range of analog voltage input is DC 0~10V, the range of analog current input is DC 4~20mA.

bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

CH.
3
CH.
2
CH.
1
CH.
0
CH.3 CH.2 CH.1 CH.0
Setting channel to use (bit)
Bit On (1): Run, Bit Off (0): Stop
Address 0
Setting input range (bit)
00: 0 ~ 10V(4 ~ 20mA)
01: 0 ~ 20mA
11: 4 ~ 20mA
Address 1
2 - 32

(3) Setting output data type
(a) The range of digital output data for analog input can be specified for respective channels.
(b) If the output data range is not specified, the range of all the channels will be set to 0 ~ 4000.

(4) Setting filter process
If the filter process is not specified, the filter process of all channels will not be executed.

(5) Setting filter constant
When using the filter process, specify the filter constant.

(6) Setting average process
If the average process is not specified, the average process of all channels will not be executed.

CH.3 CH.2 CH.1 CH.0

CH.
3
CH.
2
CH.
1
CH.
0
CH.0 filter constant
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 it0

CH.
3
CH.
2
CH.
1
CH.
0
Setting output data type (bit)
00: 0 ~ 4000
01: -2000 ~ 2000
10: 0 ~ 1000(400 ~ 2000/0 ~ 2000)
11: 0 ~ 1000
Address 2
Setting filter process (bit)
Bit On (1): used, bit Off (0): not used
Address 3
Address 4
Address 5
Address 6
Address 7
Setting average process (bit)
Bit On (1): used, Bit Off (0): not used
Address 12
2 - 33

(7) Setting average process method
This area is used to specify average processing method, where count average and time
average are available.

(8) Error code (address 22)
(a) It saves the error code detected from A/D conversion module.
(b) Error type and details is as below.

Error code (Dec.) Details Remark
0 Normal operation RUN LED flickering
50# Exceeding of filter constant setting range
60# Exceeding of time average setting range
70#
Exceeding of Frequency average setting
range
80# Setting error of analog input range
Flickering RUN LED per
1 second

# of the error codes stands for the channel with error found.

(c) If 2 or more errors occur, the module sill not save other error codes than the first error code
found.
(d) If an error found is corrected, use the flag to request error clear, or let power OFF ON in
order to stop LED blinking and to delete the error code.
.

CH.3 CH.2 CH.1 CH.0

Error code
Address 22
Setting average process method (bit)
00: count average
01: time average
Address 13
2 - 34

2.13 Example Program

2.13.1 Program to sort A/D converted value in size
(1) System configuration

(2) Initial setting

No. Item Details
Internal memory
address
The value to write in
internal memory
1 Channel Ch0, Ch1, Ch2 0 h0007
2 Input voltage range 0 ~ 10 V 1 h0000
3 Output data range 0 ~ 4000 2 h0000
4 Filter process Ch0 3 h0001
5 Ch0 filter constant 50 4 50
6 Average process Ch1, Ch2 12 h0006
6
Average process
method
Frequency average: Ch1
Time average: Ch2
13 h0100
Frequency average value:
100 (times)
15 100
7 Average value
Time average value:
200 (ms)
16 200

(3) Program
(a) If Ch 0s digital value is less than 3000, Contact No. 0 (P00080) of relay output module
installed on Slot No.2 will be On.
(b) If CH 1s digital value is greater than 3200, Contact No.2 (P00082) of relay output module
installed on Slot No.2 will be On.
(c) If CH 2s digital value is greater than or equal to 3000 and less than or equal to 3200, Contact
No.4 (P00086) of relay output module installed on Slot No.2 will be On.
(d) If CH 2s digital value is equal to 3200, Contact No.5 (P00085) of relay output module installed
on Slot No.2 will be On.

2 - 35

(4) Program
(a) Program example using [I/O Parameters]

[Program in case of S type or H type]
Slot no.
Internal
memory
address
Device for
saving
Data no. to read
Read error code
2 - 36

]
[Program in case of IEC type]
2 - 37

(b) Program example of PUT/GET instruction used

[Program in case of S type or H type]
Channel Run signal
2 - 38

2 - 39

[Program in case of IEC type]
2 - 40

2.14 Troubleshooting

2.14.1 RUN LED flickers

Error code
(Dec.)
Error Details Action
50#
Filter constant setting
range exceeded
Change filter constant setting value within 1 ~ 99.
60#
Time average setting
range exceeded
Change time average setting value within 4 ~
16000.
70#
Frequency average
setting range exceeded
Change frequency average setting value within 2
~ 64000.
# indicates channel number.

RUN LED flickers.
RUN LED flickers every 0.2 sec.
It seems to be a module defect.
Contact the nearest agency or LS branch office.

RUN LED flickers every 1 sec.
It is Run parameters setting error. Check the error code to
take action against as follows in the table below.
Yes
No
Yes
2 - 41

2.14.2 RUN LED is off
RUN LED is off.
A/D conversion module is installed on the base
correctly?
Correctly install A/D conversion module on the base.
.
Contact the nearest agency or A/S center.
I/O information can be seen at the XG5000.
Normally operated if A/D conversion module with
error is changed to another module
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
2 - 42

2.14.3 A/D conversion value is not normal
A/D conversion value is 0.
Channel status is set as Enable.
External power (DC 24V) is supplied.
Check and correct the channel status on the I/O parameter.
Supply external power (DC 24V)
Refer to 2.8.2 and wire properly.
Wiring of each channel is normal.
Input voltage/current of external terminal
block is normal.
Check the status of the external input sensor
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
2 - 43

2.14.4 Status check of A/D conversion module through XG5000 system monitor

Module type, module information, OS version and module status of A/D conversion module can be
checked through XG5000 system monitoring function.

1) Execution sequence
Two routes are available for the execution.
(1) [Monitor] -> [System Monitoring] -> And on the module screen, click the right mouse button to
display [Module Information].
(2) [Monitor] -> [System Monitoring] -> And Double-click the module screen.

2) Module information
(1) Module type: shows the information of the module presently installed.
(2) Module information: shows the OS version information of A/D conversion module.
(3) O/S version: shows the OS prepared date of A/D conversion module.
(4) Module status: shows the present error code. (Refer to 7.1 for detailed error codes)

Chapter 3 Analog Output Module
3 - 1


3.1 Setting Sequence before Operation

Before using the analog output module, follow steps below.

XBF-DV04A / XBF-DC04A

System configuration and selection
Wiring
Checking analog output data
Setting parameter
Programming
Specification
Operating environment
Digital input range
Analog output range
System configuration
Max. No. equip-able
Selecting the external power
Wiring
Wiring (external DC24V)
Analog output wiring
Analog output test
XG5000 special module monitor
test mode
Parameter
XG5000 I/O parameter
Programming
Program for writing digital data
(U device)
If there is error or analog output
is abnormal, refer to the trouble shooting.

3 - 2

3.2 Specification


Here describes general specification of analog output module.
No. Items Specification Reference
1 Ambient Temp. 0 ~ 55 C
-
2 Storage Temp. 25 ~ 70 C
3 Ambient humidity 5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing)
4 Storage humidity 5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing)
5 Vibration
Occasional vibration -
Frequency Acceleration Pulse width Times
IEC61131-2
10 f 57Hz 0.075mm
10 times
each
direction
(X,Y and Z)
57 f 150Hz 9.8m/s
2
(1G)
Continuous vibration
Frequency Acceleration Pulse width
10 f 57Hz 0.035mm
57 f 150Hz 4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
6 Shocks
Peak acceleration : 147 m/s
2
(15G)
Duration : 11ms
Pulse wave type : Half-sine (3 times each direction per each axis)
7 Impulse noise
Square wave
impulse noise
Electrostatic
discharge
Voltage: 4kV (Contact discharge)
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast transient
/Burst noise
Classifi-
cation
Power
supply
Digital/Analog Input/Output,
Communication Interface
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2kV 1kV
8
Operation
ambience
Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust
-
9 Altitude Less than 2,000m
10 Pollution degree Less than 2
11 Cooling method Air-cooling
3 - 3


Here describes performance specification of analog output module.
Item
Specification
XBF-DV04A XBF-DC04A
Analog
output
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistance: 2k or more)
DC 4 ~ 20mA
DC 0 ~ 20mA
(Load resistance: 510 or less)
Digital
input
Range
Signed value 0 ~ 4000 0 ~ 4000
Unsigned value -2000 ~ 2000 -2000 ~ 2000
Precise value 0 ~ 1000 400 ~ 2000/0 ~ 2000
Percentile value 0 ~ 1000 0 ~ 1000
Maximum resolution 2.5 (1/4000) 5 (1/4000)
Maximum conversion speed 1/channel
Absolute maximum output DC 15V DC +25
Number of maximum channel 4 channels
Insulation method
(no insulation between channels)
Terminal connected 11-point terminal block
Current
consump
tion
Internal (DC 5V) 110mA 110mA
External
(DC 21.6 ~26.4V)
70mA 120mA
Weight 64g 70g

Remark
Offset and gain about analog output range have been set at the factory and the user can change them.
3 - 4

3.3 Designations and Functions

Here describes designation and functions.

No. Description

RUN LED
It displays the operation status of D/A conversion module
- On: Normal operation status
- Flickering: Error occurred
- Off: Power off or abnormal status of the module

Analog output terminal (Voltage, Current)
It is an output terminal to connect an analog output (Voltage, Current) of each
channel to external machinery and tools.

External power input terminal
It is an external DC 24V input terminal that supplies power for an analog
output (voltage, current).

XBF-DV04A
RUN
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
XBF-DC04A
RUN
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3

3 - 5

3.4 Characteristic of I/O Conversion

Characteristic of I/O conversion converts a digital input into an analog output (voltage, current) and
displays a straight line with the gradient as shown below. The range of digital input is shown with
Unsigned Value, Signed Value, Precise Value, and Percentile Value such as the graph below.

Digital input range
Offset value
Gain
value
Digital
input
Analog
output
2000 4000 0 -48 4047
0 2000 -2000 -2048 2047
500 1000 0 -12 1011
500 1000 0 -12 1011
Unsigned value
Singed value
Precise value
Percentile value
10V
0V
5V
A
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t

r
a
n
g
e
20mA
4mA
12mA
20mA
0mA
10mA
1200 2000 400 381 2018
1000 2000 0 -24 2023

3 - 6

3.5 Characteristic of Input/Output

The range of a voltage output is DC 0 ~ 10V and a current output is DC 4 ~ 20mA / DC 0 ~ 20mA.

Digital input value toward analog voltage output is shown below.
Resolution: 2.5mV (1/4000), Accuracy: within 0.5%
The range of
digital input
Analog voltage output
under 0V 0V 2.5V 5V 7.5V 10V over 10V
Unsigned value
(-48 ~ 4047)
under 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 over 4000
Signed value
(-2048 ~ 2047)
under -2000 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 over 2000
Precise value
(-12 ~ 1011)
under 0 0 250 500 750 1000 over 1000
Percentile value
(-12 ~ 1011)
under 0 0 250 500 750 1000 over 1000

Digital input value toward analog current output is shown below.
Resolution: 5A (1/4000), Accuracy: within 0.5%
The range of
digital input
Analog current output
under 4mA 4mA 8mA 12mA 16mA 20mA over 20mA
under 0mA 0mA 5mA 10mA 15mA 20mA over 20mA
Unsigned value
(-48 ~ 4047)
under 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 over 4000
Signed value
(-2048 ~ 2047)
under -2000 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 over 2000
Precise value
(381 ~ 2018, -24 ~ 2023)
under 400 400 800 1200 1600 2000 over 2000
under 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 over 2000
Percentile value
(-12 ~ 1011)
under 0 0 250 500 750 1000 over 1000

3 - 7

3.6 Accuracy

Though the range of input is changed, the accuracy for the analog output values doesnt change. The
range of accuracy is displayed at the ambient temperature of 25 5 if you select unsigned value as
your range of the digital input. The accuracy is satisfied 0.5%.

2000 4000 0
10V
0V
5V
10.05V
9.95V
0.05V
-0.05V
Digital input
A
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t
20mA
20.1mA
19.9mA
0mA
0.1mA
-0.1mA
10mA

(1) Accuracy in case of 5V output
4000 0.5% = 20
So in case of 5V output, accuracy range is (5V - 200.0025V) ~ (5V+200.0025V) = 1980 ~ 2020.

(2) Accuracy in case of 10V
4000 0.5% = 20
So in case of 10V output, accuracy range is (4000-20) ~ (4000+20) = 3980 ~ 4020.

3 - 8

3.7 Functions of Analog Output Module

Here describes functions of XBF-DV04A/DC04A module.
Function Details
Operation
channel
1) It sets up Run/Stop of a channel that will operate an analog output.
2) You can save the time of whole operation by stopping unused channels.
The range of
output
1) It sets up the range of an analog output.
2) Analog voltage output module offers one range of output (DC 0 ~ 10V) and
analog current output module offers two (DC 4 ~ 20mA, DC 0 ~ 20mA).
The range of
input data
1) It sets up the range of a digital input.
2) It offers four ranges of a digital input.
The status of
channel output
1) It sets up the output status of a channel when it switches Run to Stop.
2) It offers four types of output status.

3 - 9

3.8 Wiring

3.8.1 Precautions for wiring

(1) Use separate cable of an A.C. power line and an external output signal of an analog output
module to prevent a surge or inductive noise from the A.C. side.
(2) Select the cable with consideration of an ambient temperature and a permitted current limit. It is
recommended over AWG22 (0.3).
(3) Dont let the cable at close range to hot devices or materials. And dont bring it into contact with
oil for a long time. These are the factors of a short circuit occurs unusual operation or damages
devices.
(4) Check the polarity before external power is supplied to the terminal.
(5) It may produce inductive hindrance that is a cause of unusual operations or defects if you wire
the cable with a high-voltage line or a power line.

3.8.2 Wiring example
(1) Wiring example for analog voltage output module

(2) Wiring example for analog current output module

1: Use a 2-core twisted shielded wire.

D/A
Conversion
circuit
DC/DC
Conversion circuit
CH0+
CH0-
CH3+
CH3-
CH1+
CH1-
CH2+
CH2-
DC +24V
DC 0V
CH0
CH3
+15V
-15V
DC +24V
DC 0V
Over 2k
Over 2k
Motor driver etc.
Motor driver etc.
GND
GND
XBF-DV04A
1
1
D/A
Conversion
circuit
DC/DC
Conversion circuit
CH0+
CH0-
CH3+
CH3-
CH1+
CH1-
CH2+
CH2-
DC +24V
DC 0V
CH0
CH3
+15V
-15V
DC +24V
DC 0V
Under
510
Under
510
Motor driver etc.
Motor driver etc.
GND
GND
XBF-DC04A
1
1
3 - 10


You can specify operation parameters of the analog output module through [I/O parameters] menu in
XG5000.

(1) Setting items
For the users convenience, XG5000 provides GUI (Graphical User Interface) for parameters setting of
analog voltage/current output module.
Followings are available through [I/O parameters] on the XG5000 project window.

Item Details
[I/O Parameters]
(1) It specifies the following items for the module operation.
- Channel Enable/Disable
- Analog output range
- Input type
- Channel output type
(2) After the parameters that user specified in XG5000 are downloaded,
they will be saved to a flash memory in the CPU unit..

(2) How to use [I/O Parameters] menu
(a) Run XG5000 to create a project. (Refer to XG5000 program manual for details on how to create
the project)

(b) Double-click [I/O Parameters] on the project window.

(c) Click the slot of the base that contains analog output module in the [I/O Parameter Setting] window.
In the example, the anolog output module is contained in the slot 1.

3 - 11

(d) Click the arrow button then you can see the menu to choose the applicable module. Select the
applicable module.

(e) Double-click the applicable slot that is selected for the parameters setting or click [Details].


3 - 12

3.10 Special Module Monitoring Function

You can start to test the analog output module connecting by [Online] [Connect] and then click
[Monitor] [Special Module Monitoring] menu in XG5000.

Remark
1) If the program is not displayed normally because of insufficient system resource, you may start
XG5000 again after close the program and other applications.
2) I/O parameters those are specified in the state of [Special Module Monitoring] menu are temporarily
set up for the test. They will be disappeared when the [Special Module Monitoring] is finished.
3) Testing of [Special Module Monitoring] is the way to test the analog output module. It can test the
module without a sequence program.


Special module monitoring function is described below based on the analog voltage output module (XGF-
DV04A).

Go through [Online] [Connect] and [Monitor] [Special module Monitoring] to start. If the
status is not online, [Special Module Monitoring] menu will not be activated.

(a) Connecting XG5000 with PLC basic unit, [Special Module List] window will show base/slot
information and types of special module by click [Monitor] [Special Module Monitoring].
Special Module List wiil display the modules that are installed in PLC now.

3 - 13

(b) Select a special module then click [Module Info.] button to display the information as described
below.

(c) Click [Monitor] button in the [Special Module List] window to display the [Special Module
Monitor] window as below

Parameter setting for a test
3 - 14

(d) [Start Monitoring] button will show you digital input data of the operating channel.

(e) [Test] is used to change the parameters of the voltage output module. You can change the
parameters when you click the values at the bottom of the screen. It is only available when
XGB CPU units status is in [Stop Monitoring].

(f) [Close] is used to escape from the monitoring/test screen.
Monitoring screen
Details of channel 0
3 - 15

3.11 Register U devices (special module variable)


(1) Registration sequence
(a) Select a special module type in [I/O Parameter Setting] window.

(b) Double-click [Variable/Comment] from the project window.

In case of IEC, select [Edit] [Register special module variable]

3 - 16

(d) Click Yes.

3 - 17

(2) Save variables
(a) The contents of View Variables can be saved as a text file
(b) Click [Edit] [Export to File].
(c) The contents of View Variable are saved as a text file.

(3) View variables in a program
(a) The example of XG5000 is shown below.

(b) Select [View] [Variables]. The devices are changed into variables.

(c) Select [View] [Devices/Variables]. Device and variable both are displayed.

3 - 18

(d) Select [View] [Devices/Comments]. Device and comment both are displayed.

3 - 19

3.12 Internal memory

Describes configuration and function of internal memory

3.12.1 Data I/O area
Describes data I/O area of analog output module
Address
(s, h
type)
Address
(IEC
type)
Description Details Remarks
U0x.00 %UW0.x.0 Module Ready / Error
F(15) Bit On(1): Module Ready
0~3 Bit On(1): Channel Error
Read
available
U0x.01 %UW0.x.1 CH operation information
Bit On(1): Channel Run
Bit Off(0): Channel Stop

U0x.02 %UW0.x.2 Output setting
Bit On(1): Output Allow
Bit Off(0): Output Forbid
Read/Write
available
U0x.03 %UW0.x.3 CH0 digital input value
12-bit binary data

In the device assignment, x stands for a slot number that the module is installed

(1) Module Ready/Channel Error information ( ( ) means deice name of IEC type)
(a) U0x.00.F (%UX0.x.15): It will be ON when XGB CPU unit is powered or reset with the condition
that an analog output module has prepared to convert.
(b) U0x.00.0 ~ U0x.00.3 (%UW0.x.0~%UW0.x.3): It is the flags those display error status of each
channel in the analog output module.

(2) Channel operation information
(a) This area is used to display the channel being used.

R
e
a
d
y

C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0

C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Error information (bit)
Bit On (1): Error
Bit Off (0): Normal
Module Ready
Bit On (1): Ready
Bit Off (0): Not Ready
Run channel information (bit)
Bit On (1): During Run
Bit Off (0): Operation Stop
U0x.00
U0x.01
(%UW0.x.0)
(%UW0.x.1)
3 - 20

(3) Output setting
(a) Each channel can be specified enable/disable the analog output.
(b) If the output is not specified, output of all the channels will be disabled.

(4) Digital input
(a) Digital input value can be selected and used within the range of -48~4047, -2048~2047, -
12~1011 (381~2018/-24~2023), and -12~1011 based on input type.
(b) If the digital input value is not specified, it will be set to 0.


C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Digital input Data of CH0
Address
(S, H type)
Address
(IEC type)
Details
U0x.03 %UW0.x.3 Digital input value of CH0
Output status setting (bit)
Bit On (1): Allowed
Bit Off (0): Forbidden
U0x.02
U0x.03

U0x.04

U0x.05

U0x.06

(%UW0.x.2)
(%UW0.x.3)
(%UW0.x.4)
(%UW0.x.5)
(%UW0.x.6)
3 - 21

3.12.2 Setting area of operation parameters

XBF-DV04A
Address
(Dec)
0 Set up the run channel
Bit On(1): Run
Bit Off(0): Stop
Read/Write
available
1 Set up the output voltage range Bit (00): 0 ~ 10V
2 Set up the input data type
Bit (00): 0 ~ 4000
Bit (01): -2000 ~ 2000
Bit (10): 0 ~ 1000
Bit (11): 0 ~ 1000
3 Set up the output type of CH0
0: outputs the previous value
1: outputs the min. value of output range
2: outputs the mid. value of output range
3: outputs the max. value of output range
11 CH0 setting error
Error code
Read
available

XBF-DC04A
Address
(Dec)
0 Set up the run channel
Bit On(1): Run
Bit Off(0): Stop
Read/Write
available
1 Set up the output voltage range
Bit (00): 4 ~ 20mA
Bit (01): 0 ~ 20mA
2 Set up the input data type
Bit (00): 0 ~ 4000
Bit (01): -2000 ~ 2000
Bit (10): 400 ~ 2000/0 ~ 2000
Bit (11): 0 ~ 1000
0: outputs the previous value
1: outputs the min. value of output range
2: outputs the mid. value of output range
3: outputs the max. value of output range
Error code
Read
available

(1) Setting up the run channel
If the run channel is not specified, all the channels will be set to Stop.

-
C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Run channel (bit)
1: Run
0: Stop
Address 0
3 - 22

(2) Setting up the output voltage/current range
The range of analog output voltage is DC 0 ~ 10V and analog output current is DC 4 ~ 20mA, DC
0 ~ 20mA.

(3) Setting up the input data type
(a) Input type can be specified for respective channels.
(b) If input data type is not specified, all the channels will be set to the range of 0 ~ 4000.

(4) Setting up the output type
(a) It defines an analog output status when XGB CPU unit is stopped.
(b) The range is 0 ~3 and used devices are regarded as Words.

Address Details

- CH 3 CH 2 CH 1 CH 0
- CH 3 CH 2 CH 1 CH 0
-
- - - - - - - - - - - - - Value
Output range (bit)
00: 0 ~ 10V(4 ~ 20mA)
01: 0 ~ 20mA

Input data type (bit)
00: 0 ~ 4000
01: -2000 ~ 2000
10: 0 ~ 1000(400 ~ 2000/0 ~ 2000)
11: 0 ~ 1000

Address 2
Address 3
~
Address 6

Input data type (bit)
00: Previous value
01: Min. value
10: Mid. value
11: Max. value

Address 1
3 - 23

(5) Error code
It displays error codes of each channel.

Address Details
11 CH0 error
12 CH1 error
13 CH2 error
14 CH3 error

Error code
(Dec)
Details LED status
- Offset/Gain setting error Blinks every 2 sec.
31# Exceed the range of parameter
Blinks every 1sec.
41# Exceed the range of digital input
# stands for the channel with error found.
Error code
Address 11
~
Address 14

Error code (Decimal)

3 - 24


3.13.1 Analog output program

(1) Program example using [I/O Parameter Setting].

Moduleready
Digitalinputdata CH.Runinformation

3 - 25

(2) Program example with PUT/GET instruction.
SlotNo.
Internalmemory
address
Data
DataNo.towrite
Moduleready
Digitalinputdata CH.Runinformation

(3) Program example using parameter in case of IEC type

3 - 26

4) Program example using PUT/GET instruction in case of IEC type

3 - 27



Error Code
(Dec.)
Error Details Action
31# Parameter range excess error Adjust parameter setting range
41#
Digital input value range excess
error
Adjust digital input value range
# indicates channel number.

RUN LED flickers.
It seems to be a module defect.

RUN LED flickers every 1 sec.
It is Run parameters setting error. Check the error code to
take action against as follows in the table below.
Yes
No
Yes
RUN LED is Off.
D/A conversion module is installed on the base
correctly?
Correctly install D/A conversion module on the base.
.

Normally operated if D/A conversion module with
error is changed to another module.
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes

3 - 28

3.14.3 Analog output value is not normal.

D/A conversion value is 0.
Channel status is set as Enable.
External power (DC 24V) is supplied.
Check and correct the channel status on the I/O parameter.
Refer to 2.8.2 and wire properly.
Wiring of each channel is normal.
Input voltage/current of external terminal
block is normal.
Set U0x.02 to enable the output referring to p3-19
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
3 - 29

3.14.4 Status check of D/A conversion module through XG5000 system monitor

Module type, module information, O/S version and module status of D/A conversion module can be

(1) Execution sequence
(a) [Monitor] -> [System Monitoring] -> And on the module screen, click the right mouse button to
(b) [Monitor] -> [System Monitoring] -> And Double-click the module screen.

(2) Module information
(a) Module type: shows the information of the module presently installed.
(b) Module information: shows the O/S version information of A/D conversion module.
(c) O/S version: shows the O/S prepared date of A/D conversion module.
(d) Module status: shows the present error code. (Refer to 3.23 for detailed error codes)

Chapter 4 RTD Input Module
4 - 1



Before using the RTD input module, follow steps below.

XBF-RD04A / XBF-RD01A

Wiring
Reading temperature data
Setting parameter
Programming
Specification
Digital input range
Max. No. equip-able
Selecting the external power
Wiring
Wiring (external DC24V)
RTD input wiring
RTD input test
XG5000 special module
monitor test mode
Parameter
Programming
(U device)
If there is error or RTD input value is
abnormal, refer to the trouble shooting
4 - 2

4.2 Specification

4.2.1 General Specifications

Here describes general specifications of RTD input module.
-
2 Storage Temp. 25 ~ +70 C
5 Vibration
IEC61131-2
10 s f < 57Hz 0.075mm
10 times
each
direction
(X,Y and Z)
57 s f s 150Hz 9.8m/s
2
(1G)
10 s f < 57Hz 0.035mm
57 s f s 150Hz 4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
6 Shocks
- Peak acceleration : 147 m/s
2
(15G)
- Duration : 11ms
- Pulse wave type : Half-sine (3 times each direction per each axis)
7 Impulse noise
Square wave
impulse noise
Electrostatic
discharge
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast transient
/Burst noise
Classifi-
cation
Power
supply
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2kV 1kV
8
Operation
ambience
-
4 - 3


Here describes general specifications of RTD input module.
Item
Specifications
XBF-RD04A XBF-RD01A
No. of input channel 4 channels One channel
Input sensor
type
PT100 JIS C1604-1997
JPT100 JIS C1604-1981 , KS C1603-1991
Temperature
input range
PT100 -200 ~ 600
JPT100 -200 ~ 600
Digital output
PT100 -2000 ~ 6000
JPT100 -2000 ~ 6000
Scaling display

0 ~ 4000
Accuracy
Normal
temp.(25)
Within 0.3%
Full temp.(0~55) Within 0.5%
Conversion speed 40ms / channel
Insulation
Channel to
Channel

Non-insulation
Terminal to PLC
Power
Wiring method 3-wire
Function
Filtering Digital filter (160 ~ 64000ms)
Current
consumption
Inner DC5V 100
external DC24V 100
Weight 63g

4 - 4

4.3 Part Names and Functions

Here describes part names and functions.

No. Name Descriptions
RUN LED
Displays the hardware operation status of XBF-RD04A
On: Normal
Flickering: Error (0.2s flickering)
Off: power disconnected, hardware error
ALM LED
Displays the disconnection status of XBF-RD04A
(Alarm indication LED)
Flickering: Disconnection is detected (1sec flickering)
Off: normal operation

Terminal
block
Terminal block for connecting external RTD temperature sensor

External
power supply
terminal
Terminal for supplying external DC24V

Connector for
extension
Connection connector for connecting extension module

4 - 5

4.4 Temperature Conversion Characteristic

Since RTD sensor has non-linear characteristic, RTD input module linearizes the relationship between
input and output in each section.
The graph below is an example to describe the linearization process and is different with graph about
sensor temperature input.

(1) PT100: JIS1604-1997

(2) JPT100: JIS C1604-1981, KS C1603-1991

Non-linear characteristics: The resistance-temperature characteristics for RTD sensor are presented
with table (JIS C1604-1997). This characteristics table displays resistance value of the sensor to
temperature, namely, the change of the resistance value per increment of 1. When the
temperature is changed by 1, the change of resistance is not in constant width but in different
width per section, which is called the non-linear characteristics.
600.0
0.0
-200.0
18.52
Measured temperature
Resistance ()
()
Temperature ()
100
313.71
Linearized sensor characteristics
Real Sensor characteristics
0.0
-
200.0
17.14
Resistance ()
Temperature ()
100
317.28
Real sensor characteristics
600.0
Remark
4 - 6

4.5 Conversion Speed

The conversion speed of XGF-RD4A is 40 ms per channel and each channel is converted
sequentially, that is, one channel is converted and then the next channel is converted.
(Run/stop can be specified independently for each channel.)
The conversion speed includes the time to convert input temperature (resistance value) to digital
value and to save the converted digital data into the internal memory.

Processing time = 40ms X Number of the using channels

[Example] 3 channels are used: Processing time = 40ms X 3 = 120ms

4.6 Accuracy

The accuracy of RTD module is described below.
When the ambient temperature is 25 5: within 0.3% of available input range
When the ambient temperature is 0 to 55: within 0.5% of available input range

Example) PT100 is used and the ambient temperature is normal.
To measure 100, the conversion data output range:
100 - [ { 600 - (-200) } x 0.3 % ] ~ 100 + [ { 600 - (-200) } x 0.3 % ]
Namely, 97.6 ~ 102.4 []

4.7 Temperature Display

(1) The input temperature is converted to digital value down to the one decimal place.

Ex.) If the detected temperature is 123.4, its converted value to be saved to the internal
memory will be 1234.

(2) Temperature can be converted to Celsius or Fahrenheit scale temperature value as desired.

Ex) If Pt100 sensor is used, the temperature of 100.0 can be converted to 2120 when
Fahrenheit scale is used.
Conversion to , 32
5
9
+ = C F
Conversion to , ( ) 32
9
5
= F C
(3) Maximum temperature input range is higher/lower within 10 than regular temperature input
range. However, the precision will not be guaranteed for any temperature out of regular
temperature input range.

Maximum temperature input ranges of sensor are as follows;
PT100 : -210.0 ~ 610.0
JPT100 : -210.0 ~ 610.0

4 - 7

4.8 Scaling Function

It is used to scale and output the range specified by the user other than temperature range.

Scaling expression =
2
) 2000 10 ( + e Temperatur

Ex.) When scaling is allowed and sensor input is 200 with PT100 sensor, scaling value is as follows.
Scaling value =
2
) 2000 10 200 ( +
= 2000

The figure below displays the relation between temperature input and scaling value.

0.0
-200.0
Temperature
Conversion value
Scaling
conversion
value
600.0
4000
2000
200.0
4 - 8

4.9 Disconnection Detection Function

(1) As a module used to measure the temperature with the RTD temperature sensor directly
connected, it detects and displays disconnection of the sensor connected. If any disconnection
occurs in the sensor used and extended lead wire, LED (ALM) will flicker in a cycle of 1 second
and produce an error code.

(2) Disconnection can be detected per channel, however, only for the channel specified to run.
LED (ALM) is used in common for all the channels. It will flicker if one or more channels are
disconnected.

(3) The figure below shows the temperature sensors appearance of the 3-wired RTD.
(The appearance depends on sensor type)

* A disconnection: if disconnected between terminal A and terminal board of the module in the
sensor figure.
* B disconnection: if disconnected between terminal B (two for 3-wired sensor) and terminal
board of the module in the sensor figure, or if A and B lines are all disconnected.

(4) The basic connection between RTD module and RTD Sensor is based on 3-wired RTD sensor.
If 2-wired or 4-wired sensor is used, the connection between the sensor and the module shall be
kept as 3-wired. Disconnection will be detected on the basis of 3-wired wiring.

(5) In case of disconnection, status of ALD LED and operation of disconnection flag are as follows.
- For disconnection flag, refer to 12.3.14 internal memory.
Connection status
Channel
status
ALM LED
status
Disconnection
flag
Normal
Run Off Off
Stop Off Off
A line disconnected or
B line disconnected
Run Flicker (1s) On
Stop Off

Off
Any sensor is not
connected
Run Flicker (1s)

On
Stop Off Off

A terminal
B terminal

B
b
A
4 - 9

4.10 Wiring

- 3 types of sensor-connecting methods are available (2, 3 and 4-wired).
- The standard wiring method for XGF-RD4A module is 3-wired wiring.
- Use an identical type of wire (thickness, length, etc.) for each 3 wire when extended lead wire is
used.
- The resistance of each conductor is to be less than 10. (If larger than this, it will cause an error.)
- Resistance difference of each conductor is to be less than 1. (If larger than this, it will cause an
error.)
- Length of wire is to be as short as possible and it is recommended to connect the wire directly to the
terminal block of module without connection terminal unit. If a connection terminal is to be used,
compensating wire shall be connected as shown below.

4.10.1 If 2-wired sensor is used (connection terminal unit is used)


*1 If sensor and compensating wire are shielded,
shield line can be connected to FG terminal of
the module.
*2 Let the terminals B and b short on the terminal
block of the module if 2-wired sensor is to be
connected.
*3 DC 24V external supply terminal to supply the
analog power to module
B
FG
b
A

*1
*2
Terminal block

24V
24G
*3
*1
the module.
*2 DC 24V external supply terminal to supply the
analog power to module
B
FG
b
A

Terminal block

24V
24G
*2
4 - 10


2* DC 24V external supply terminal to supply
the analog power to module
1* If sensor and compensating wire are
shielded, shield line can be connected to FG
terminal of the module.
B
FG
b
A

*1
2

Terminal block
24V
24G
*2
4 - 11

4.11 Filtering Function

Based on the filter value (time-constant) which defines the temperature-converted value of the specified
channel, it performs and outputs calculation as below.

) 40 (
(
used Channels value Filter
used) Channels temp.x40 input (Presently ) value Filter temp.x filtered Previously
e temperatur Filtered
+
+
=
ms ms
ms ms

Filtering constant setting range = 160 ~ 64000 [ms]
Temperature()
Filtered Temperature
Actual temperature
100
63.2
0
Time (ms)
Filtering
Constant (ms)
4 - 12


Operation parameters of RTD module can be specified through [I/O parameters] of XG5000.

4.12.1 Setting items

For the users convenience, XG5000 provides GUI (Graphical User Interface) for parameters setting
of RTD module. Setting items available through [I/O parameters] of the XG5000 project window are
described below.
Item Details
[I/O Parameter]
(1) Specify the following setting items necessary for the module operation.
- Channel Run/Stop
- Sensor type
- Filter setting
- Scaling setting
(2) The data specified by user through S/W package will be saved on the
flash memory of RTD module when [I/O Parameters] are downloaded.

4.12.2 How to use [I/O Parameter]

(1) Run XG5000 to create a project. (Refer to XG5000 programming manual for details on how to
create the project)

(2) Double-click [I/O Parameter] on the project window.

(3) If [I/O Parameter Setting] screen appears, click Module part at relevant slot and select relevant
module.
(4) On the I/O parameters setting screen, find and click the slot of the base where RTD module is
installed on.

4 - 13

(5) Click the arrow button on the screen to display the screen where an applicable module can be
selected. Search for the applicable module to select.

(6) After the module selected, click [Details] or double-click relevant slot.

(7) A screen will be displayed to specify parameters for respective channels as shown below. Click a
desired item to display parameters to set for respective items.

(8) The initial values of respective items are as follows.
(a) Channel status setting screen

4 - 14

(b) Input sensor type setting screen

(c) Temp. unit setting screen

(d) Scaling setting screen

(9) If necessary setting is complete, press OK.

(10) Check the check box on the parameter menu to select and change setting of a channel then the
setting value of all the channels will be identical to changed setting value. The figure below shows
an example with this function that channel status is changed to Enable of all the channels.

4 - 15

4.13 Special Module Monitoring

Run Special Module Monitoring by selecting [On-Line] -> [Connect] and [Monitor] -> [Special Module
Monitoring]. If the status is not [On-Line], [Special Module Monitoring] menu will not be activated.

Remark



4 - 16

(a) [Special Module List] window will show base/slot information and types of special module by
click [Monitor] [Special Module Monitoring].In this list box, the modules that are now installed in
PLC system will be displayed.

(b) Select a special module then click [Module Info.] button to display the information as
described below.

(c) Select a special module then click [Start Monitoring] button to display the information as
described below.

4 - 17

(d) [Start Monitoring]: [Start Monitoring] button will show you digital input data of the operating
channel. The figure below is monitoring screen when all channels are Run status.

[Start Monitoring] execution screen

(e) [Test]: [Test] is used to change the parameters of the RTD input module. You can change the
XGB CPU units status is in [Stop].

[Test] execution screen

more.

Remark
[Test] function is only available when XGB CPU units status is in [Stop].

Monitoring screen
Detail of channel 0
4 - 18


(1) Procedure

(b) Double click Variable/Comment from the project window. .

In case of IEC, select [Edit] [Register special module variable]

4.14 Register U devices (Special module variable)
4 - 19

(d) Click Yes.


(2) Save variables

4 - 20

(3) View variables




4 - 21


Here describes configuration and function of internal memory.

4.15.1 Data I/O area of RTD input module
Data I/O area of RTD input module is as shown below.
Area
(S, H type)
Area
(IEC type)
Details Content R/W
U0x.00.0
U0x.00.F
%UX0.x.0
%UX0.x.15
Module ERROR flag
Module READY flag
0 Bit On(1): module error
F(15) Bit On(1): module normal
R
U0x.01.0
U0x.01.1
U0x.01.2
U0x.01.3
%UX0.x.16
%UX0.x.17
%UX0.x.18
%UX0.x.19
CH0 Run flag
CH1 Run flag
CH2 Run flag
CH3 Run flag

Bit On(1): channel run
Bit Off(0): channel stop

R
U0x.01.4
U0x.01.5
U0x.01.6
U0x.01.7
%UX0.x.20
%UX0.x.21
%UX0.x.22
%UX0.x.23
CH0 Disconnection flag
Bit On(1): Disconnection
Bit Off(0): Normal
R
U0x.04 %UW0.x.4
CH0 digital output
value
Temperature value 10 R
U0x.05 %UW0.x.5
CH1 digital output
value
R
U0x.06 %UW0.x.6
CH2 digital output
value
R
U0x.07 %UW0.x.7
CH3 digital output
value
R
U0x.08 %UW0.x.8 CH0 scaling value 0 ~ 4000 R
U0x.09 %UW0.x.9 CH1 scaling value R
In the device assigned, x stands for the slot no. on which module is installed.

(1) Module ready/channel error information ( ( ) means device name of IEC type)
(a) U0x.00.F (%UX0.x.15): It will be ON when PLC CPU is powered or reset with A/D conversion
ready to process A/D conversion.
(b) U0x.00.0 ~ U0x.00.3 (%UW0.x.0~%UW0.x.3): It is a flag to display the error status of A/D
conversion module.

R
e
a
d
y

E
r
r
o
r

Error status
Bit On (1): error, Bit Off (0): normal
U0x.00
Module READY
Bit On (1): normal, Bit Off (0): error
(%UW0.x.0)
4 - 22

(2) Channel run/stop information
(a) It displays which channel is being used.

(3) Temperature value
It displays current temperature value. Its form is temperature value 10.


C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
CH0 temperature conversion value
U0x.01
Bit On (1): Run
Bit Off (0): Stop
Disconnection information (bit)
Bit On (1): Disconnection
Bit Off (0): Normal
U0x.04
U0x.05
U0x.06
U0x.07
(%UW0.x.1)
(%UW0.x.4)
(%UW0.x.5)
(%UW0.x.6)
(%UW0.x.7)
4 - 23

4.15.2 Operation parameter setting area
Operation parameter setting areas of RTD input module are as follows.
Memory address
Details R/W Remark
Hex. Dec.
0
H
0 Channel enable/disable setting R/W PUT
1
H
1 CH0 sensor type setting R/W PUT
2
H
3
H
4
H
5
H

5 Temperature display unit setting R/W
PUT
6
H

6 CH0 filter constant setting R/W
PUT
7
H

PUT
8
H

PUT
9
H

PUT
A
H
11
H

10~17 Not used - -
12
H

18 Scaling setting R/W
PUT
13
H -
43
H

19~67 Not used -
-
44
H

68 CH0 disconnection information (code) R/W
GET
45
H

GET
46H
GET
47H
71 CH3 disconnection information (code)
R/W GET

(1) Run channel setting
If Run channel is not specified, all channels will be stop status.

(2) Sensor type setting
If it is not specified manually, all channels will be specified as Pt100.

Word Description
0 Specified as PT100
1 Specified as JPT100


C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Ch0 sensor type setting
Bit On (1): Run, Bit Off (0): Stop
Address 0
Address 1

Address 2
Address 3
Address 4
4 - 24

(3) Setting temperature display unit
Unit of temperature conversion value can be specified as Celsius/ Fahrenheit.

Bit Description
0 Celsius
1 Fahrenheit

(4) Setting filter constant
If filter constant is not specified or specified as 0, relevant channel is not filtered.

(5) Setting scaling
It specifies whether scaling function is used or not.

(6) Disconnection information
It outputs disconnection information of each channel.

bit15 bit14 Bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 Bit0

C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Setting Ch0 filter constant (1~99)

C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Bit Description
0 Scaling function is not used
1 Scaling function is used
Channel 0 disconnection information
(0: normal,1: sensor A disconnection, 2: sensor B disconnection)
(0: normal, 1: sensor A disconnection, 2: sensor B disconnection)
Address 5
Address 10
Address 6

Address 7

Address 8

Address 9

Address 68

Address 69

Address 70

Address 71

4 - 25


- Here describes how to specify the operation condition of RTD input module.
- RTD input module is installed on slot 2.
- Initial setting condition is that with one input, initial setting value is saved in internal memory of
module.
- The following program is an example to read temperature value and disconnection information.

(1) Program example using [I/O Parameter Setting]

Moving channel 0 temp. value to
D0 area
D1 area

Moving channel 0 disconnection
information to M0
information to M1

4 - 26

(2) Program example using PUT/GET command

(3) Program example using parameter in case of IEC
CH Enable
Sensor type (PT100)
Temperature unit (Celsius)
Filter value
Moving channel 0
temp. value to
D0 area

Moving channel 1
temp. value to
D1 area

information to M0

information to M
4 - 27

(4) Program example using PUT/GET function block inn case of IEC

4 - 28

4.17 Trouble Shooting



RUN LED flickers.

Yes
RUN LED is off.
RTD input module is installed on the base correctly?
Correctly install A/D conversion module on the base.


Normally operated if RTD input module with error is
changed to another module
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes

4 - 29

4.17.3 ALM (Alarm) LED flickers

4.17.4 Temperature conversion value is not normal.

ALM LED flickers.
3 wired wiring is normal.
Wire properly referring to 4.10
.
Wire properly referring to 4.10
Wiring to sensor is normal
No
Yes
No
Yes

Temperature conversion value is not normal.
External DC 24V input power is normal.
FG ground is normal.

Execute FG ground properly referring to 4.10
No
Yes
No
Yes
4 - 30

4.17.5 Stats check of RTD input module through XG5000 system monitor

Module type, module information, O/S version and module status of RTD input module can be


(b) Module information: shows the O/S version information of module.
(c) O/S version: shows the O/S prepared date of module.
(d) Module status: shows the present error code.
Chapter 5 Thermocouple Input Module

5 - 1


5.1 General

Here describes specification, handling, and programming of XGB thermocouple input module (XBF-
TC04S).
Thermocouple input module is used to convert the temperature data detected from thermocouple to
signed 16 bit data.

5.1.1 Characteristic

(1) Module selection according to purpose
XBF-TC04S: 4 channel input (Insulation between channels by photo-moth relay)

(2) Four kinds of thermocouple available (K / J / T / R)
Available to select the different thermocouple according to each channel

(3) Disconnection detection
If thermocouple is disconnected, it is detected and indicated.

(4) Celsius ()/ Fahrenheit () type available
Temperature conversion data of Celsius ()/ Fahrenheit () is indicated down to one decimal
place

(5) Temperature data scaling function
(Available to use it as additional data than temperature indication)
Scaling conversion of temperature data is available within -32,768~32,767/0~65,535.

(6) Various additional function
Filter process, Average process (time/count/moving), Max./Min. detection process

(7) Parameter setting / Monitoring by GUI (Graphical user interface) method
It enhanced user-friendly features by changing to I/O parameter settings (intensify user
interface) from parameter settings by previous instructions.
By [I/O Parameter], the sequence program can be reduced and by [Special Module Monitoring],
it is easy to monitor the temperature conversion value.

5.1.2 Required version

When making the system, the version below is required.

Basic unit type Classification Required version
S, H type
XGB basic unit Ver 1.8 or above
XG5000 Ver 2.2 or above
IEC type
XGB basic unit (IEC type)
Ver 1.0 or above
XG5000
Ver 3.0 or above


5 - 2

5.1.3 Setting sequence before operation

Before using the thermocouple input module, follow steps below.

XBF-TC04S

Wiring
Reading temp. data
Setting parameter
Programming
Specification
- Operating environment
- Thermocouple sensor type and temperature
range
- Digital output range
- Equip-able number
- External power selection
Wiring
- Power wiring (External DC24V)
- Thermocouple input wiring
Thermocouple input test
- XG5000 special module monitor
Parameter
- XG5000 I/O parameter
Programming
- Program to read analog data
(U device)
If there is error or thermocouple input
data is abnormal, refer to the trouble
shooting.


5 - 3

5.2 Specification

5.2.1 General specification
Related
standards
1
Operating
temp.
0 ~ 55 C
2
Storage
temp.
25 ~ +70 C
3
Operating
humidity
595%RH (Non-condensing)
4
Storage
humidity
5 Vibration
IEC61131-2
10 s f < 57Hz 0.075mm
Each 10
times in
X,Y,Z
directions
57 s f s
150Hz
9.8m/s
2
(1G)
10 s f < 57Hz 0.035mm
57 s f s
150Hz
4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
6 Shocks
- Max. impact acceleration : 147 m/s
2
(15G)
- Authorized time : 11ms
- Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse (Each 3 times in X,Y,Z
directions)
IEC61131-2
7 Noise
Square wave
impulse noise
Electrostatic
discharging
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast
Transient
/burst
noise
Class
Power
module
Digital/
Analog I/O
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2kV 1kV
8
Ambient
conditions
9
Operating
height
2000m or less
10
Pollution
degree
2 or less

5 - 4

5.2.2 Performance Specification
Performance specifications are as follows
Items Specification
Thermocouple K / J / T / R type
JIS C1602-1995
Range of input
temperature
K -200.0 ~ 1300.0
J -200.0 ~ 1200.0
T -200.0 ~ 400.0
R 0.0 ~ 1700.0
Digital output
Temp. display
note1)
K, J, T type: 0.1, R type: 0.5
Scaling display
(user-defined scaling)
Unsigned scaling (0 ~ 65535)
Signed scaling (-32768 ~ 32767)
Accuracy
Ambient temperature(25) Within 0.2% note 2)
Temp. coefficient
(range of operating temp)
100 ppm/
Conversion velocity 50ms / channel
Insulation
Insulation
method
Terminal inner circuit Photo-coupler insulation
Terminal operating
power
DC/DC converter insulation
Between channels Photo-moth relay insulation
Insulation pressure
400 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 1min,
leakage current 10 or below
Insulation resistance 500 V DC, 10 M or below
Standard contact
point
compensation
Auto compensation by RJC sensing (Thermistor)
Warming-up time 15 min or above note 3)
I/O occupied points 64 points
7 (when using XBM(C)-DxxxS S)
10 (when using XB(E)C-DxxxH H)
Additional
function
Filter process Digital filter (200 ~ 64,000)
Average process
Count average (2~64,000 times)
Max./Min. display Display Max./Min.
Scaling function Signed scaling / Unsigned scaling
Consumption
current
Inner DC5V 100
External DC24V 100
Weight 63g
Note1), Note2) For more detail specification, refer to 5.2.6 accuracy/resolution.
Note 3) Warming-up time: for stability of measured temperature, 15 min is necessary after power is on.

5 - 5

5.2.3 Name of part and function

Respective designations of the parts are as described below

No. Name Description
RUN LED
Displays the status of thermocouple input module
On: operation normal
Flickering: Error occurs (0.2s flickering)
Off: power Off or module error
ALM LED
Displays the disconnection status of thermocouple input
module (Alarm indication LED)
Flickering: Disconnection error occurs (1s flickering)
Off: operation normal

Terminal
block
Terminal block for wiring to connect the thermocouple
(K, J, T, R type)

External
power supply
terminal
Terminal for supply of external DC24V

Connector for
extension
Connection connector for connecting the extension module

Reference
junction
compensator
Thermistor for reference junction compensation (RJC)


5 - 6

5.2.4 Characteristic of thermocouple temperature conversion

Thermocouple input module connect 4 kinds of thermocouple directly, input characteristic are as
described below.

(1) Thermocouple K (JIS C1602-1995): -200 (-5891 ) ~ 1300 (52410 )

(2) Thermocouple J (JIS C1602-1995): -200 (-7890 ) ~ 1200 (69553 )

E
l
e
c
t
r
o
m
o
t
i
v
e

f
o
r
c
e

Temperature

Temperature

E
l
e
c
t
r
o
m
o
t
i
v
e

f
o
r
c
e


5 - 7

(3) Thermocouple T (JIS C1602-1995): -200 (-5603 ) ~ 400 (20872 )

(4) Thermocouple R (JIS C1602-1995): 0 (0 ) ~ 1700 (20222 )

Thermocouple characteristics: thermocouple sensor measures temperature by using fine voltage
(electromotive force), which occurs when applying temperature gradient to a junction between two
different metals.
The temperature-electromotive force relation specification of normal thermocouple sensor provides
the electromotive force, which is measured when a sensors measuring point is at O. On that
account, when measuring temperature by using thermocouple sensor, cold junction compensation
(reference junction compensation, RJC) is used. (built-in function of temperature measuring module).
Remark
E
l
e
c
t
r
o
m
o
t
i
v
e

f
o
r
c
e

E
l
e
c
t
r
o
m
o
t
i
v
e

f
o
r
c
e

Temperature

Temperature


5 - 8

(5) Temperature conversion characteristic
Thermocouple input module converts the thermocouple input with non-linear characteristics into A/D
and outputs the temperature conversion that is linearly treated.
Temperature conversion to thermocouple input has non-linear characteristics.

5.2.5 Temperature display

(1) Temperature is displayed down to one decimal place.
In the XG5000, when monitoring the temperature conversion value, select Signed decimal
According to monitor indication type, temperature is monitored like figure below.

Ex.) if displaying -123.0 by converting, the value stored in the internal memory would
be -1230.

Monitor indication type
Indication
contents
Unsigned decimal
64306
Signed decimal
-1230
(-123.0)
Hexadecimal
hFB32
As instruction 64306

(2) Temperature display unit
(a) K, J, T type: 0.1
(b) R type: 0.5

(3) Temperature may be displayed by Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the settings.

Ex.) if displaying 100 in Fahrenheit, it would be 212 F by using the following formula.
(a) From Celsius to Fahrenheit degree 32
5
9
+ = C F
(b) From Fahrenheit to Celsius degree ( ) 32
9
5
= F C

Non-linear characteristics: regarding the relation of temperature() and electromotive force() of a
thermocouple sensor, electromotive force is different by sections even though temperature changes
by a certain amount, which is called non-linear characteristics. As seen in the above graph, it is
shown that the relation of temperature and electromotive force is a curve by temperature sections.
The module processes the non-linear characteristics table as linear.

Remark
Temperature
value
Temperature indication value
(Inner memory)

13000 -123.0
-1230

5 - 9

5.2.6 Accuracy / Resolution

Accuracy / Resolution are as follows according to ambient temperature

Thermocouple
type
Measurement
temperature
range
Indication temperature
range
Accuracy - note1)
resolution
Normal
temperature
(25)
Operating
temperature -
note2)
(0 ~ 55)
K
-200.0 ~
1300.0
-270.0 ~ -200.0 - note3)
-200.0 ~ 0.0 3.0 7.5 0.2
0.0 ~ 1300.0 3.0 7.5 0.1
1300.0 ~ 1372.0 - note3)
J
-200.0 ~
1200.0
-210.0 ~ -200.0 - note3)
-200.0 ~ -100.0 2.8 7.0 0.2
-100.0 ~ 1200.0 2.8 7.0 0.1
T
-200.0 ~
400.0
-270.0 ~ -200.0 - note3)
-200.0 ~ 400.0 1.2 3.0 0.1
R
0.0 ~
1700.0
-50.0 ~ 0.0 - note3)
0.0 ~ 1700.0 3.5 8.5 0.5
1700.0 ~ 1768.0 - note3)

Note1) Total accuracy (normal temp.) = accuracy (normal temp.) + cold junction compensation accuracy
= (full scale X 0.2% + 1.0)
Cold junction compensation accuracy = 1.0
Note2) Temp. coefficient: 100 ppm/
Note3) Measuring the temp. is available, but accuracy and resolution is not guaranteed.

(1) When ambient temp. is normal (25 5): within the 0.2% range of measurement temp.
(2) When ambient temp. is operating temp. (0 ~ 55): within the 0.5% range of measurement temp.

Ex.) When K type thermocouple is used and ambient temperature is normal.
In case of measuring 1000 temperature, output range of conversion data is
1000 - [{1300 - (-200)} x 0.2 %] - 1 ~ 1000 + [{1300 - (-200)} x 0.2 %] + 1
namely, 996.0 ~ 1004.0 [].

(1) For stabilization of measurement temperature, warming-up time more than 15 min. is necessary, after
restart.
(2) If ambient temperature changes rapidly, measurement temperature may change temporally. Keep the
ambient temperature steady for stabilization of measuring temperature.
(3) If wind of the cooling pan contacts with module directly in the panel, accuracy decreases. Do not
contact with wind directly.
Note


5 - 10

5.2.7 Conversion velocity

(1) Conversion velocity per channel: 50ms/channel

(2) Sequential process method
The next channel is converted after conversion of one channel is completed.
(Run/Stop of the respective channels can be set independently.)

(3) Concept of conversion time

The conversion velocity of XGF-TC4S module is a cycle that the temperature (electromotive
force) entered into terminal strip is converted into digital value and stored in internal memory.

Conversion time increase by a multiple of the no. of used channels

Conversion time = 50ms X no. of used channels

Ex.) In case 3 channels is used: conversion time = 50ms X 3 = 150ms

Channel 0
Channel 1
1
Channel 2
2
50ms 50ms 50ms
150ms
Conversion
Conversion
Conversion
Conversion
Repetition
Channel0
Conversion
channel1
Conversion
channel2
Conversion
channel0
Conversion

5 - 11

5.3 Function

5.3.1 Disconnection detection function

Thermocouple input module has a function to detect the disconnection and display it.
That the module detects and displays disconnection means that the following cabling path would have
partially bad connection, which requires taking measures

(1) Disconnection occurs between a sensor used/compensating cable and module, LED(ALM) flickers
every second and generates error code.

(2) Disconnection can be detected by channels. However, it is available for the only channel(s)
designated for operation. LED (ALM) is commonly used for every channel. It flickers in case even
only one channel is disconnected.

Thermocouple connection
status
Channel
run
ALM LED
status
Disconnection
flag
Normal
Run Off Off
Stop Off Off
Thermocouple
disconnection
Run Flickering (1s) On
Stop Off Off

(3) In case disconnection occurs, disconnection flag of each channel will be turned on and in case
disconnection is canceled, it will be turned off.
Disconnection flag Contents
U0x.01.4 Ch. 0 disconnection

(4) When disconnection occurs, the min value among range is displayed.

Type Displayed temperature in case of disconnection
K type -270.0
J type -210.0
T type -270.0
R type -50.0


5 - 12

5.3.2 Scaling function

Thermocouple input module has a function to scale value in user-defined range besides temperature
display.
The scope is classified into two types; 16 bits data type, -32768~32767 and 16 bits data type without
mark, 0~65535.
If a user selects one of these two types and sets the range, it displays the temperature through scaling
operation.

Scaling data type Scaling min. value Scaling max. value
Signed value -32768 ~ [Scaling max. value -1] [Scaling min. value+1] ~ 32767
Unsigned value 0 ~ [Scaling max. value-1] [Scaling min. value+1] ~ 65535

The following graph indicates relation between scaled value and temperature input.

Scaling operation: 0 Y ) 0 X X (
) 0 X 1 X (
) 0 Y 1 Y (
Y +
=
X = Temperature value
X0 = Thermocouple measurement min. temperature value
X1 = Thermocouple measurement max. temperature value
Y0 = Scaling min. value
Y1 = Scaling max. value
Y = Scaling

Ex.) If scaling with mark is set with -2000 ~ 13000 and the temperature measured K type sensor is
500.0, the value scaled is as follows.

Scaling conversion value 5000 ) 200 ( )) 200 ( 500 (
)) 200 ( 1300 (
)) 2000 ( 13000 (
= +

=

-2000
-200.0
Temperature
value
Scaling
Conversion
value
1300.0
13000
5000
500.0
X
X1
X0
Y0
Y
Y1

5 - 13

5.3.3 Filter function

By means of filter value (time constant 63.2%) setting temperature conversion of a designated
channel, it operates and outputs as follows.

used) channels No.of (50 ue Filter val
used) channel No.of 50 x value . input temp (presen ) lue fileter va value temp. filtered y (previousl
value temp. Filtered
ms ms
ms ms
+
+
=

Filter constant setting range = 200 ~ 64000 [ms]

Temperature ()
Temperature change after filtering process

Actual temperature change

100
63.2
0
Time (ms)
Filter constant
(ms)

5 - 14

5.3.4 Average function

(1) Time average
It accumulates temperature conversion values of a selected channel and displays the average
of the total sum in digital data.

Setting range of average time = 400 ~ 64000 [ms]
Frequency of average process for a preset time can be calculated as follows.

ms
ms
50
=
used channel of No.
time Average
[times] Frequency Process Average

(2) Averaged frequency
It accumulates temperature conversion values of a selected channel as many as frequency and
displays the average of the total sum in digital data.

Setting range of average frequency = 2 ~ 64000 [times]
Average process interval of channel used can be calculated as follows

] [ 50 ] [ ms ms = used channel or No. frequency Average interval process Average
Temperature change after averaging process
Channel scan interval
(40ms/channel)
Averaging section
Averaging section
Averaging section
Temperature change after averaging process
Averaging section Averaging section Averaging section
(40ms/channel)

5 - 15

(3) Moving average
It accumulates temperature conversion values of a selected channel as many as set and
displays the average of the total sum in digital data. In case of the moving average, it outputs
average per scan.

Setting range of average number = 2 ~ 100

5.3.5 Max./Min. display

It displays maximum/minimum value of temperature conversion value of a selected channel for a
selected section (a section allowed for max./min. search)

(1) time/frequency average characteristically does not output temperature data every conversion time
and instead, it keeps a feature to maintain the previous status until it reaches time/average
frequency.
(2) In case of moving average, it outputs the converted temperature as taking temperature history and
average, which are entered previously, every conversion time, so it can obtain relatively faster data
response than time/frequency average.
(3) Filtering can be processed with one of the foresaid averaging functions simultaneously. If
simultaneous process is selected, filtering would be processed first and it averages and output
temperature value in digital value. At the moment, the digital data output (temperature) is displayed
as the value gained after the final process.
Remark

Average
number
Average
number
Average
number
(40ms/channel)

Status of command allowing/prohibiting max./min. search
Maintaining previous
max./min. value
Initializing max./min. value
Initializing max./min. value
Maintaining previous
max./min. value
Display max./min. value
Display max./min. value

5 - 16

5.4 Installation and Wiring

5.4.1 Installation environment

Although the device can be installed with high reliance regardless of installation environment, attention
should be paid to the followings in order to secure the reliance and stability of the system.

(1) Environmental Conditions
(a) Install on a water-proof and dust-proof control board.
(b) Place free of continuous impact or vibration.
(c) Place not directly exposed to direct sunrays.
(d) Place where dew does not form due to rapid temperature change.
(e) Place where ambient temperature is maintained between 0 - 55.

(2) Installation Construction
(a) In case of screw hole processing or wiring construction, wiring dregs should not go into PLC.
(b) Install on a position easy to access.
(c) Should not install on the same panel which high voltage device is installed on.
(d) It should be 50mm and longer distant from duct and modules.
(e) Should ground in the environment where is not interrupted from noise.
(f) Install not to contact with cooling pan in the panel

(3) Cautions in handling
It describes caution in handling from unpacking module to installation.
(a) Do not fall or apply excessive impact on it.
(b) Never attempt to separate PCB from the case.
(c) Make sure that any impurities including wiring dregs should not go into the upper part of
module during wiring work.
(d) Never attempt to attach or detach the module when it is turned on.

5.4.2 Wiring

(1) Cautions in wiring
(a) Do not place AC power line close to the AUX signal line of the module. To avoid surge or
induced noise occurring from AC, make sure to leave a proper space.
(b) Cable should be selected by considering ambient temperature and allowable current and the
specification of cable should be as follows.

Cable specification
Lower limit Upper limit
0.18mm
2
(AWG24) 1.5 mm
2
(AWG16)

(c) If cable is placed too close to any heating device or materials or if it directly contacts oil and
similar materials for a long time, it may cause short-circuit, resulting in breakdown and
malfunction.
(d) Check the polarities during terminal strip wiring
(e) Wiring with high voltage cable or power line may cause induction problem, causing malfunction
or trouble.
(f) External DC24V power should be same with power of XGB. If external DC24 V power of
thermocouple input module is turned on/off while power of XGB main unit is on, temperature
input value may have an error.
(g) Thermocouple input module may use 4 types of thermocouple sensors. (K / J / T / R)

5 - 17

(2) Terminal array
Terminal array of thermocouple input module is as follows.

(3) Wiring example
Thermocouple can be connected with module directly. If point where temperature is measured is
far from the module, use the compensating cable to connect
(The compensating cables are different according to thermocouple type. For more information
about the compensating cable, contact the producer of thermocouple.)

1) In case sensor and compensating cable are shielded, shield connection is possible to PLC FG terminal.
2) It is necessary to use extension terminal block of which material is kept at uniform temperature in order
to reduce error.
3) Compensating cable should use the same type of sensor, which was used for measuring.

Signal
name
Purpose
CH0 +
Channel 0 thermocouple input
CH0 -
CH1 +
CH1 -
CH2 +
CH2 -
CH3 +
CH3 -
NC Not used
DC24V+
For external DC24V power
DC24V-

5 - 18

5.5 Operation Setting and Monitor
5.5.1 Operation Parameter Setting
Operation parameter of thermocouple input module can be set through [I/O Parameter] of XG5000.

(1) Setting items
For user convenience, parameter setting of thermocouple input module is provided by GUI
(Graphical User Interface) method in the XG5000. The items which can be set through [I/O
Parameter] in the project window are as follows.

Items Content
[I/O Parameter]
(a) Sets the following items for operation of module.
1) Channel status (Disable / Enable)
2) Sensor status (K / J / T / R)
3) Filter constant
4) Average processing (Sampling / Time-Avr. / Count-Avr. / Moving-Avr.)
5) Scaling data type (Bipolar / Unipolar)
6) Scaling min./max. value
(b) The parameter set by the user is saved in the flash memory of XGB main
unit after download.

(2) How to use [I/O Parameter]

(a) Execute the XG5000 and make the project.
(For how to make the project, refer to the XG5000 user manual)

(b) Double-click [I/O Parameter] on the project window.


5 - 19

(c) If [I/O Parameter Setting] window shows, find slot of base where module is installed and click it.

(d) Register the module on a slot where module is installed on as follows.

(e) Select a module registered and click [Details] or double-click a module


5 - 20

(f) Select the required settings in Parameter Settings and click [OK].

(g) The initial values of each item are as figure shown below

2) Sensor status (K / J / T / R)


5 - 21

3) Temp. unit (Celsius / Fahrenheit)

4) Filter constant (0, 200 ~ 64000)

5) Average processing (Sampling / Time-Avr / Count-Avr / Moving-Avr)

6) Scaling data type (Bipolar / Unipolar)


5 - 22

7) Scaling min. value/scaling max. value

Scaling data type Scaling min value Scaling max value
With sign -32768 ~ [scaling max value -1] [scaling min value+1] ~ 32767
Without sign 0 ~ [scaling max value -1] [scaling min value+1] ~ 65535

(h) Constant input

1) In case the user inputs numbers directly like filter constant, if the relevant parameter is
selected, available range is displayed in the bottom.

2) If the number is out of range, error message is displayed.
(If error information shows, it returns to previous status. Set again.)


5 - 23

3) If the wrong number is specified, it is displayed with red color.
(When Average value or scaling min./max. value is out of range.)

5.5.2 Special module monitoring function

While XG5000 is connected with PLC, through [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring], the user can
test the operation of the analog output module.

Remark
1) If system resource is short, the screen may not be displayed properly. In case of this, shut down
other application program and restart the XG5000.
2) On the [Special Module Monitoring] status, I/O parameter is set temporarily to execute the test. So
if [Special Module Monitoring] status ends, I/O parameter is not saved.
3) By test function of [Special Module Monitoring], the user can check if analog module operates
properly or not without any sequence program.

(1) How to use special module monitoring

(a) Start of [Special Module Monitoring]
While XG5000 is connected with PLC, start [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring]. If that is
not online status, [Special Module Monitoring] is not activated.


5 - 24

(b) How to use [Special Module Monitoring]
1) Click [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring] while XG5000 is connected with PLC basic
unit. Special Module List screen is displayed as shown below and displays information of
base/slot with special module type. On the list dialog box, The modules currently equipped
at the PLC are displayed.

2) Clicking [Module Info.] shows the information of special module.

3) Clicking [Monitor] shows the following screen.


5 - 25

4) [Start Monitoring]: [Start Monitoring] button will show you digital input data of the operating


5) [Test]: [Test] is used to change the parameters of the Thermocouple input module. You can
change the parameters when you click the values at the bottom of the screen. It is only
available when XGB CPU units status is in [Stop].

Monitoring screen
Detail of channel 0

5 - 26

6) If [Flag Monitor] is selected on the [Special Module Monitor] window, [Temp. Measuring
Module Command] screen can be monitored.

[Temp. Measuring Module Command] execution screen

7) [Temp. Measuring Module Command] screen
On the monitoring screen, Channel status (Run/Stop) and Sensor status
(Normal/Disconnection) can be monitored.
On the flag command screen, Max/Min active (ENABLE/DISABLE) and cold junction
compensation (ENABLE/DISABLE) can be specified.

8) [Close]: [Close] is used to escape from the monitoring/test screen. When the
monitoring/test screen is closed, the max. value, the min. value and the present value will
not be saved any more.

Remark

Monitoring screen
Flag command screen

5 - 27

5.5.3 Register U devices (Special module variable)

Register the variables for each module referring to the special module information that is set in the
I/O parameter. The user can modify the variables and comments.

(1) Procedure



5 - 28

In case of XEC, select [Edit] - [Register special module variable]


5 - 29

(d) Click Yes. The previous comment will be deleted.



5 - 30

(2) Save variables

(3) View variables




5 - 31



5 - 32


It describes the configuration and function of internal memory.

5.6.1 Data I/O area (U device)

(1) Data sent from module to XGB main unit (XGB PLC input area, read only)
Device
assignment
Type Comment Content R/W
Signal
direction
U0x.00.0 BIT CH 0 offset/gain adjustment error
On: error, Off:
normal
R
TCCPU
U0x.00.1 BIT CH 1 offset/gain adjustment error R
U0x.00.D BIT Module offset/gain backup error R
U0x.00.E BIT Module H/W error R
U0x.00.F BIT Module Ready
On: ready
Off: not ready
R
U0x.01.0 BIT CH 0 running
Channel running
On: run, Off: stop
R
TCCPU
U0x.01.1 BIT CH 1 running R
U0x.01.4 BIT CH 0 disconnection
Thermocouple
sensor
On: disconnection,
Off: normal
R
U0x.01.5 BIT CH 1 disconnection R
U0x.01.8 BIT CH 0 setting error
Parameter setting
On: setting error
Off: setting normal
R
U0x.01.9 BIT CH 1 setting error R
U0x.01.A BIT CH 2 setting error R
U0x.01.B BIT CH 3 setting error R
U0x.04 WORD CH 0 temp. conversion value
Temp. conversion
value
(Measured
temp.10)
R
TCCPU
U0x.05 WORD CH 1 temp. conversion value R
U0x.08 WORD CH 0 scaling operation value
Range with sign:
-32768~32767
Range without sign:
0~65535
R
TCCPU
U0x.09 WORD CH 1 scaling operation value R
U0x.12 WORD CH 0 min. temp. conversion value
Temp. conversion
min./max.
accumulation
R
TCCPU
U0x.13 WORD CH 0 max. temp. conversion value R
U0x.14 WORD CH 1 min. temp. conversion value R
x means slot no. where module is installed.
Ex.) U02.04: no.2 slot channel 0 temp. conversion value (word)

5 - 33

(2) Command sent from XGB main unit to module (XGB PLC output area, read/write available)

Device
assignment
Signal
direction
U0x.29.0 BIT
CH 0 max./min. searching
Enable/Disable
Min./max. search
On: enable
Off: disable
R/W
CPUTC
U0x.29.1 BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
U0x.29.2 BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
U0x.29.3 BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
U0x.29.8 BIT
CH 0 cold junction compensation
Enable/Disable
Cold junction
compensation
On: enable
Off: disable
R/W
U0x.29.9 BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
U0x.29.A BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
U0x.29.B BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
Ex.) U03.29.02: no.3 slot, CH 2 max./min. searching Enable/Disable (bit)


5 - 34

(3) Data sent from module to XGB main unit (IEC type)
(XGB PLC input area, read only)

Device
assignment
Signal
direction
%UX0.x.0 BIT CH 0 offset/gain adjustment error
On: error
Off: normal
R
TCCPU
%UX0.x.1 BIT CH 1 offset/gain adjustment error R
%UX0.x.13 BIT Module offset/gain backup error R
%UX0.x.14 BIT Module H/W error R
%UX0.x.15 BIT Module Ready
On: ready
Off: not ready
R
%UX0.x.16 BIT CH 0 running
Channel running
On: run, Off: stop
R
TCCPU
%UX0.x.17 BIT CH 1 running R
%UX0.x.20 BIT CH 0 disconnection
Thermocouple sensor
On: disconnection,
Off: normal
R
%UX0.x.21 BIT CH 1 disconnection R
%UX0.x.24 BIT CH 0 setting error
Parameter setting
On: setting error
Off: setting normal
R
%UX0.x.25 BIT CH 1 setting error R
%UW0.x.4 WORD CH 0 temp. conversion value
Temp. conversion
value
(Measured temp.10)
R
TCCPU
%UW0.x.5 WORD CH 1 temp. conversion value R
%UW0.x.8 WORD CH 0 scaling operation value
Range with sign:
-32768~32767
Range without sign:
0~65535
R
TCCPU
%UW0.x.9 WORD CH 1 scaling operation value R
%UW0.x.12 WORD CH 0 min. temp. conversion value
Temp. conversion
min./max.
accumulation
R
TCCPU
%UW0.x.13 WORD CH 0 max. temp. conversion value R
%UW0.x.14 WORD CH 1 min. temp. conversion value R
Ex.) %UW0.2.4: no.2 slot channel 0 temp. conversion value (word)


5 - 35

(4) Command sent from XGB main unit (IEC type) to module
(XGB PLC output area, read/write available)
Device
assignment
Signal
direction
%UX0.x.464 BIT
Enable/Disable
Min./max. search
On: enable
Off: disable
R/W
CPUTC
%UX0.x.465 BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
%UX0.x.466 BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
%UX0.x.467 BIT
Enable/Disable
R/W
%UX0.x.472 BIT
CH 0 cold junction
compensation Enable/Disable
Cold junction
compensation
On: enable
Off: disable
R/W
%UX0.x.473 BIT
CH 1 cold junction
R/W
%UX0.x.474 BIT
CH 2 cold junction
R/W
%UX0.x.475 BIT
CH 3 cold junction
R/W
Ex.) %UX0.3.466: no.3 slot, CH 2 max./min. searching Enable/Disable (bit)

5.6.2 How to set operation parameter

Operation parameter of thermocouple input module can be set by two methods.

(1) Setting operation parameters through [I/O parameter setting] window.


5 - 36

(2) Writing operation parameters through program (PUT instruction is used.)

Remark
How to use PUT instruction

[Area setting]
Operand Description Data size
sl Slot no. where special module is mounted WORD
S1 Internal memory address of special module WORD
S2 Device to save in special module WORD
N The number of data WORD

indicates PUT instruction.


5 - 37

(3) Writing operation parameters at setting area of thermocouple input module through program
(IEC type, PUT function block is used)


5 - 38


It describes operation parameter setting area of thermocouple input module.

Memory
address
Description Setting value R/W Instruction
Hex. Dec.
00
H
0
Designate a channel to
use
bit0:bit3, 0: stop, 1: run R/W
PUT
GET
01
H
1
Set sensor type of CH 0
K:0, J:1, T:2, R:3 R/W
02
H
2
03
H
3
04
H
4
05
H
5
Designate temperature
metric system
bit0:bit3, 0: Celsius, 1:
Fahrenheit
R/W
06
H
6
Set CH 0 filter value
0 or 200 ~ 64000 R/W
07
H
7
08
H
8
09
H
9
0A
H
10
Set averaging method
of CH 0
0: sampling
1: time average
2: count average
3: moving average
R/W
0B
H
11
of CH 1
0C
H
12
of CH 2
0D
H
13
of CH 3
0E
H
14
Set mean value of CH 0
Time average: 400~60000 ms
Count average: 2~64000 times
Moving average: 2~100
R/W
0F
H
15
10
H
16
11
H
17
12
H
18
Designate scaling type bit0:bit3,
0: signed, 1: unsigned
R/W
13
H
19
Set min. value of CH 0
scaling range
Min. value
signed: -32768~[max.-1]
unsigned: 0~[max.-1]

Max. value
signed: [Min.+1]~32767
Unsigned: [Min.+1]~655535
R/W
14
H
20
Set max. value of CH 0
scaling range
15
H
21
scaling range
16
H
22
scaling range
17
H
23
scaling range
18
H
24
scaling range
19
H
25
scaling range

5 - 39

Memory
address
Hex. Dec.
1A
H
26
scaling range
1B
H
27
Set error inf. Of CH0.
Setting error information (Flag) R GET
1C
H
28
Set error inf. Of CH1
1D
H
29
1E
H
30
1F
H
31
Cold junction
compensation temp. of
CH0.
Measured value of cold junction
compensation temp.
R GET
20
H
32
Cold junction
CH1.
21
H
33
Cold junction
CH2.
22
H
34
Cold junction
CH3.
23
H
~37
H

35
~55
System area
(Offset gain storage area)
Read/Write unavailable unavailable -

Caution
(1) If input value of memory address 00
H
~1A
H
(0~26) is out of range of setting value,
U0x.01.8~U0x.01.B (setting error representation flag, in case of IEC type,
%UX0.x.24~%UX0.x.27) are on and it acts as default setting
value. Error information is displayed in 1B
H
~1F
H
(27~30) area.
(2) System area (Offset gain storage area) is area where Read/Write is unavailable.
If this area changes, malfunction or breakdown may occur.


5 - 40

(1) Designating Channel (Address 0)
(a) Temperature conversion module Enable/Disable can be set to each channel.
(b) By prohibiting a channel not to use from conversion, conversion interval by channels can be
shortened.
(c) If channel to use is not designated, every channel can not be used.
(d) In case of using PUT instruction,temperature conversion module Enable/Disable are as follows.

BIT Description
0 Stop
1 Operate

(e) Vales set in B4 ~ B15 are ignored.
(f) This area shows the same results with operation channel designation in I/O parameter setting
window.

(2) Sensor Type Setting Area (Address 1~4)
(a) Thermocouple sensor type can be set per channel.
(b) In case of using PUT instruction, Sensor Type Setting Area is as follows.

B15 B14 B13 B12 Bt11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Address 1
CH0 sensor type setting
Address 2
Address 3
Address 4

Word Description
0 K type
1 J type
2 T type
3 R type

(c) When input value is larger than 4, 0 (K type) is selected by force.
But, U0x.01.8~ U0x.01.B (setting error representation, in case of IEC type, %UX0.x.24
~ %UX0.x.27) are on, error information is displayed at bit 0 of address 27~30.

C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0
Address 0

5 - 41

(d) This area shows the same results with sensor type designation in I/O parameter setting window.

(3) Temp. unit setting area (Address 5)
(a) Temp. unit (Celsius/ Fahrenheit) of thermocouple input module can be set per channel.
(b) In case of PUT instruction, Temp. unit setting area is as follows.

Address 5

C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0

Bit Description
0 Celsius
1 Fahrenheit

(c) Vales set in B4 ~ B15 are ignored.
(d) This area shows the same results with temp. unit setting in I/O parameter setting window.

(4) Filter constant setting area (Address 6~9)
(a) Filter constant can be set per channel.
(b) Filter constant ranges 0 or 200 ~ 64000.
(c) If filter constant is set as 0, filtering process is not executed.
(d) When input is 1~199 or larger than 6400, 0 (filter disable) is selected by force.
~ %UX0.x.27) are on, error information is displayed at bit 1 of address 27~30.
(e) In case of PUT instruction, filter constant setting address is as follows.

5 - 42

Address 6
CH0 filter constant setting (0, 200~64000)
Address 7
Address 8
Address 9

(f) This area shows the same results with filter constant setting in I/O parameter setting window.

(5) Average processing setting area (Address 10~13)
(a) Average processing method can be set per channel.
(b) Average processing method (Sampling: 0 / time-avr.: 1 / count-avr.: 2 / moving-avr.: 3)
(c) When input is larger than 4, 0 (sampling) is set by force.
But, U0x.01.8~ U0x.01.B (setting error representation, in case of IEC
type, %UX0.x.24~%UX0.x.27) are on, error information is displayed at bit 2 of address 27~30.
(d) In case of PUT instruction, average processing setting method is as follows.

Address 10
CH# average processing method setting
0: Sampling
1: Time-average
2: Count-average
3: Moving-average
Address 11
Address 12
Address 13

(e) This area shows the same results with average processing method setting in I/O parameter
setting window.


5 - 43

(6) Average value setting area (Address 14~17)
(a) Average value can be set per channel.
(b) In case average processing method is sampling, values of this area are ignored.
(c) In case of using PUT instruction, average value setting address is as follows.

Address 14
CH# average value setting
Time-average: 400 ~ 64000[ms]
Count-average: 2 ~ 64000[times]
Moving-average: 2 ~ 100
Address 15
Address 16
Address 17

(d) When input is out of range, the min. value of each address is selected by force.
~ %UX0.x.27) are on, error information is displayed at bit 3~5 of address 27~30.
(Bit 3: time-average, bit 4: count-average, bit 5: moving-average)
Ex.) When selecting the Time-average and setting average value as 200, 400ms is selected in
address 14 by force.
(e) This area shows the same results with average value setting in I/O parameter setting window.
In the I/O parameter setting window, prohibition function is provided not to set value that is out
of range. (In case of setting value that is out of range, that values are displayed with red color
and error message is displayed.)
1) Time-Avr.

2) Count-Avr.

3) Moving-Avr.


5 - 44

(7) Scaling data type setting area (address 18)
(a) Scaling data type can set per channel.
(b) There are two type of scaling operation output, unsigned 16 bit (0~65535) or signed 16 bit (-
32768~32768).
(c) In case of using PUT instruction, scaling data type setting address is as follows.

Address 0

C
H
3
C
H
2
C
H
1
C
H
0

Bit Description
0 Signed integer
1 Unsigned integer

(d) Values set in B4~15 are ignored.
(e) This area shows the same results with Scaling data type setting in I/O parameter setting
window.

(8) Scaling min./max. value setting area (Address 19~26)
(a) Scaling min./max. value can be set per channel.
(b) There are two type of scaling operation output, unsigned 16 bit (0~65535) or signed 16 bit
(-32768~32767).
(c) In case of using PUT instruction, scaling min./max. value setting address is as follows.

Address 19
CH# scaling min./max. value
1) with sign Min.: -32768 ~ [Scaling max. value-1]
Max.: [Scaling min. value+1]~32767
2) without sign Min.: 0 ~ [Scaling max. value-1]
Max.: [Scaling min.value+1]~65535
CH0: min. address 19 / max. address 20
Address 20
Address 21
Address 22
Address 23
Address 24
Address 25
Address 26

(d) If input is out of range, it keeps previous value.
But, U0x.01.8~ U0x.01.B (setting error representation, in case of IEC
type, %UX0.x.24~%UX0.x.27) are on, error information is displayed at bit 6 of address 27~30.


5 - 45

(e) This area shows the same results with Scaling min./max. value setting in I/O parameter setting
window.

Scaling data type Scaling min. value Scaling max. value
Signed -32768 ~ [Scaling max. value -1] [Scaling min. value+1] ~ 32767
Unsigned 0 ~ [Scaling max. value-1] [Scaling min. value+1] ~ 65535

(9) Setting error information area (address 27~30)
(a) If there is error when setting parameter (address 1~26), error information is displayed at
address 27~30 per channel.
(b) In case of GET instruction, setting error information address is as follows.

Address 27
CH0 setting error information
Address 28
Address 29
Address 30

Bit Description
Related memory
address
Hex. Dec.
Bit0 Sensor type (Off: normal, On: error) 01
H
~04
H
1~4
Bit1 Filter constant (Off: normal, On: error) 06
H
~09
H
6~9
Bit2
Average processing method
(Off: normal, On: error)
0A
H
~0D
H
10~13
Bit3 Time-average value (Off: normal, On: error)
0E
H
~11
H
14~17 Bit4 Count-average value (Off: normal, On: error))
Bit5 Moving-average value (Off: normal, On: error)
Bit6 Scaling range (Off: normal, On: error) 13
H
~1A
H
19~26

(c) In case there is error, setting error representation flag (U0x.01.8 ~ U0x.01.B, in case of IEC
type, %UX0.x.24 ~ %UX0.x.27) will be on, it acts as default value.
If setting error representation flag (U0x.01.8 ~ U0x.01.B) is on, check error information 1B
H
~
1F
H
(27~30) area and solve the error.


5 - 46

(10) Cold junction compensation temp. area (Address 31~34)
(a) Cold junction compensation temp. can be seen per channel.
(b) In case of GET instruction, cold junction compensation temp. area is as follows.

Address 31
CH0 cold junction compensation temp.
Address 32
Address 33
Address 34

(11) System area (offset gain storage area: address 35~55)
(a) In the system area, Read/Write is unavailable.

Caution
If the user changes this area, it may cause malfunction or breakdown.
So do not handle this area.


5 - 47

5.7 Example Program

(1) It describes how to set operation parameter in the internal memory of thermocouple module.
(2) Regarding the initial condition, the initial settings are saved in the internal memory of thermocouple
module if saved once.

(3) The following is program example that reads the temp. value of thermocouple input module of slot
1 and check whether disconnection occurs or not.
5.7.1 Example using [I/O Parameter]

(1) I/O parameter setting window

(2) Program example

(a) If module is under normal operation, M0000 is on.
U01.00.F(module Ready) = On
U01.00.0(CH0 offset/gain adjustment error) = Off
U01.00.E(module H/W error) = Off
U01.00.E(CH0 running) = On
(b) If M0000 is on, temp. conversion value (U01.04) of CH0 moves to D0000.
(c) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, U01.01.4 (CH0 disconnection) is on and M0001 bit is set.


5 - 48

(3) Program example (in case of IEC type)

(a) If module is running normally, operation start bit is on
%UX0.1.15 (Module Ready) = On
%UX0.1.0 (CH 0 offset/gain adjustment error) = Off
%UX0.1.14 (Module H/W error) = Off
%UX0.1.16 (CH 0 running) = On
%UX0.1.24 (Setting error) = Off
(b) If operation start bit is on, it moves CH 0 temp. conversion value (%UW0.1.4) into CH 0 temp.
data
(c) If CH 0 disconnection error occurs, %UX0.1.20 (CH0 disconnection) is on and CH 0
disconnection error bit is set

5 - 49

5.7.2 Program example using PUT/GET instruction

(1) Program example

(a) It writes h0001 at address 0 of slot 1 in order to enable CH0.
(b) If module is under normal operation, M0000 is on.
U01.00.F(module Ready) = On
U01.00.0(CH0 offset/gain adjustment error) = Off
U01.00.E(module H/W error) = Off
U01.00.E(CH0 running) = On
(c) If M0000 is on, temp. conversion value of CH0 moves to D0000.
Current temp. conversion value, 278(27.82) is saving in U01.04.
(d) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, U01.01.4 (CH0 disconnection) is on and M0001 bit is set.
(e) If M0000 is on, setting error (address 27) of CH0 moves to D0001. Since setting error (address
27) of CH0 is 0, there is no setting error.


5 - 50

(2) Program example (in case of IEC type)

(a) Writes 1 at address 0 of slot 1 and operates CH 0 by using PUT_WORD function block.
(b) If operation start bit is on, reads CH 0 setting error (address 27) and movies it into D0001.
(c) If module is running normally, operation start bit is on.
%UX0.1.15 (module Ready) = On
%UX0.1.0 (CH 0 offset/gain adjustment error) = Off
%UX0.1.14 (Module H/W error) = Off
%UX0.1.16 (CH 0 running) = On
%UX0.1.24 (setting error) = Off
(d) Operation start bit is on, moves CH 0 temp. conversion value (%UW0.1.4) into CH 0 temp.
data
(e) Disconnection error occurs at CH 0, %UX0.1.20 (CH 0 disconnection) is on and CH 0
disconnection error bit is set.

5 - 51

5.7.3 Example when error occurs

(1) Program example

(a) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, U01.01.4 (CH0 disconnection) is on and M0001 bit is set.
(b) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, min. value within the range of K type temperature senor
is displayed at U01.04.
(c) It is monitored as follows according to monitor display type.
When monitoring the temp. conversion value, select Unsigned Decimal.

Monitor display type Display content
Unsigned Decimal 62836
Signed Decimal -2700 (-270.0)
Hexadecimal hF574
As Instruction 62836


5 - 52

5.8 Troubleshooting

The chapter describes diagnostics and measures in case any trouble occurs during use of thermocouple
input module.

5.8.1 LED Indication by Errors

Thermocouple input module has two LEDs and it is possible to check whether it had any error with the
indication of RUN LED and ALM LED.

Item Normal Disconnection
Abnormal module
H/W (error)
RUN LED ON ON
Flicker every 0.2
second
ALM LED OFF Flicker every second OFF
Operation
Normal operation
Every function works
Min. temp. is displayed
Module function
stops
Management - Checking sensor wiring Customer service

5.8.2 Stats check of module through XG5000 system monitor

Module type, module information, O/S version and module status of thermocouple input module can
be checked through XG5000 system monitoring function.




5 - 53

5.8.3 Troubleshooting

(1) RUN LED flickers.

(2) RUN LED is off.
RUN LED flickers.



Yes

RUN LED is off.
Thermocouple input module is installed correctly?
Correctly install this module.
Normally operated if thermocouple input module with
error is changed to another module
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes

5 - 54

(3) ALM LED flickers.

(4) Temperature conversion value is not normal.
ALM LED flickers.

Sensor wiring is normal.

Wire properly referring to wiring method of user manual.
.

No

Yes

Temperature conversion value is not normal.
External DC 24V input power is normal.
FG ground is normal.

Execute FG ground properly referring to user
manual

Parameter setting is normal.
(Channel status, sensor type)
No

Yes

No

Yes


No

Yes

Set parameter properly referring to user manual.


5 - 55

5.8.4 Error code and measure

(1) Measure when error flag of data I/O area (U device) occurs.

Device
assignment
(S, H type)
Device
assignment
(IEC type)
Description Content Measure
U0x.00.0 %UX0.x.0
CH0 offset/gain adjustment
error
On: error
Off: normal
If repeated when restarting
the power, contact custom
service center
U0x.00.1 %UX0.x.1
error
U0x.00.2 %UX0.x.2
error
U0x.00.3 %UX0.x.3
error
U0x.00.D %UX0.x.13 Module offset/gain backup error
service center
U0x.00.E %UX0.x.14 Module H/W error
service center
U0x.01.8 %UX0.x.24 CH0 setting error
Parameter setting
On: setting error
Off: setting
normal
Check the parameter setting
area (address 27~30) by GET
instruction, solve the setting
error contents.
U0x.01.9 %UX0.x.25 CH1 setting error
U0x.01.A %UX0.x.26 CH2 setting error
U0x.01.B %UX0.x.27 CH3 setting error

(2) Checking error information area (address 27~30) of operation parameter area

(a) Setting error information area (address 27~30)

Bit Description
Related memory
address
Hex. Dec.
Bit0 Sensor type setting (Off: normal, On: error) 01
H
~04
H
1~4
Bit1 Filter constant setting (Off: normal, On: error) 06
H
~09
H
6~9
Bit2
Average processing method setting
(Off: normal, On: error)
0A
H
~0D
H
10~13
Bit3 Time average value (Off: normal, On: error)
0E
H
~11
H
14~17 Bit4 Count average value (Off: normal, On: error)
Bit5 Moving average value (Off: normal, On: error)
Bit6 Scaling range (Off: normal, On: error) 13
H
~1A
H
19~26

(b) Checking setting error information
Check the setting error information (address 27~30) area by GET instruction.
Ex.1) In case thermocouple input module is mounted at slot 1.


5 - 56

Ex.2) In case thermocouple input module is mounted at slot 1. (In case of IEC)

(c) In case setting error occurs, setting error representation flag (U0x.01.8~ U0x.01.B, in case of
IEC type %UX0.x.24 ~ %UX0.x.27) will be on and it will act as default value. If setting error
representation flag (U0x.01.8~ U0x.01.B, in case of IEC type, %UX0.x.24 ~ %UX0.x.27) is on,
check above setting error information 1B
H
~ 1F
H
(address 27~30) area, check related memory
address 01
H
~ 1A
H
(address 1~26) and cancel error.
Chap. 6 Analog I/O Module
6 - 1

Chapter 6 Analog I/O Module

6.1 Pre-operation Setting Procedure

Please proceed as follows before operating analog I/O module.

XBF-AH04A

Check Performance Specifications
Wiring
Analog I/O Data Read/Write
Parameter Setting
Programming
Eternal Voltage/Current S/W Setting
Specification (6.2 Performance
Specifications)
Operating Environment
I/O Type and Range
Digital Output Range
Analog Output Range
Wiring
Power supply (ext. DC24V)
Analog I/O wiring
Switch Setting
V/A I/O Type Setting
Analog I/O Test
XG5000 Special Module
Monitor Test Mode
Parameter
XG5000 I/O Parameter
Programming
Analog Data Read/Write Program
(U Device)
In case of error or abnormal analog input or
digital output, see Diagnosis.

6 - 2

6.2 Specification

6.2.1 General Specification
This section describes general specifications of the analog I/O module.

No. Item Specification
Applicable
Standard
1
Working
Temperature
0 ~ 55 C
2
Storage
Temperature
25 ~ +70 C
3
Working
Humidity
5 ~ 95%RH, no condensate
4
Storage
Humidity
5 ~ 95%RH, no condensate
5
Vibration
Resistance
Intermittent Vibration -
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Cycle
IEC61131-2
10 s f < 57Hz 0.075mm
10 cycles
for X, Y, Z
each
57 s f s
150Hz
9.8m/s
2
(1G)
Continuous Vibration
10 s f < 57Hz 0.035mm
57 s f s
150Hz
4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
6
Impact
Resistance
- Max. impact acceleration: 147 m/s
2
(15G)
- Duration: 11ms
- Pulse Shape: sinusoidal half-wave pulse (3 cycles in X, Y, Z)
IEC61131-2
7
Noise
Resistance
Rectangular
Impulse Noise
1,500 V
LS Self Test
Standard
Static Electricity
Discharge
Voltage: 4kV (contact discharge)
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiation
Electromagnetic
Field Noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Past Transient
/Burst Noise
Classific
ation
Power
Module
Digital/Analog I/O,
Communication Interface IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2kV 1kV
8 Environment No corrosive gas or dust
9 Altitude 2,000m max.
10
Contaminati
on
2 or less
11 Cooling Natural air cooling
6 - 3

This section specified the performance of analog I/O module.

(1) Input Performance Specification
Classification Input Performance Specification
No. input channels 2 channels
Analog
Input
Range
Range
DC 1 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 10V
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20

Input range shall be specified in user program or I/O parameters
by channel, and selected with external voltage/current switches.
Digital
Output
Value
Range
Unsigned 0 ~ 4000
Signed -2000 ~ 2000
Precise
Value
100 ~ 500 (DC 1 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 500 (DC 0 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)

Percentile
Value
0 ~ 1000
Max. Resolution
1/4000
1.25 (DC 1~5V, 0~5V)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC4~20, 0~20)

Precision 0.5% max.
Max. Conversion Rate 1ms/channel
Max. Absolute Input DC 15V DC 25
Additional
Functions
Filtration Digital filter (4 ~ 64,000)
Averaging
Cycle average (2~64,000 cycles)
Moving average (2~100 values)
Alarm Open line detection (DC 1~5V, DC4~20)

6 - 4

(2) Output Performance Specification
Classification Output Performance Specification
No. of output channels 2 channels
Analog
Output
Range
Range
DC 1 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistance: 2k min.)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(Load resistance: 510 max.)

Output range shall be specified in user program or I/O
parameters by channel, and selected with external
voltage/current switches.
Digital
Input
Value
Range
Unsigned 0 ~ 4000
Signed -2000 ~ 2000
Precise
Value
100 ~ 500 (DC 1 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 500 (DC 0 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)

Percentile
Value
0 ~ 1000
Max. Resolution
1/4000
1.25 (DC 1~5V, 0~5V)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC4~20, 0~20)

Precision 0.5% max.
Max. Conversion Rate 1ms/channel
Max. Absolute Output DC 15V DC 25
Additional Functions
Channel output status setting function (selectable from previous,
min., mean, max. value outputs)

(3) I/O Common Performance Specification
Classification I/O Common Performance Specification
Insulation Type
Photo-coupler isolation between I/O terminal and PLC power
source (no insulation between channels)
I/O Terminals 11 point terminal block
I/O Points Fixed type: 64 points
Max. No. of Installation
7 units (XBM(C)-DxxxS S type)
10 units (XB(E)C-DxxxH H type)
Current
Internal (DC 5V) 120mA
Weight 73g

Note1) In order to use analog I/O module, the following version is needed.

Main unit Version information
XBM-DxxxS type V2.4
XBC-DxxxH type V1.7
XEC-DxxxH type V1.0
XEC-DxxxS type V1.0
6 - 5

6.3 Major Components

Major components are as follows;

INPUT LED
Indicate operation of input part
On: normal operation
Flashing: in error (1 sec. flashing)
Off: power off or module failure
OUTPUT LED
Indicate operation of output part
On: normal operation
Flashing: in error (1 sec. flashing)
Off: power off or module failure

Input Volt/Current
Select Switch
Switch for selecting voltage/current input of analog input
Ch 0 and Ch 1

Output Volt/Current
Select Switch
Switch for selecting voltage/current output of analog
output Ch 0 and Ch 1

Input Terminal
Block
Terminal block for analog input wiring with external
devices

Output Terminal
Block
Terminal block for analog output wiring with external
devices

Ext. Power
Connector
Connector for DC24V external power supply
Ext. Connector Connector for extension modules

6 - 6

6.4 Conversion Characteristics by I/O Range

The input/output ranges of voltage and current can be set up per channel with user program or
I/O parameters. The I/O types of digital data are defined as follows.
(1) Unsigned Value
(2) Signed Value
(3) Precise Value
(4) Percentile Value

6.4.1 Input Characteristics
The graph below shows the data conversion characteristics by input range.
Digital
output
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
4047
-48
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
2047
-2048
0
250
500
750
1000
1011
-12
DC 1 ~ 5 V
DC 0 ~ 5 V
DC 0 ~ 10 V
DC 4 ~ 20 mA
1 V 5 V 3 V
0 V 2.5 V 5 V
0 V 5 V 10 V
4 mA 12 mA 20 mA
Analog
input
Practical analog input range
Offset value
Gain
value
DC 0 ~ 20 mA 0 mA 10 mA 20 mA

(1) DC 4 ~ 20mA Range Input
Digital
Output Range
Analog Input Current (mA)
3.81 4 8 12 16 20 20.18
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(400 ~ 2000)
381 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2018
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

6 - 7

Digital
Output Range
-0.24 0 5 10 15 20 20.23
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 2000)
-24 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2023
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

(3) DC 1 ~ 5V Range Input
Digital
Output Range
Analog Input Voltage (V)
0.96 1 2 3 4 5 5.04
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(100 ~ 500)
96 100 200 300 400 500 504
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Digital
Output Range
-0.06 0 1.25 2.5 3.75 5 5.05
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 500)
-6 0 125 250 375 500 505
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Digital
Output Range
-0.12 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 10.11
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

6 - 8

6.4.2 Output Characteristics
The graph below shows the data conversion characteristics by output range.
Digital
input
Analog
output
Practical analog output
range

Offset
value

Gain
value
DC 1 ~ 5 V
DC 0 ~ 5 V
DC 0 ~ 10 V
DC 4 ~ 20 mA
1 V 5 V 3 V
0 V 2.5 V 5 V
0 V 5 V 10 V
4 mA 12 mA 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 20 mA 0 mA 10 mA 20 mA
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
4047
-48
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
2047
-2048
0
250
500
750
1000
1011
-12

(1) DC 4 ~ 20mA Range Output
Digital Input
Range
Analog Output Current (mA)
4mA less 4 8 12 16 20 20mA over
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4000 over
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 less
-
2000
-1000 0 1000 2000 2000 over
Precise Value
(400 ~ 2000)
400 less 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2000 over
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
0 less 0 250 500 750 1000 1000 over

(2) DC 0 ~ 20mA Range Output
Digital Input
Range
Analog Output Current (mA)
0mA less 0 5 10 15 20 20mA over
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4000 over
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 less -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2000 over
Precise Value
(0 ~ 2000)
0 less 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2000 over
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
0 less 0 250 500 750 1000 1000 over

6 - 9

(3) DC 1 ~ 5V Range Output
Digital Input
Range
Analog Output Voltage (V)
1V less 1 2 3 4 5 5V over
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4000 over
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 less -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2000 over
Precise Value
(100 ~ 500)
100 less 100 200 300 400 500 500 over
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
0 less 0 250 500 750 1000 1000 over

Digital Input
Range
0V less 0 1.25 2.5 3.75 5 5V over
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4000 over
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 less -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2000 over
Precise Value
(0 ~ 500)
0 less 0 125 250 375 500 500 over
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
0 less 0 250 500 750 1000 1000 over

Digital Input
Range
0V less 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 10V over
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4000 over
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 less -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2000 over
Precise Value
(0 ~ 1000)
0 less 0 250 500 750 1000 1000 over
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
0 less 0 250 500 750 1000 1000 over

6 - 10

6.5 Precision

6.5.1 Input Precision
The precision of digital output is not dependent upon the input range.
The graph below shows the variation of precision when the analog input range is 0 ~ 10 V for
unsigned value for digital output.
The input precision of the XBF-AH04A is 0.5%.

0
0V 5V
2000
10 V
4000
Analog input voltage
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

v
a
l
u
e
3980
4020
-20
20

(1) Precision at 5V input;
4000 0.5% = 20
Therefore, precision range at 5V input is; (2000-20) ~ (2000+20) = 1980 ~ 2020.

(2) Precision at 10V input;
4000 0.5% = 20
Therefore, precision range at 10V input is;(4000-20) ~ (4000+20) = 3980 ~ 4020.

6 - 11

6.5.2 Output Precision
The precision of analog output is not dependent upon the output range.
The graph below shows the variation of precision when the analog output range is 0 ~ 10 V for
unsigned value for digital output.
The output precision of the XBF-AH04A is 0.5%

2000 4000 0
10V
0V
5V
10.05V
9.95V
0.05V
-0.05V
Digital input
A
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t
20mA
20.1mA
19.9mA
0mA
0.1mA
-0.1mA
10mA

(1) Precision at 5V output;
4000 0.5% = 20, therefore,
precision range at 5V output is; (5V - 200.0025V) ~ (5V+200.0025V) = 4.95 ~ 5.05V .

(2) Precision at 10V output;
4000 0.5% = 20, therefore,
precision range at 10V output is; (10V-200.0025V) ~ (5V+200.0025V) = 9.95 ~ 10.05V.

6 - 12

6.6 Functions of Analog I/O Module

The functions of XBF-AH04A Module are as follows.

Channel
operation/stop setting
Specify operation/stop of the channel which will perform A/D and D/A conversion.
Specifying unused channels as Stop can shorted overall operation time.
I/O Voltage /current
range setting
Specify desired range of analog I/O.
Select voltage/current with external switch, and set up range with parameter.
Analog I/O Module provides 2 ranges(4~20mA, 0~20mA) of current I/O and 3 ranges
(1~5V, 0~5V, 0~10V) of voltage I/O.
I/O data type setting
Specify digital I/O types.
This module provides 4 output data types (Unsigned, Signed, Precision, and
Percentile Values)
A/D input conversion
method
Sampling Process
- If A/D conversion method has not been specified, the module processes sampling.
Filter process
- Filters rapid changes in input value by external noise.
Averaging process
- Outputs A/D converted value averaged by time, cycle, and moving.
D/A output status
setting
Sets up channel output state at transition from run to stop.
Provides 4 output selections (Previous, Minimum, Mean, Maximum Values)

6.6.1 Sampling Process
In popular A/D conversion process, analog input signals are collected at constant time intervals
and A/D converted. The time elapsed for the analog signals converted into digital signals and
saved in memory device depends upon the number of channels used.

(Process Time) = (No. of Channels Used) x (Conversion Rate)

(Ex.) Process time when using 3 of 4 I/O channels;
3 x 1 = 3.0

The term sampling means taking analog signal values at certain time intervals.

6 - 13

6.6.2 Filtering Function

The input value of the designated channel is calculated with previously filtered input value using
preset filter constant (time constant 63.2%) by the formula below;

) . 1 ( tan
) . 1 (Pr ) tan (Pr
Pr
Used ofChannels No ms t FilterCons
Used ofChannels No ms esentInput t FilterCons t lteredInpu eviouslyFi
teredInput esentlyFil
+
+
=

Filter Constant setting range = 4 ~ 64000 [ms]

Input
1000
632
0
Input after filtration
Actual input
Filter Constant
(ms)
Time (ms)

In the above graph, if the input value changes rapidly from 0 to 100, the input value is filtered.
Filter (time) constant is the time required for input values to vary by 63.2% of the actual input
value.

6 - 14

6.6.3 Averaging Function

(1) Average by Time
The input values of the designated channel are accumulated for the preset time, and the
average value of the total sum is outputted in digital data.
Channel Scanning Intervals (1ms/Ch. Used)
Averaged input value
Actual input value
Averaging
Section
Averaging
Section
Sampling
Section

Setting Range = 4 ~ 16000 [ms]
For time averaging, No. of averaging cycles are calculated with the No. of channels used
as below;

ms Used ofChannels No
e AverageTim
1 .
Cycles Averaging No.
=

(2) Average by Cycles
The input values of the designated channel are accumulated for the preset cycles, and the
Actual input value
Averaging
Section
Averaging
Section
Sampling
Section

Setting Range = 2 ~ 64000 [Cycle]
For cycle averaging, averaging interval is calculated with the No. of channels used.

ms Used ofChannels No ycle AveragingC ms nterval AveragingI 1 . ] [ =

6 - 15

(3) Moving Average
The inputs into the designated channel are accumulated for the presser number, and its
average is calculated and outputted in digital data. However, in moving average method,
each scan provides its average value.

(1) In case of time/cycle averages. The input value is not outputted at every conversion, but the
previous value is maintained until the average time or cycle is reached.
(2) In case of moving averages, the converted input is averaged with the previously entered
value and the result is outputted at every conversion. Therefore, data response is faster than
time/cycle averaging methods.
(3) The three averaging methods can be processed simultaneously with the filter function
described earlier. In such case, the filter function is executed first, and averaging function is
processed to output the average value in digital data, which is expressed with the finally-
processed value.

Note

Averaging No. Averaging No.
Averaging No.
6 - 16

6.6.4 Line Open Detection Function

The analog I/O module has a diagnostic function which can detect and indicate open input line, when
voltage input range of DC 1~5V or current input range of DC 4~20mA is selected as its analog input
range. If the module indicates open input line, check the wiring.

(1) If the wiring to the module is open, the Input LED flashes at 1 second intervals and the respective
error code is generated.

(2) Line open detection is available for each channel. However, open indication is provided only for
the channel selected for the operation. The Input LED is common for the input channels 0 and 1,
and flashes if 1 or more channels are open.

Input Connection
Channel
Operation
Input LED
State
Open Line
Flag
Normal
Working On Off
Stopped On Off
Input wire open or
disconnected
Working Flash (1s) On
Stopped On Off

(3) At line open, the line open flag of the channel turns On, and turns Off at correction.

Open Flag Description
U0x.01.4 Ch 0 open
U0x.01.5 Ch 1 open

(4) At line open, the least of all input values is indicated.

6 - 17

6.6.5 Channel Output Status Setting Function

This function sets up the output in response to PLC shutdown or failure.

(1) Function
This function is used to obtain preset output value of the analog I/O module when the PLC
system is transferred from run to stop.

(2) Type
Channel output can be one of the followings;
(a) Previous value: maintains the last output from normal operation.
(b) Minimum: outputs the least values of the respective output ranges.
(c) Median: outputs the median values of the respective output ranges.
(d) Maximum: outputs the largest values of the respective output ranges.

(3) Example
Assume that the output channel range is set to 4 ~ 20mA and the output level is 10mA. If the
PLC system is switched from run to stop status, the output will be one of followings according to
the setting;
(a) Previous value: maintains 10mA which is the previous normal operation value.
(b) Minimum: outputs 4mA which is the minimum of the output range setting.
(c) Median: outputs 12mA which is the median of the output range setting.
(d) Maximum: outputs 20mA which is the maximum of the output range setting.

6 - 18

6.7 Wiring

6.7.1 Precautions for Wiring

(1) Keep the I/O signal lines of the analog I/O module away from AC power line. Otherwise, the
surge or induction noise of the AC line may affect the module.
(2) The cable should be selected taking ambient temperature and allowable current into
consideration. Recommended cable is AWG22 (0.3) or higher grade.
(3) Keep the cables away from heat source or oil. Otherwise, short-circuit, damage, or malfunction
of the module may occur.
(4) Check polarity at terminal block connection.
(5) Keep the cables away from high voltage line or power line to avoid malfunction or failure of the
module by induction.

6.7.2 Exemplary Analog Input Wiring

(1) Input resistance of the current input circuit is 250 (typ.).
(2) Input resistance of the voltage input circuit is 1 M (min.).
(3) Set only the channels to be used up for operation.
(4) Analog I/O module does not provide power supply to external input device. Use external power
supply.
(5) Exemplary analog input wiring
Same wiring scheme is applied to voltage and current inputs, except that voltage/current
setting switch must be set up accordingly.
+
-
CH0 +
-
+
-
CH1 +
-
DC power Supply
(for analog device)
CH0+
CH0-
CH1+
CH1-
DC24V+
DC24V-
Voltage/Current
Selection
Switch

6 - 19

(6) Exemplary Wiring for Analog Input 2-Wire Sensor/Transmission
Same wiring scheme is applied to voltage and current inputs, except that voltage/current setting
switch must be set up accordingly.
+
-
CH0
+
-
CH1
DC power supply
(For analog device)
CH0+
CH0-
CH1+
CH1-
DC24V+
DC24V-
Voltage/Current
selection switch
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
2-Wire
Transmitter
2-Wire
Transmitter

(7) Exemplary Wiring for Analog Input 4-Wire Sensor/Transmission
Same wiring scheme is applied to voltage and current inputs, except that voltage/current setting
switch must be set up accordingly.
+
-
CH0
+
-
CH1
DC power supply
(For analog device)
CH0+
CH0-
CH1+
CH1-
DC24V+
DC24V-
Voltage/Current
selection switch
DC
+
-
4-Wire
Transmitter
4-Wire
Transmitter
DC
+
-

6 - 20

(8) Relation between voltage input precision and cable length
In voltage input system, the cable length between the module and transmitter or sensor
influences on the converted digital value of the module. The value is as follows.

Where,
Rc: line resistance of the wire,
Rs: internal resistance of the transmitter or sensor,
Ri: internal resistance of voltage input module (1 )
Vin: voltage applied to the analog input
% Vi: error in the converted value caused by source and cable length in voltage
input(%)

( ) | | Ri Rc Rs
Vs Ri
Vin
+ +

=
2

% 100 1 %
|
.
|
\
|
=
Vs
Vin
Vi

Vs
Rs
Rc
Rc
Ri
Load

Vin
6 - 21

6.7.3 Exemplary Analog Output Wiring

(1) Exemplary analog voltage output wiring
Same wiring scheme is applied to voltage and current outputs, except that voltage/current

(2) Exemplary analog current output wiring
Same wiring scheme is applied to voltage and current outputs, except that voltage/current
+
-
CH0
+
-
CH1
DC power supply
(For analog
device)
CH0+
CH0-
CH1+
CH1-
DC24V+
DC24V-
Voltage/current
selection switch
510 or
less
Load
510 or
less

6 - 22


The operation parameters of analog I/O module can be set up with XG5000 [I/O Parameter].

(1) Setting Items
For user convenience, XG5000 provides GUI (graphic user interface) for analog I/O module
parameter setting. The items which can be set up in the [I/O Parameter] in the XG5000 project
window are as follows.

Item Description
[I/O
Parameter]
(a) Input parameter setting
Sets up following items required for module operation.
1) Operation channel (Stop/Run)
2) Input voltage (current) range
3) Output data type
4) Filter constant
5) averaging process
6) Average value
(b) Output parameter setting
Sets up following items required for module operation.
1) Operation channel (Stop/Run)
2) Output voltage (current) range
3) Input data type
4) Channel output status
(c) The parameters set up in XG5000, when downloaded, are stored in the flash
memory of the XGB base unit.

(2) Usage of [I/O Parameter]
(a) Create a project with XG5000. See XG5000 Program Manual for project creation.
(b) In the Project window, double-click [I/O Parameter].

6 - 23

(c) In the [I/O Parameter Setting] window, find out the slot of the base where the analog I/O
module is installed, and click it.

(d) In the above window, click the arrow button to call the window where the module can be
selected. Find out the module and select it.

(e) To set up parameter, double click with the respective slot being selected, or click [Detail]
button.

6 - 24

(f) The window below where parameters can be set up by channel appears. Click the item to set
up. The parameters which can be set up appear by item.

6.9 Special Module Monitor Function

The functions of the special module monitor are as follows.

(1) Start-up of [Special Module Monitor]
Select [Online] -> [Connect], and [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitor] to start up. [Special
Module Monitor] menu is enabled only in the [Online] condition.

Note
1) The screen may not function properly if the system resources are not sufficient. In this case, close
the screen, exit other applications, and rerun XG5000.
2) The I/O parameters set up in [Special Module Monitor] condition are temporarily set up for testing
purpose. Therefore, these I/O parameters are deleted after exit from [Special Module Monitor].
3) the test function of the [Special Module Monitor] enables testing analog I/O modules without
sequence programming.

6 - 25

(2) Usage of [Special Module Monitor]
(a) With the XG5000 in connection (online) with the base unit of PLC, select [Monitor] ->
[Special Module Monitor]. The Select Special Module window shown below will appear
showing the type of the special modules and base/slot information. In the list dialog, the
modules present in the PLC system are displayed.

(b) In the above window, select the special module and click [Module Info.] to see the
information window below.

(c) Click the [Monitor] button in the Special Module window. The Special Module Monitor
window will appear as shown below.

6 - 26

(d) [Start Monitoring]: click [Start Monitoring] to look up the digital input data of the channel
currently in operation. The screen shot below is a monitoring window when all the
channels are in operation status.

The screen executing [Start Monitoring]

(e) [Test]: this function is used to change the current parameter settings of the analog I/O
module. Click the settings in the fields in the bottom screen to change the parameters.
[Test] can be set up only when the operation status of the XGB base unit is STOP.

The screen executing [Test]
Input Monitoring
Output Monitoring
Detail information
of input CH0
Detail information
of output CH0
6 - 27

(f) Minimum/Maximum Value Monitoring
The minimum and maximum values of the input channels in operation can be monitored.
However, the Max/Min values in the window are based on the current value. Therefore,
the Max/Min values are not saved when exiting from the [Monitoring/Testing Screen].

The screen executing [Max/Min Value Monitoring]

(g) Close
[Close] button is for ending/closing the monitoring/testing screen. Maximum,
minimum, and current values are not saved at exit.

Monitors Max/Min value
Resets Max/Min value
6 - 28

6.10 Auto-registration of U-Device (Special Module Variable)

The variables for each module are automatically registered by referring to the information of the
special modules set up in the [I/O Parameter]. User can modify variables and descriptions.

(1) Registration Procedure
(a) In [I/O Parameter], set up special module in slot.

(b) Double click [Variables/Comment].

(c) In the Edit menu, select U-Device Auto Registration (special module variable auto
registration).

6 - 29

(d) Click Yes.

(e) Variables are registered as shown below.

(f) In IEC types, the variables are registered as shown below.

(2) Saving Variables
(a) The contents in the View Variables tab can be saved in a text file.
(b) In the Edit menu, select Save as Text File.
(c) The contents in the View Variables tab are saved in a text file.

6 - 30

(3) Viewing Variables in Program

The figures below present examples of use in XGB S and H types.

(a) Below is an exemplary program for XG5000.

(b) In the View' menu, click View Variables. The devices are changed into variables.

(c) In the View' menu, click View Device/Variables to look up the devices and variables at
the same time.

6 - 31

(d) In the View' menu, click View Device/Description to look up the devices and descriptions at
the same time.

6 - 32

(e) For IEC type also, as shown in Fig. (a) ~ (d), you can look up variables with
diversified options in the View menu. The figure below is the case of an IEC type
with which the View Variables/Descriptions option.

6 - 33

6.11 Constitution and Function of Internal Memory

An analog I/O module has internal memory for data communication with XGB base unit.

6.11.1 Analog Data I/O Area
The table below presents the analog data I/O area.

Variable Type
Device Allocation
Description
Read/
Write
Signal
Direction
S or H
Type
IEC Type
_0y_ERR BIT U0y.00.0 %UX0.y.0 Module error
Read
AH04A
CPU
_0y_RDY BIT U0y.00.F %UX0.y.15 Module ready
_0y_AD0_ACT BIT U0y.01.0 %UX0.y.16 Input Ch 0 operating
Read
AH04A
CPU
_0y_AD1_ACT BIT U0y.01.1 %UX0.y.17 Input Ch 1 operating
_0y_DA0_ACT BIT U0y.01.2 %UX0.y.18 Output Ch 0 operating
_0y_DA1_ACT BIT U0y.01.3 %UX0.y.19 Output Ch 1 operating
_0y_AD0_IDD BIT U0y.01.4 %UX0.y.20
Input Ch 0 open wire
detected
Read
AH04A
CPU
_0y_AD1_IDD BIT U0y.01.5 %UX0.y.21
Input Ch 1 open wire
detected
_0y_AD0_ERR BIT U0y.01.8 %UX0.y.24 Input Ch 0 error
Read
AH04A
CPU
_0y_AD1_ERR BIT U0y.01.9 %UX0.y.25 Input Ch 1 error
_0y_DA0_ERR BIT U0y.01.A %UX0.y.26 Output Ch 0 error
_0y_DA1_ERR BIT U0y.01.B %UX0.y.27 Output Ch 1 error
_0y_AD0_DATA WORD U0y.04 %UW0.y.4
Input Ch 0 converted
value
Read
AH04A
CPU
_0y_AD1_DATA WORD U0y.05 %UW0.y.5
Input Ch 1 converted
value
Read
AH04A
CPU
_0y_DA0_OUTEN BIT U0y.06.0 %UX0.y.96 Ch 0 output state setting
Write
AH04A
CPU
_0y_DA1_OUTEN BIT U0y.06.1 %UX0.y.97 Ch 1 output state setting
_0y_DA0_DATA WORD U0y.07 %UW0.y.7 Output Ch 0 input value
Write
AH04A
CPU
_0y_DA1_DATA WORD U0y.08 %UW0.y.8 Output Ch 1 input value
Write
AH04A
CPU

- In the device allocation, the small letter y is the No. of the slot where the module is installed.
- For example, to read the Input Ch 1 Converted Value of the analog I/O module installed in the
4
th
slot, write in U04.05. (%UW0.4.5 for IEC types)
Device Type
U 0 4 . 0 5
Slot No.
Word
[SorHtype]
Word classifier

Device Type
Slot No.
Base No
Word
[IEC type]
% U W 0 . 4 . 5

- To read the Output Ch 1 Output Status Setting of the analog I/O module installed in the 5
th
slot,
write in U05.06.1 (%UX0.5.97 for IEC types)
Device Type
U 0 5 . 0 6
Slot No.
Word classifier
Word
. 1
Bit classifier
[SorHtype]

Device Type
% U X 0 . 5 . 97
Slot No.
Base No
[IEC type]

6 - 34

(1) Module Ready/Error Flag ( ( ) is for IEC types, x: slot No.)
(a) U0x.00.F(%UX0.x.15): at power on or reset of PLC CPU, turns on when the analog I/O
conversion is ready,
and analog conversion is performed.
(b) U0x.00.0(%UX0.x.0): the flag indicating the error status of A/D conversion module.

- - - - - - - - - - -
U0x.00
(%UW0.x.0)

Error occurrence
information
Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): Normal
R
e
a
d
y
E
r
r
o
r
- - -

Module READY
Bit On (1): Normal
Bit Off (0): error

(2) Operation channel information/ open-wire detection information/ channel error information flags
( ( ) is for IEC types, x: slot No.)
This is the area for storing the operation information, input wire open detection,
and channel error information by channel.
The base No. of the XGB PLC is 0.

O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
- - - - - -
U0x.01
(%UW0.x.1)

Operation Ch, Info.
Bit On (1): in operation
Bit Off (0): Stop operation
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
Open-wire detection info.
Bit On (1): open-wire
Bit Off (0): normal

Channel Error Info.
Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): normal

(3) Digital Output Values ( ( ) is for IEC types, x: slot No.)
(a) A/D converted digital values are outputted to buffer memory address U0x.04 ~ U0x.05
(%UW0.x.4
~ %UW0.x.5) by channel-basis.
(b) Digital output values are saved in 16-bit binary figures.

Input channel 0 converted value
U0x.04
(%UW0.x.4)
Input channel 1 converted value
U0x.05
(%UW0.x.5)

6 - 35

(4) Output Permit Setting ( ( ) is for IEC types, x: slot No.)
(a) Output permit/prohibit can be set up for each channel.
(b) The default setting is Output Prohibited.

O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
- - - - - -
U0x.06
(%UW0.x.6)

Output status setting
BitOn (1): Output permitted
BitOff (0): Output prohibited
- - - - - - - -

(5) Digital Input Values ( ( ) is for IEC types, x: slot No.)
(a) Digital inputs can be set up as unsigned (-48~4047), signed (-2048~2047), precision, or
percentile (-12~1011) values.
(b) When digital input value is not set up, they are processed as zero.

Output channel 0 input value
U0x.07
(%UW0.x.7)
Output channel 1 input value
U0x.08
(%UW0.x.8)

6 - 36

6.11.2 Operation Parameter Setting Area
The operation parameter setting area of the analog I/O module is as follows.

Memory
Add.
Description Setting R/W Command
0 Appoint operating channel Bit Off (0): stop, Bit ON (1): run R/W
PUT
GET
1 I/O range setting
I/O range setting (4 bit per Ch.)
0: 4 ~ 20
1: 0 ~ 20
2: 1 ~ 5 V
3: 0 ~ 5 V
4: 0 ~ 10 V
R/W
2 I/O data type setting
I/O data type setting (4 bit per Ch.)
0: 0 ~ 4000
1: -2000 ~ 2000
2: Precision value
3: 0 ~ 1000
- for precision values;
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
1 ~ 5 V: 100 ~ 500
0 ~ 5 V: 0 ~ 500
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
R/W
3
Input Ch 0 filter value
setting
0 or 4 ~ 64000
R/W
4
Input Ch 1 filter value
setting
R/W
5 Averaging method setting
Averaging method setting (4 bit per Ch.)
0: Sampling
1: Time average
2: Cycle average
3: Moving average
R/W
6
Input Ch 0 average value
setting
Time average: 4 ~ 16000 [ms]
Cycle average: 2 ~ 64000 [cycles]
Moving average: 2 ~ 100 [samples]
R/W
7
Input Ch 1 average value
setting
R/W
8
Channel output status
setting
0: previous value
1: min. value
2: median
3: max.
R/W
9
Set-up error information
output area
10#: Input Ch range setting error
20#: Input Ch data type setting error
30#: Input Ch filter value setting error
40#: Input Ch averaging setting error
50#: Input Ch average value setting error
60#: Output Ch range setting error
70#: Output Ch data type setting error
80#: Ch output status setting error
90#: Output Ch input value range-over
error
(#: channel number)
R GET

Note
(1) If the memory address 0~8 area is entered with values different from the setting.
U0x.01.8~U0x.01.B (setting error representative flag, for IEC
type, %UX0.x.24~%UX0.x.27) is ON and runs with default values. The error
information is displayed in the setting error information are (No. 9).
CAUTION (2) System areas (after No. 10) are read/write protected.
Changing these areas may cause malfunction or failure of the product.

6 - 37

(1) Operating Channel Setting
The default setting for operating channel is Stop.

O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
.
0
- - - - - -
Address0

Appoint Using CH. bit
Bit On (1): Operate
Bit Off (0): Stop
- - - - - -

(2) I/O Range Setting
(a) The analog I/O voltage range is DC 1~5V, DC 0~5V, DC 0~10V, and analog current I/O
range is DC 4~20mA, DC 0~20mA.
(b) Default range is DC 4~20mA.

Input CH.0
Address1

Input ch. Set-up I/O range(by ch. 4bit)
0 : 4 ~ 20
1 : 0 ~ 20
2 : 1 ~ 5 V
3 : 0 ~ 5 V
4 : 0 ~ 10 V
Input CH.1 Output CH.0 Output CH.1

(3) I/O Data Type Setting
(a) I/O data type can be set up for each channel.
(b) If the I/O data type is not set up, all the channels are processed in 0~4000 range.

Input CH. 0
Address2

Set-up I/O data type (by Ch.4bit)
0 : 0 ~ 4000
1 : -2000 ~ 2000
2 : Precision value
3 : 0 ~ 1000
Input CH. 1 Output CH. 0 Output CH. 1
- For precision values
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
1 ~ 5 V: 100 ~ 500
0 ~ 5 V: 0 ~ 500
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000

6 - 38

(4) Filter Constant Setting
(a) If set to 0, no filtration is processed.
(b) Default setting is 0 no filtration process.

Input channel 0 filter constant (0 or 4 ~ 64000 ms) Address3
Input channel 1 filter constant (0 or 4 ~ 64000 ms) Address4

(5) Averaging Method Setting
(a) Averaging method can be one of; time average, cycle average, moving average.
(b) Default setting is no averaging throughout the channels.

Input CH.0
Address5

Set-up averaging method (4bit per Ch)
0 : Sampling
1 : Time average
2 : Cycle average
3 : Moving average
Input CH.1 - - - - - - - -

(6) Average Value Setting
(a) Set up average values in accordance with the setting area of the averaging
method.
(b) If the average value is out of setting range, averaging is not applied.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input channel 0 average value Address6
Input channel 1 average value Address7

Input channel# average value setting
Time average : 4 ~ 16000 [ms]
Cycle average : 2 ~ 64000 [Cycle]
Moving average : 2 ~ 100 [samples]

6 - 39

(7) Output Status Setting
(a) This sets up the analog output status when the XGB base unit is changed from run
to stop.
(b) Default setting is the Previous Value output.

Output Ch.0
Address8
Output Ch.1
Output channel status setting (4 bit per Ch)
0 : Previous value output
1 : Min. value output
2 : Median value output
3 : Max. value output
- - - - - - - -

(8) Error Code (Address 9)
(a) Saves the error code detected by the analog I/O module.
(b) The types and descriptions of the error are as follows.

Set-up error information Address9

Type
Error
Code
LED Lamp Description
Priority
Order
Remark
Input
Error
10#
INPUT
LED
1s flash
Input Ch range setting error 2
#: Ch No.
Input Ch. 0,1
Output Ch. 0,1
20# Input Ch data type setting error 3
30# Input Ch filter cons. Setting error 4
40# Input Ch averaging setting error 5
50# Input Ch average value setting error 6
Output
Error
60#
OUTPUT
LED
1s flash
Output Ch range setting error 7
70# Output Ch data type setting error 8
80# Output Ch status setting error 9
90# Output Ch input value range-over error 1

(c) In case of plural errors, the code with higher priority order will be saved.

(9) System Area (after Address 10)
(a) System area (after address 10) is read/write protected.

Caution
Modifying this area can cause malfunction of failure of product.

6 - 40


(1) This sample program sets up operating parameters of analog I/O module.
(2) Initial settings are saved in the internal memory of the module by input by once.
(3) The sample program below controls the I/O data of the analog I/O module at slot #1 and check
open wire.

6.12. Example of [I/O Parameter] Usage

(1) I/O Parameter Setting Window

(a) Input Channel 0 is set to operating channel and input range is set to 4~20mA.
(b) Output Channel 0 is set to operating channel and output range is set to 4~20mA.

6 - 41

`

(2) Sample Input Program

(a) When the module is in normal operation, M0000 is turned On.
U01.00.0(Module Error) = Off
U01.00.F(Module Ready) = On
U01.01.0(Input Channel 0 in-operation) = On
U01.01.8(Input Channel 0 Error) = Off
(b) When M0000 is ON, Input Channel 0 Converted Value(U01.04) is moved to D00100.
(c) If open-wire error occurs in channel 0, U01.01.4(channel 0 open-wire) is ON, and M0001 bit is
set.

(3) Sample Output Program

(a) When the module is in normal operation, M00010 is turned ON.
U01.00.0(Module Error) = Off
U01.00.F(Module Ready) = On
U01.01.2(Output Channel 0 in-operation) = On
U01.01.A(Output Channel 0 Error) = Off
(b) When M00010 is On, channel 0 output status setting (U01.06.0) is turned ON and output is
permitted.
(c) When M00010 is On, the data in D00200 is transmitted to Output Channel 0 input value
(U01.07) and outputted.

Input CH0 program
Output CH0 program
6 - 42

(4) Sample Input Program (for IEC type)

(a) When the module is in normal operation, %MX0 is turned ON.
%UX0.1.0(Module Error) = Off
%UX0.1.15(Module Ready) = On
%UX0.1.16(Input Channel 0 in-operation) = On
%UX0.1.24(Input Channel 0 Error) = Off
(b) When %MX0 is ON, Input Channel 0 Converted Value(%UW0.1.4) is transferred to Channel
0Input variable.
(c) If open-wire error occurs at Channel 0, %UX0.1.20(Channel0open) turns ON and %MX1 bit is
set.

(5) Sample Output Program (for IEC type)

%UX0.1.18(Output Channel 0 in-operation) = On
%UX0.1.26(Output Channel 0 Error) = Off
(b) When %MX10 is ON, Channel0 output status setting (%UX0.1.96) is turned ON and output is
permitted
(c) When %MX10 is ON, the data of the Channel 0output variable is transferred to Output
Channel 0 Input Value (%UW0.1.7) and outputted.

CH0Input
Value
CH0Output
Value
6 - 43

6.12. Exemplary Usage of PUT/GET Command

(1) Sample Input Program
Input CH0 Program

(a) Using PUT command to write h0005 in the address 0, slot 1 to operate Input Channel 0 and
Output Channel 0.
(b) Using PUT command to write h0000 in the address 1, slot 1 to set the input range of Input
Channel 0 to DC 4 ~ 20mA and the output range of the Output Channel 0 to DC 4 ~ 20mA.
(c) When the module is in normal operation, M0000 is turned ON.
U01.00.0(Module Error) = Off, U01.00.F(Module Ready) = On
U01.01.0(Input Channel 0 in-operation) = ON, U01.01.8(Input Channel 0 Error) = Off
(d) When M0000 is ON, Input Channel 0 Converted Value(U01.04) is transferred to D00100.
(e) If open-wire error occurs at Channel 0, U01.01.4(Channel0open) is ON, and M0001 bit is set.

(2) Sample Output Program
Output CH0 Program

Output Channel 0.
(c) When the module is in normal operation, M00010 is turned ON.
U01.00.0(Module Error) = Off, U01.00.F(Module Ready) = On
U01.01.2(Output Channel 0 in-operation) = ON, U01.01.A(Output Channel 0 Error) = Off
(d) When M00010 is ON, Channel 0 Output Status setting (U01.06.0) is turned ON and output is
permitted.
(e) When M00010 is ON, data of D00200 is transferred to Output Channel 0 Input Value (U01.07)
and outputted.
6 - 44

(3) Sample Input Program (for IEC type)

Output Channel 0.
(c) When the module is in normal operation, %MX0 is turned on.
%UX0.1.16(Input Channel 0 in-operation) = On
%UX0.1.24(Input Channel 0 Error) = Off
(d) When %MX0 is on, Input Channel 0 Converted Value (%UW0.1.4) is transferred to Channel
0Input variable.
(e) If open-wire error occurs at Channel 0, %UX0.1.20(Channel0open) is turned on and %MX1 bit
is set.

CH0Input
Value
6 - 45

(4) Sample Output Program (for IEC type)

Output Channel 0.
(c) When the module is in normal operation, %MX10 is turned on.
%UX0.1.18(Output Channel 0 in-operation) = On
%UX0.1.26(Output Channel 0 Error) = Off
(d) When %MX10 is on, Channel 0 Output Status setting (%UX0.1.96) is turned on and output is
permitted.
(e) When %MX10 is on, data of the Channel 0output variable is transferred to Output Channel 0
Input Value (%UW0.1.7) and outputted.

CH0Outnput
Value
6 - 46


This section describes methods for identifying the troubles which may occur during the
operation of analog I/O module, and their solutions.

6.13.1 LED Indication for Error

An analog I/O module has INPUT LED and OUTPUT LED to indicate error status of the module.

Classification
Normal
State
Channel Open
(Input)
Parameter Setting
Error
Module H/W
Failure
(Serious Failure)
INPUT LED On Flash at 1s intervals
Flash at 1s intervals
(input parameter setting
error)
Flash at 0.2s
intervals
OUTPUT LED On N/A
(output parameter setting
error)
Flash at 0.2s
intervals
Module
Behavior
All functions
are normal
All functions are
performed. Indicates
min. input value
All functions work at
default parameter setting
Module cannot
function
Action - Check input wire Check parameter setting Request for A/S

6.13.2 Checking Module Condition

XG5000s system monitor enables verification of the analog I/O module conditions (module type,
module information, OS version).

(1) Procedure
The verification can be done in 2 ways;
(a) [Monitor] -> [System Monitor] -> mouse right click on module icon -> [Module Information]
(b) [Monitor] -> [System Monitor] -> double click module icon.

(2) Module Information
(a) Module type: shows the information on the present module.
(b) Module information: shows the OS version of the module.
(c) OS version: shows release date of Module OS.

6 - 47


(1) INPUT LED or OUTPUT LED is off.

INPUT LED or OUTPUT LED is off..
Analog combo module is correctly
installed.
Install the module correctly
No
Yes
XG5000 software shows I/O information
Contact nearest dealer or A/S center
No
Yes
System resumes normal function if the
module is replaced.

Yes Contact nearest dealer or A/S center

(2) INPUT LED flashes.

INPUT LED flashes
INPUT LED flashes at 0.2s intervals.
No
Yes
INPUT LED flashes at 1s intervals
Input wire is correct.
Correct wiring according to user manual
(Check line open)
No
Yes
Parameter setting is normal
(Check with PUT command)
Operation parameter setting error
Correct the error according to user manual
(Check error code)

No

6 - 48

(3) OUTPUT LED flashes.

OUTPUT LED flashes
OUTPUT LED flashes at 0.2s intervals
No
Yes
OUTPUT LED flashes at 1s intervals
Output channel input exceeds data
range
Enter correctly according to the output range
in the user manual
No
Yes
(Check error code)

No

(4) Analog I/O value is abnormal.

Analog I/O value is abnormal.
External DC24V input power is OK.
Supply DC 24 power
No
Yes
FG ground is OK
Correct FG grounding according to the wiring
in the user manual
No
Yes
Parameter setting is OK
(Operation channel permit, I/O range
setting
Set up the parameters correctly according to
the user manual
No
Yes
External voltage/current selector switch
setting is correct
Set the switch according to the user manual No
Yes

7 - 1



Before using the analog input module, follow steps below.

XBF-AD08A

Wiring
Setting parameter
Programming
Setting external voltage/current switch
Specification (2.2 performance specification)
Input type and range
Digital output range
Wiring
Wiring power (External DC24V)
Wiring analog input
Setting switch
Setting voltage/current input type
Analog input test
XG5000 special module monitor test mode
Parameter
Programming
Programming for reading analog data
(U device)

7 - 2

7.2 Specifications


Related
standards
1
Operating
temp.
0 ~ 55 C
2
Storage
temp.
25 ~ +70 C
3
Operating
humidity
4
Storage
humidity
5 Vibration
IEC61131-2
10 s f < 57Hz 0.075mm
Each 10
times in
X,Y,Z
directions
57 s f s
150Hz
9.8m/s
2
(1G)
10 s f < 57Hz 0.035mm
57 s f s
150Hz
4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
6 Shocks
- Max. impact acceleration : 147 m/s
2
(15G)
- Authorized time : 11ms
- Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse (Each 3 times in X,Y,Z
directions)
IEC61131-2
7 Noise
Square wave
impulse noise
Electrostatic
discharging
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast
Transient
/burst
noise
Class
Power
module
Digital/
Analog I/O
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2kV 1kV
8
Ambient
conditions
9
Operating
height
2000m or less
10
Pollution
degree
2 or less
7 - 3

Items Performance specification
Analog input
range
Range
DC 1 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 5V
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Input resistance: 1 M or above)
DC 4 ~ 20mA
DC 0 ~ 20mA
Digital output
Range
Signed value 0 ~ 4000
Unsigned
value
-2000 ~ 2000
Precise
value
100 ~ 500 (DC 1 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 500 (DC 0 ~ 5V)
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)

Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
Max. resolution
1/4000
1.25 (DC 1~5V, 0~5V)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC4~20, 0~20)

Additional
function

Filter function Digital filter (4 ~ 64,000ms)
Average function
Time average (4 ~ 16,000ms)
Count average (2 ~ 64,000 times)
Moving average (2 ~ 100)
Alarm function Detecting disconnection (DC 1~5V, DC4~20mA)
Insulation method
Photo-coupler insulation between I/O terminal and PLC power
Input terminal 11 point terminal block
Consumption
current
Inner (DC 5V) 105mA
Weight 81g
Module supply power source 20.4~28.8 V

Note1) In order to use analog input module (8-channel), the following version is needed.

XBM-DxxxS type V2.6
XBC-DxxxH type V1.9
XEC-DxxxH type V1.3
XBC-DxxxS type V1.0

7 - 4



LED
Displays the operation status of XBF-AD08A
On: Operation normal
Flickering: Error occurs (1s flickering)
Off: power off or module error

Voltage/current
selector switch
switch to select voltage/current input of analog input CH0~CH7
Terminal block
Wiring terminal block to connect with external device
(Analog input)

External power
supply terminal
Terminal for DC24V external power supply

Connector for
expansion
Connection connector for expansion module

7 - 5


The input/output ranges of voltage and current can be set up per channel with user program or I/O
parameters. The I/O types of digital data are defined as follows.
(1) Unsigned Value
(2) Signed Value
(3) Precise Value

Digital
output
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
4047
-48
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
2047
-2048
0
250
500
750
1000
1011
-12
DC 1 ~ 5 V
DC 0 ~ 5 V
DC 0 ~ 10 V
DC 4 ~ 20 mA
1 V 5 V 3 V
0 V 2.5 V 5 V
0 V 5 V 10 V
4 mA 12 mA 20 mA
Analog
input
Practical analog input range
Offset value
Gain
value
DC 0 ~ 20 mA 0 mA 10 mA 20 mA

Digital
Output Range
3.81 4 8 12 16 20 20.18
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(400 ~ 2000)
381 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2018
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

7 - 6

Digital
Output Range
-0.24 0 5 10 15 20 20.23
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 2000)
-24 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2023
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Digital
Output Range
0.96 1 2 3 4 5 5.04
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(100 ~ 500)
96 100 200 300 400 500 504
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Digital
Output Range
-0.06 0 1.25 2.5 3.75 5 5.05
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 500)
-6 0 125 250 375 500 505
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Digital
Output Range
-0.12 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 10.11
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

7 - 7

7.5 Accuracy

Accuracy of digital output value does not changed even if input range is changed. Figure below
shows the range of the accuracy with analog input range of 0 ~ 10 V and digital output type of
Accuracy of XBF-AD08A is 0.5%.

0
0V 5V
2000
10 V
4000
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

v
a
l
u
e
3980
4020
-20
20

[ Accuracy ]

4000 0.5% = 20
using 5V input.

4000 0.5% = 20
using 10V input.

7 - 8

7.6 Functions of Analog Input Module

The functions of XBF-AD08A Module are as follows.

Channel
Specify operation/stop of the channel which will perform A/D and D/A conversion.
Specifying unused channels as Stop can shorted overall operation time.
I/O Voltage /current
range setting
Analog Mix Module provides 2 ranges(4~20mA, 0~20mA) of current I/O and 3
ranges (1~5V, 0~5V, 0~10V) of voltage I/O.
This module provides 4 output data types (Unsigned, Signed, Precision, and
Percentile Values)
method
Sampling Process
Filter process
- Filters rapid changes in input value by external noise.
Averaging process
- Outputs A/D converted value averaged by time, cycle, and moving.
D/A output status
setting
Sets up channel output state at transition from run to stop.
Provides 4 output selections (Previous, Minimum, Mean, Maximum Values)

In popular A/D conversion process, analog input signals are collected at constant time intervals
and A/D converted. The time elapsed for the analog signals converted into digital signals and

(Process Time) = (No. of Channels Used) x (Conversion Rate)

(Ex.) Process time when using 3 of 4 I/O channels;
3 x 1 = 3.0

The term sampling means taking analog signal values at certain time intervals.

7 - 9

7.6.2 Filtering Function

The input value of the designated channel is calculated with previously filtered input value using
preset filter constant (time constant 63.2%) by the formula below;

) . 1 ( tan
) . 1 (Pr ) tan (Pr
Pr
Used ofChannels No ms t FilterCons
Used ofChannels No ms esentInput t FilterCons t lteredInpu eviouslyFi
teredInput esentlyFil
+
+
=

Filter Constant setting range = 4 ~ 64000 [ms]

Input
1000
632
0
Input after filtration
Actual input
Filter Constant
(ms)
Time (ms)

In the above graph, if the input value changes rapidly from 0 to 100, the input value is filtered.
Filter (time) constant is the time required for input values to vary by 63.2% of the actual input
value.

7 - 10

7.6.3 Averaging Function

(1) Average by Time
The input values of the designated channel are accumulated for the preset time, and the
Actual input value
Averaging
Section
Averaging
Section
Sampling
Section

Setting Range = 4 ~ 16000 [ms]
For time averaging, No. of averaging cycles are calculated with the No. of channels used
as below;

ms Used ofChannels No
e AverageTim
1 .
Cycles Averaging No.
=

(2) Average by Cycles
The input values of the designated channel are accumulated for the preset cycles, and the
Actual input value
Averaging
Section
Averaging
Section
Sampling
Section

Setting Range = 2 ~ 64000 [Cycle]
For cycle averaging, averaging interval is calculated with the No. of channels used.

ms Used ofChannels No ycle AveragingC ms nterval AveragingI 1 . ] [ =

7 - 11

(3) Moving Average
The inputs into the designated channel are accumulated for the presser number, and its
average is calculated and outputted in digital data. However, in moving average method,
each scan provides its average value.

(1) In case of time/cycle averages. The input value is not outputted at every conversion, but the
previous value is maintained until the average time or cycle is reached.
(2) In case of moving averages, the converted input is averaged with the previously entered
value and the result is outputted at every conversion. Therefore, data response is faster than
time/cycle averaging methods.
(3) The three averaging methods can be processed simultaneously with the filter function
described earlier. In such case, the filter function is executed first, and averaging function is
processed to output the average value in digital data, which is expressed with the finally-
processed value.

Note

Averaging No. Averaging No.
Averaging No.
7 - 12

7.6.4 Line Open Detection Function

The analog mix module has a diagnostic function which can detect and indicate open input line, when
voltage input range of DC 1~5V or current input range of DC 4~20mA is selected as its analog input
range. If the module indicates open input line, check the wiring.

(1) If the wiring to the module is open, the Input LED flashes at 1 second intervals and the respective
error code is generated.

(2) Line open detection is available for each channel. However, open indication is provided only for
the channel selected for the operation. The Input LED is common for the input channels 0 and 1,
and flashes if 1 or more channels are open.

Input Connection
Channel
Operation
Input LED
State
Open Line
Flag
Normal
Working On Off
Stopped On Off
Input wire open or
disconnected
Working Flash (1s) On
Stopped On Off

(3) At line open, the line open flag of the channel turns On, and turns Off at correction.
Open Flag Description
U0x.10.0 Ch 0 open
U0x.10.1 Ch 1 open
U0x.10.2 Ch 2 open
U0x.10.3 Ch 3 open
U0x.10.4 Ch 4 open
U0x.10.5 Ch 5 open
U0x.10.6 Ch 6 open
U0x.10.7 Ch 7 open

(4) At line open, the least of all input values is indicated.

7 - 13

7.7 Wiring


(1) Input resistance of current input circuit is 250 (typ.).
(2) Input resistance of voltage input circuit is 1 M (min.).
(3) Enable the necessary channel only.
(4) Analog input module doesnt support power for input device. Use the external power supplier.
(5) Wiring example of analog input
In case of voltage/current input, wiring is same. Adjust the voltage/current setting switch according
to the case.

+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
DC pwer
Supply for analog
DC24V+
CH0+
CH0-
DC24V-
CH1+
CH1-
CH2+
CH2-
CH3+
CH3-
CH4+
CH4-
CH5+
CH5-
CH6+
CH6-
CH7+
CH7-
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7

7 - 14

(6) Wiring example of analog input 2-Wire sensor/transmitter
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
DC power
Supply for analog
DC24V+
CH0+
CH0-
DC24V-
CH1+
CH1-
CH2+
CH2-
CH3+
CH3-
CH4+
CH4-
CH5+
CH5-
CH6+
CH6-
CH7+
CH7-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
2- Wire
Transmitter
2- Wire
Transmitter
2- Wire
Transmitter
2- Wire
Transmitter
2- Wire
Transmitter
2- Wire
Transmitter
2- Wire
Transmitter
2- Wire
Transmitter
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7

(7) Wiring example of analog input 4-Wire sensor/transmitter

+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
DC power
Supply for analog
DC24V+
CH0+
CH0-
DC24V-
CH1+
CH1-
CH2+
CH2-
CH3+
CH3-
CH4+
CH4-
CH5+
CH5-
CH6+
CH6-
CH7+
CH7-
DC
+
-
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
DC
+
-
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
4 Wire
Transmitter
4 Wire
Transmitter
4 Wire
Transmitter
4 Wire
Transmitter
4 Wire
Transmitter
4 Wire
Transmitter
4 Wire
Transmitter
4 Wire
Transmitter

7 - 15

In voltage input, the wiring (cable) length between transmitter or sensor and module has an effect
on digital-converted values of the module as specified below;

Where,






( ) | | Ri Rc Rs
Vs Ri
Vin
+ +

=
2

100 1 %
|
.
|
\
|
=
Vs
Vin
Vi %

Vs
Rs
Rc
Rc
Ri
Load

Vin
7 - 16


A/D conversion modules operation parameters can be specified through XG5000s [I/O parameters].

(1) Settings
For the users convenience of A/D conversion module, XG5000 provides GUI (Graphical User
Interface) for parameters setting of A/D conversion module. Setting items available through [I/O
parameters] on the XG5000 project window are as described below in the table.

Item Details
[I/O parameter] (a) Specify the following setting items necessary for the module operation.
1) Channel Enable/Disable setting
2) Setting ranges of input voltage/current
3) Output data format setting
4) Filter constant setting
5) Average processing method setting
6) Average value setting
(b) If downloading is complete Parameter set by user in XG5000 is saved
in Flash memory of XGB main unit.


7 - 17

(c) In the [I/O Parameter Setting] window, find out the slot of the base where the analog mix module is
installed, and click it.

(d) In the above window, click the arrow button to call the window where the module can be selected.
Find out the module and select it.

(e) To set up parameter, double click with the respective slot being selected, or click [Detail] button.

7 - 18

(f) The window below where parameters can be set up by channel appears. Click the item to set up.
The parameters which can be set up appear by item.

7 - 19


Select [Online] -> [Connect], and [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitor] to start up. [Special Module
Monitor] menu is enabled only in the [Online] condition.

Note
3) the test function of the [Special Module Monitor] enables testing analog mix modules without

(a) With the XG5000 in connection (online) with the base unit of PLC, select [Monitor] -> [Special
Module Monitor]. The Select Special Module window shown below will appear showing the type
of the special modules and base/slot information. In the list dialog, the modules present in the
PLC system are displayed.

7 - 20



7 - 21



(e) [Test]: this function is used to change the current parameter settings of the analog mix
[Test] can be set up only when the operation status of the XGB base unit is STOP.

Monitoring
Detail information
of CH0
7 - 22



(g) Close

Monitors Max/Min value
Resets Max/Min value
7 - 23


The variables for each module are automatically registered by referring to the information of the
special modules set up in the [I/O Parameter]. User can modify variables and descriptions.



(c) In the Edit menu, select U-Device Auto Registration (special module variable auto registration).

7 - 24

(d) Click Yes.


(f) In IEC types, the variables are registered as shown below.


7 - 25


The figures below present examples of use in XGB S and H types.



the same time.

7 - 26

(d) In the View' menu, click View Device/Description to look up the devices and descriptions at the
same time.

7 - 27

(e) For IEC type also, as shown in Fig. (a) ~ (d), you can look up variables with
diversified options in the View menu. The figure below is the case of an IEC type
with which the View Variables/Comment option.

7 - 28


An analog mix module has internal memory for data communication with XGB base unit.

Variable Type
Device assignment
Description
Read/
Write
Signal
direction
Sor
Htype
IEC type
_0y_ERR BIT U0y.00.0 %UX0.y.0 Module Error
Read AD08A CPU
_0y_RDY BIT U0y.00.F %UX0.y.15 Module Ready
_0y_CH0_ACT BIT U0y.01.0 %UX0.y.16 CH0 Active
Read AD08A CPU
_0y_CH0_ERR BIT U0y.01.8 %UX0.y.24 CH0 error
Read AD08A CPU
_0y_CH1_ERR BIT U0y.01.9 %UX0.y.25 CH1 error
_0y_CH2_ERR BIT U0y.01.A %UX0.y.26 CH2 error
_0y_CH3_ERR BIT U0y.01.B %UX0.y.27 CH3 error
_0y_CH4_ERR BIT U0y.01.C %UX0.y.28 CH4 error
_0y_CH5_ERR BIT U0y.01.D %UX0.y.29 CH5 error
_0y_CH6_ERR BIT U0y.01.E %UX0.y.30 CH6 error
_0y_CH7_ERR BIT U0y.01.F %UX0.y.31 CH7 error
_0y_CH0_DATA WORD U0y.02 %UW0.y.2 CH0 Output
Read AD08A CPU
_0y_CH0_IDD BIT U0y.10.0 %UX0.y.160 CH0 Disconnection flag
Read AD08A CPU
_0y_ERR_CLR BIT U0y.11.0 %UX0.y.176 Error Clear Request
Read/
Write
AD08A CPU

7 - 29

- In the device allocation, the small letter y is the No. of the slot where the module is installed.
- For example, to read the CH3 Output of the analog module installed in the slot 4, write in U04.05.
(%UW0.4.5 for IEC types)
Device Type
U 0 4 . 0 5
Slot No.
Word
[SorHtype]
Word classifier

Device Type
Slot No.
Base No
Word
[IEC type]
% U W 0 . 4 . 5

(1) Module Ready/Error Flag ( ( ) is for IEC types, y: slot No.)
(a) U0y.00.F (%UX0.y.15): at power on or reset of PLC CPU, turns on when the analog I/O
conversion is ready, and analog conversion is performed.
(b) U0y.00.0(%UX0.y.0): the flag indicating the error status of A/D conversion module.

- - - - - - - - - - -
U0x.00
(%UW0.x.0)

Error occurrence
information
Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): Normal
R
e
a
d
y
E
r
r
o
r
- - -

Module READY
Bit On (1): Normal
Bit Off (0): error

(2) Operation channel information
( ( ) is for IEC types, x: slot No.)
This is the area for storing the operation information, input wire open detection,
and channel error information by channel.

C
H
.
3
C
H
.
2
C
H
.
1
C
H
.
0
C
H
.
6
C
H
.
7
- - - -
U0x.01
(%UW0.x.1)

Operation Ch, Info.
Bit On (1): in operation
Bit Off (0): Stop operation
C
H
.
5
C
H
.
4
- - - -

7 - 30

(3) Digital Output Values ( ( ) is for IEC types, y: slot No.)
(a) A/D converted digital values are outputted to buffer memory address U0y.02 ~ U0y.09
(%UW0.y.2~ %UW0.y.9) by channel-basis.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CH 0 Output
U0y.02
(%UW0.y.2)

CH 1 Output
U0y.03
(%UW0.y.3)
CH 2 Output
U0y.04
(%UW0.y.4)
CH 3 Output
U0y.05
(%UW0.y.5)

CH 4 Output
U0y.06
(%UW0.y.6)
CH 5 Output
U0y.07
(%UW0.y.7)

CH 6 Output
U0y.08
(%UW0.y.8)
CH 7 Output
U0y.09
(%UW0.y.9)

7 - 31

The operation parameter setting area of the analog mix module is as follows.

Memory
Add.
0 Appoint operating channel Bit Off (0): stop, Bit ON (1): run R/W
PUT
GET
1
I/O range setting
(CH0~CH3)
I/O range setting (bit)
0000: 4 ~ 20
0001: 0 ~ 20
0010: 1 ~ 5 V
0011: 0 ~ 5 V
0100: 0 ~ 10 V
R/W
2
I/O range setting
(CH4~CH7)
R/W
3 Output data type setting
Input data type setting (bit)
00: 0 ~ 4000
01: -2000 ~ 2000
10: precise value
11: 0 ~ 1000
- In case of precise value
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
1 ~ 5 V: 100 ~ 500
0 ~ 5 V: 0 ~ 500
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
R/W
4 CH0 Filter constant
0 or 4 ~ 64000 R/W
12 Average processing method
Specifies average processing method (2bit
per channel)
00: Sampling processing
01: Time average processing
10: Count average processing
11: Moving average processing
R/W
R/W
Time average: 4 ~ 16000 [ms]
Count average: 2 ~ 64000 [times]
Moving average: 2 ~ 100
R/W
21 Error information
Error information (Decimal, # channel n0.)
0-7: CH0-7
10#: error in channel range
20#: error in channel filter value
30#: error in channel average value
R GET

Note
(1) If the memory address 0~8 area is entered with values different from the setting.
U0x.01.8~U0x.01.B (setting error representative flag, for IEC type, %UX0.x.24~%UX0.x.27) is ON
and runs with default values. The error information is displayed in the setting error information are
(No. 9).
CAUTION (2) System areas (after No. 10) are read/write protected.
Changing these areas may cause malfunction or failure of the product.
7 - 32

(1) Operating Channel Setting
The default setting for operating channel is Stop.

C
H
.
3
C
H
.
2
C
H
.
1
C
H
.
0
C
H
.
6
C
H
.
7
- - - -
Address0

Appoint Using CH
Bit On (1): Operate
Bit Off (0): Stop
- - - -
C
H
.
4
C
H
.
5

(2) Input Range Setting
(a) The analog input voltage range is DC 1~5V, DC 0~5V, DC 0~10V, and analog current input
range is DC 4~20mA, DC 0~20mA.
(b) Default range is DC 4~20mA.

BIT15 BIT14 BIT13 BIT12 BIT11 BIT10 BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
CH 0
Address1
Input range setting (4 bit per channel)
0 : 4 ~ 20
1 : 0 ~ 20
2 : 1 ~ 5 V
3 : 0 ~ 5 V
4 : 0 ~ 10 V
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3
BIT15 BIT14 BIT13 BIT12 BIT11 BIT10 BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
CH 4
Address2
CH 5 CH 6 CH 7

(3) I/O Data Type Setting
(a) I/O data type can be set up for each channel.
(b) If the I/O data type is not set up, all the channels are processed in 0~4000 range.

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Address3

Input data type setting (2bit per channel))
0 : 0 ~ 4000
1 : -2000 ~ 2000
2 : Precise value
3 : 0 ~ 1000
CH 7
- For precise value
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
1 ~ 5 V: 100 ~ 500
0 ~ 5 V: 0 ~ 500
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
CH 6 CH 5 CH 4 CH 3 CH 2 CH 1 CH 0

7 - 33

(4) Filter Constant Setting
(a) If set to 0, no filtration is processed.
(b) Default setting is 0 no filtration process.

CH 0 filter constant (0 or 4~64000ms) Address4
Address5
Address6
Address7
Address8
Address9
Address10
Address11
CH 1 filter constant (0 or 4~64000ms)

(5) Averaging Method Setting
(a) Averaging method can be one of; time average, count average, moving average.
(b) Default setting is no averaging throughout the channels.

CH 0
Address12
Average processing (4 bit per channel)
0 : Sampling Processing
1 : Time average processing
2 : Count average processing
3 : Moving average processing
CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7

7 - 34

(6) Average Value Setting
(a) Set up average values in accordance with the setting area of the averaging method.
(b) If the average value is out of setting range, averaging is not applied.

CH 0 average value Address13
Address14
Input channel # average value setting
Time average : 4 ~ 16000 [ms]
Count average : 2 ~ 64000 [times]
Moving average: 2 ~ 100
Address15
Address16
Address17
Address18
Address19
Address20
CH 1 average value
CH 2 average value
CH 3 average value
CH 4 average value
CH 5 average value
CH 6 average value
CH 7 average value

(7) Error Code (Address 21)
(a) Saves the error code detected by the analog mix module.
(b) The types and descriptions of the error are as follows.

Set-up error information Address21

Type
Error
code
LED Description
Error code
Priority
Remark
Error
10#
LED 1s
flickering
Channel range set-up error 1
# channel no.
CH 0~7
20# Channel filter constant set-up error 2
30# Channel average value set-up error 3

(c) In case of plural errors, the code with higher priority order will be saved.

(9) System Area (after Address 22)
(a) System area (after address 22) is read/write protected.

Caution
Modifying this area can cause malfunction of failure of product.

7 - 35


(1) This sample program sets up operating parameters of analog input module.
(2) Initial settings are saved in the internal memory of the module by input by once.
(3) The sample program below controls the output data of the analog input module at slot #1 and
check open wire.

7.12.1 Example of [I/O Parameter] Usage



7 - 36

`

(2) Sample Program

(a) When the module is in normal operation, M0000 is turned On.
U01.00.0 (Module Error) = Off
U01.00.F (Module Ready) = On
U01.01.0 (Input Channel 0 in-operation) = On
U01.01.8 (Input Channel 0 Error) = Off
(c) If open-wire error occurs in channel 0, U01.10.0 (channel 0 open-wire) is ON, and M0001 bit is
set.

(3) Sample Program (IEC type)

%UX0.1.16(Channel 0 in-operation) = On
%UX0.1.24(Channel 0 Error) = Off
(b) When %MX0 is ON, Input Channel 0 Converted Value(%UW0.1.4) is transferred to CH 0
Input variable.
(c) If open-wire error occurs at Channel 0, %UX0.1.160 (Channel 0 open) turns ON and %MX1 bit
is set.

CH0 program
Output CH0 program
CH 0 input
7 - 37


This section describes methods for identifying the troubles which may occur during the
operation of analog input module, and their solutions.

7.13.1 LED Indication for Error

An analog input module has one INPUT LED to indicate error status of the module.

Item Normal State
Channel Open
(Input)
Parameter Setting
Error
Module H/W
Failure
(Serious Failure)
LED On Flash at 1s intervals
(input parameter
setting error)
Flash at 0.2s
intervals
Module
Behavior
All functions are
normal
All functions are
performed.
Indicates min. input
value
All functions work at
default parameter
setting
Module cannot
function
Action - Check input wire
Check parameter
setting
Request for A/S

7.13.2 Checking Module Condition

XG5000s system monitor enables verification of the analog mix module conditions (module type,
module information, OS version).

(1) Procedure
The verification can be done in 2 ways;
(a) [Monitor] -> [System Monitor] -> mouse right click on module icon -> [Module Information]
(b) [Monitor] -> [System Monitor] -> double click module icon.

(2) Module Information
(a) Module type: shows the information on the present module.
(b) Module information: shows the OS version of the module.
(c) OS version: shows release date of Module OS.

7 - 38


(1) INPUT LED is off.

INPUT LED is off..
Analog input module is correctly
installed.
Install the module correctly
No
Yes
XG5000 software shows I/O information
No
Yes
System resumes normal function if the
module is replaced.

Yes Contact nearest dealer or A/S center

(2) LED flashes.

LED flashes
LED flashes at 0.2s intervals.
No
Yes
LED flashes at 1s intervals
Input wire is correct.
Correct wiring according to user manual
(Check line open)
No
Yes
(Check error code)

No

7 - 39

(3) Analog input value is abnormal.

Analog input value is abnormal.
External DC24V input power is OK.
Supply DC 24 power
No
Yes
FG ground is OK
in the user manual
No
Yes
setting
the user manual
No
Yes
External voltage/current selector switch
setting is correct
Set the switch according to the user manual No
Yes

Chapter 8 Analog Input Option Board
8 - 1



Before using the analog input option board, follow steps below.

XBO-AD02A

Wiring
Setting parameter
Programming
Specification (8.2.2 performance specification)
Input type and range
Digital output range
Wiring
Wiring analog input
Analog input test
Parameter
Gain adjustment
Programming
Programming for reading analog data
(U device)

8 - 2

8.2 Specifications


Related
standards
1
Operating
temp.
0 ~ 55 C
2
Storage
temp.
25 ~ +70 C
3
Operating
humidity
4
Storage
humidity
5 Vibration
IEC61131-2
10 s f < 57 0.075
Each 10
times in
X,Y,Z
directions
57 s f s 150 9.8(1G)
10 s f < 57 0.035
57 s f s 150 4.9 (0.5G)
6 Shocks
- Max. impact acceleration : 147 (15G)
- Authorized time : 11
- Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse (Each 3 times in X,Y,Z directions)
IEC61131-2
7 Noise
Square wave
impulse noise
AC : 1,500 V
DC : 900 V
LSIS standard
Electrostatic
discharging
Voltage : 4(contact discharging)
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 ,10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast
Transient
/burst
noise
Class
Power
module
Digital/
Analog I/O
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2 1
8
Ambient
conditions
9
Operating
height
2000m or less
10
Pollution
degree
2 or less
8 - 3

Items Performance specification
Analog input
range
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
Set by external voltage/current selector switch after being set at user
program or I/O parameter per each channel
Digital output
Range
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
Max. resolution
1/4000 (DC 4~20: 1/3200)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)
Additional
function
Gain adjustment
function
Insulation method
No insulation between channels
No insulation between input terminal and PLC main unit
Input terminal 5 - point terminal block
2 (when using XBC-DxxxS/SU Stype)
Supply power Inner DC 5V
Weight 20g

Note1) In order to use analog input option board, the following version is needed.

XBC-DxxxE type V1.1
XBC-DxxxS type V1.1
XBC-DxxxSU type V1.0
XG5000 V.3.61

Note2) Offset/gain value on the analog input range can be adjusted at XG5000- I/O parameter
8 - 4



Hook for fixation
Terminal block
Cover
Hook for fixation
Connector for
option board
Input
connector
35.0mm
49.0mm
10.3mm

Hook for fixation Hook for fixing the option board to main unit
Terminal block
(Analog input)
Cover Option board cover

Connector for option
board
Connection connector for connecting the option board to the main
unit
Input connector Wiring connector for connecting with the external device

8 - 5


The input ranges of voltage and current can be set up per channel with user program or I/O
parameters. The output types of digital data are defined as follows.
(1) Unsigned Value
(2) Signed Value
(3) Precise Value

Digital
output
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
4047
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
2047
0
250
500
750
1000
1011
DC 4 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 10 V
4 mA 20 mA 12 mA
0 mA
0 V 5 V 10 V
Analog
input
Analog input practical
range
Offset
Gain
20 mA 10 mA
-48 -2048 -12

Digital
Output Range
3.81 4 8 12 16 20 20.18
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(400 ~ 2000)
381 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2018
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

8 - 6

Digital
Output Range
-0.24 0 5 10 15 20 20.23
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 2000)
-24 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2023
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Digital
Output Range
-0.12 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 10.11
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

8 - 7

8.5 Accuracy

Accuracy of digital output value does not changed even if input range is changed. Figure below shows
the range of the accuracy with analog input range of 0 ~ 10 V and digital output type of unsigned value
selected.
Accuracy of XBO-AD02A is 1.0%.

0
0V 5V
2000
10 V
4000
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

v
a
l
u
e
3980
4020
-20
20

[ Accuracy ]

4000 1.0% = 40
using 5V input.

4000 1.0% = 40
using 10V input.

8 - 8

8.6 Functions of Analog Input Option Board

The functions of analog input option board are as follows.

Channel
Specify operation/stop of the channel which will perform A/D conversion.
Specifying unused channels as Stop can shorten overall operation time.
Input Voltage /current
range setting
Analog input option board provides 2 ranges(4~20mA, 0~20mA) of current I/O and 1
range ( 0~10V) of voltage I/O.
Output data type
setting
This module provides 4 output data types (Unsigned, Signed, Precise, and Percentile
Values)
method
Sampling Process
Averaging process
- Outputs A/D converted value averaged by count to reduce rapid change of input
value caused by external noise

In popular A/D conversion process, analog input signals are collected at constant time intervals and
A/D converted. The time elapsed for the analog signals to be converted into digital signals and

(Process Time) = (No. of Channels Used) x (Conversion Speed + Scan time)

(Ex.) Process time when using 1 of 2 I/O channels and scan time is 2;
1 x (1 + 2) = 3

The term sampling means taking sample value among continuous analog signal values at regular
intervals.

.

8 - 9

8.6.2 Count Averaging Function

The input values of the designated channel are accumulated for the preset cycles, and the average
value of the total sum is outputted in digital data.
Actual input value
Averaging
Section
Averaging
Section
Sampling
Section

Setting Range = 2 ~ 64000 [times]
For count averaging, averaging interval is calculated with the No. of channels used.

Averaging interval [ms] = Averaging count x (No. of channels used x1ms + Scan time)

Note
(1) Averaging interval varies according to scan time

8 - 10

8.6.3 Gain Adjustment Function

You can adjust input gain of the analog input option board.

When selecting current input for analog input range, the digital output (4000) corresponding to analog
input max. value (20mA) is standard gain value. When selecting voltage input, the digital output
(4000) corresponding to analog input max. value (10V) is standard gain value.

(1) You can adjust input gain at I/O parameter

(2) Input gain setting range = - 40 ~ 40

(3) Adjusting gain for each channel is available

(4) Example
When you set Input gain as -5, 3996 (=4000-5) applies for gain.

Note
(1) When you adjust the input gain, max. resolution changes, too.

8 - 11

8.7 Wiring

(6) Enable only needed channels


*(a) In case of current input, connect V+ terminal to I+ terminal
*(b) Input resistance of current input circuit is 250 (typ.).
*(c) Input resistance of voltage input circuit is 1 M (min.)

(3) Terminal block configuration

+
-
+
-
CH0
CH1
V0+
I0+
V1+
I1+
COM
R
R
R
R
R
R
XBO-AD02A
*(a) *(b)
*(c)
(1) Current input
(2) Voltage input
8 - 12

In voltage input, the wiring (cable) length between transmitter or sensor and option board has an
effect on digital-converted values of the option board as specified below;

Where,






( ) | | Ri Rc Rs
Vs Ri
Vin
+ +

=
2

100 1 %
|
.
|
\
|
=
Vs
Vin
Vi %

Vs
Rs
Rc
Rc
Ri
Load

Vin
8 - 13


Analog input option boards operation parameters can be specified through XG5000s [I/O parameters].

(1) Settings
of analog option board. Setting items available through [I/O parameters] on the XG5000 project
window are as described below in the table.

Item Details
[I/O parameter] (a) Specify the following setting items necessary for the option board
operation.
4) Count averaging
5) Input gain
(b) If downloading is complete, Parameter set by user in XG5000 is
saved in Flash memory of XGB main unit.


8 - 14

(c) In the [I/O Parameter Setting] window, find out the slot of the base where the analog input
option board is installed, and click it.



8 - 15


8 - 16



Note
3) The test function of the [Special Module Monitor] enables testing analog input option board without

(a) With the XG5000 in connection (online) with the base unit of PLC, select [Monitor] -> [Special
Module Monitor]. The Select Special Module window shown below will appear showing the type
of the special modules and base/slot information. In the list dialog, the modules present in the
PLC system are displayed.

8 - 17



8 - 18

Monitoring
Detailed
information of CH0


[Test] can be set up only when the operation status of the XGB base unit is STOP mode.

8 - 19

Monitor max/min
value
Reset max/min
value


(g) Close

8 - 20


The variables for each module are automatically registered by referring to the information of the special
modules set up in the [I/O Parameter]. User can modify variables and descriptions.



(c) In the Edit menu, select Register U device

8 - 21

(d) Click Yes.



8 - 22


The figures below present examples of use in XGB compact E and S types



8 - 23

the same time.

(d) In the View' menu, click View Device/Comment to look up the devices and descriptions at the
same time.

8 - 24

(e) In the View' menu, click View Vriable/Comment to look up the devices and descriptions at the
same time.

8 - 25


An analog input option board has internal memory for data communication with XGB base unit.

Variable Type
Device
assignment
Description
Read/
Write
Signal
direction
_0x_ERR BIT U0x.00.0 Module Error
Read Option CPU
_0x_RDY BIT U0x.00.F Module Ready
_0x_AD0_ACT BIT U0x.01.0 CH0 Active
Read Option CPU
_0x_AD1_ACT BIT U0x.01.1 CH1 Active
_0X_AD0_IDD BIT U0x.01.4 CH0 Disconnection flag
Read Option CPU
_0X_AD1_IDD BIT U0x.01.5 CH1 Disconnection flag
_0x_AD0_ERR BIT U0x.01.8 CH0 error
Read Option CPU
_0x_AD1_ERR BIT U0x.01.9 CH1 error
_0x_AD0_DATA WORD U0x.04 CH0 Output Read Option CPU
_0x_AD1_DATA WORD U0x.05 CH1 Output Read Option CPU

Note
How to express U device
U0x.00.0

Ex1) CH0 Output of the module at slot 9 -> U09.04
Ex2) CH0 disconnection flag of the module at slot 9 -> U09.01.4

Bit no
Word no
Slot
8 - 26

(1) Module Ready/Error Flag (x: slot no.)
(a) U0x.00.F: at power on or reset of PLC CPU, turns on when the analog I/O conversion is
ready and analog conversion is performed.
(b) U0y.00.0: the flag indicating the error status of analog input option board module.

- - - - - - - - - - -
U0x.00

Error occurrence
information
Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): Normal
R
e
a
d
y
E
r
r
o
r
- - -

Module READY
Bit On (1): Normal
Bit Off (0): error

(2) Operation channel information/ channel error information flag (x: slot no.)
This is the area for storing the operation information and channel error information by channel.

- -
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0
- - - - - -
U0x.01

Operating CH
information
Bit On (1): operating
Bit Off (0): stop
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0
- -
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0

CH error information
Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): normal

CH disconnection
information
Bit On (1): disconnection
Bit Off (0): normal

(3) Digital Output Values (x: slot no.)
(a) A/D converted digital values are outputted to buffer memory address U0x.04 ~ U0x.05 by
channel-basis.
Input CH0 conversion value U0x.04

8 - 27


Memory
Add.
0 Enable channel Bit Off (0): disable, Bit ON (1): enable R/W
PUT
GET
1 Input range setting
Input range setting (4 bit per channels)
0: 4 ~ 20
1: 0 ~ 20
2: 0 ~ 10 V
R/W
2 Output data type setting
Output data type setting
(4 bit per channels)
0: 0 ~ 4000
1: -2000 ~ 2000
2: Precise value
3: 0 ~ 1000
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
R/W
3
Input channel 0 count
average value setting
0 or 2 ~ 64000 [times]
R/W
4
averaging value setting
R/W
9
Input channel 0 gain
weighting
-40~40
R/W
10
weighting
R/W
13 Setup error information
10#: input ch range setting error
20#: input ch data type setting error
30#: input ch average value setting error
40#: input ch gain weighting setting error
(#: channel number)
R GET

8 - 28

(1) Operating Channel Setting (address 0)
(a) You can set Enable/Disable of analog input option board per each channel
(b) Disable the unused channels to reduce the conversion period.
(c) Default value is Disable for all channels
(d) When using PUT instruction, address is as follows.
- -
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
1
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0
- - - - - -
Address0

Enable CH
Bit On (1): enable
Bit Off (0): disable
- - - - - -

(e) The values set in bit 2~15 are ignored.
(f)This area is same as setting in Channel status of I/O parameter

8 - 29

(2) Input range setting area (address 1)
(a) Set the type of input range with the following code

Bit (HEX) Input range
0000 (0) 4 ~ 20
0001 (1) 0 ~ 20
0010 (2) 0 ~ 10 V

(b) If you set more than 3, 0 (4~20) will be set forcibly
But, U0X.01.8~ U0X.01.9 (Setup error flag) will be ON.
(c) When using PUT instruction, address is as follows.
Input CH 0
Address1

Input range (4bit per channel)
0 : 4 ~ 20
1 : 0 ~ 20
2 : 0 ~ 10 V
Input CH 1 - - - - - - - -

(d) The values set in bit 8~15 are ignored.
(e)This area is same as setting in Input range of I/O parameter

8 - 30

(3) Output data type setting area (address 2)
(a) Set the type of output data type with the following code
Bit (HEX) Output data type
0000 (0) 0~4000
0001 (1) -2000~2000
0010 (2) Precise value
0011 (3) 0~1000

In case of precise value, output data type is designated as the following value according to each
input range type

Input range Precise value
4 ~ 20 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V 0 ~ 1000

(b) If you set more than 4, 0 (0~4000) will be set forcibly.
(c) When using PUT instruction, address is as follows

Input CH 0
Address2

Output type (4bit per channel)
0 : 0 ~ 4000
1 : -2000 ~ 2000
2 : precise value
3 : 0 ~ 1000
Input CH 1
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
- - - - - - - -

(e)This area is same as setting in Output type of I/O parameter

8 - 31

(4) Count average value setting area (address 3~4)
(a) Set count average value with 0 or value of 2~6400
(b) If you set the count average value as 0, corresponding channel will not perform averaging
process and output sampled analog input value
(c) If you set 1 or more than 64001, 0 (Disable averaging) will be set forcibly.
(d) When using PUT instruction, address is as follows

Input CH0 count average value (0 or 2 ~ 64000 [times) Address3
Input CH1 count average value (0 or 2 ~ 64000 [times) Address4

(e) This area is same as setting in Count-Avr of I/O parameter

8 - 32

(5) Input gain weighting setting area (address 9~10)
(a) Set input gain weighting with value of -40~40
(b) If you set this as 0 (default value), 4000 will apply for gain value
(c)For example, if you set this as -10, 4010 (=4000-(-10)) will apply for gain value

Input CH0 gain (-40 ~ 40) Address9

(e) This area is same as setting in Input gain of I/O parameter

(6) Setup error information output area (address 13)
(a) Saves error code detected when setting (setting by program)
(b) Setting error is canceled when value is reset to make it in the valid range
(c) When U0X.01.8~ U0X.01.9 (setting error flat) is on, check that area and fix the corresponding
setting to cancel the error
(d) When using GET instruction, address is as follows

Setting error information Address13

Type
Error
code
Description Priority Remark
Setting
error
10# Input CH range setting error 1
#: CH number
Input CH 0,1
20# Input CH data type setting error 2
30# Input CH count average value setting error 3
40# Input CH gain weighting setting error 4

(e) When more than two errors occur simultaneously, it saves error code having higher priority.

8 - 33


(1) This sample program sets up operating parameters of analog input option board.
(2) Initial settings are saved in the internal memory of the XGB main unit by one input.
(3) The sample program below controls the I/O data of the analog input option board at option slot #0
(I/O slot #9) and check open wire.




8 - 34

`

(2) Sample Program

(a) When the option board is in normal operation, M0000 is turned On.
set.

8 - 35


This section describes methods for identifying the troubles which may occur during the operation of analog
input option board, and their solutions.



Installation is OK.
Install the option board properly
No
Yes
FG ground is OK
in the user manual
No
Yes
Wiring is OK
(Current input wiring, voltage input
wiring)
Refer to the manual and wire properly No
Yes
setting
the user manual
No
Yes

Chapter 9 Analog Output Option Board
9 - 1



Before using the analog output option board, follow steps below.

XBO-DA02A

Wiring
Writing analog output data
Setting parameter
Programming
Digital input range
Analog output range
Wiring
Analog output wiring
Analog output test
XG5000 special module monitor
test mode
Parameter
Programming
(U device)
If there is error or analog output is
abnormal, refer to the trouble shooting.
9 - 2

9.2 Specification


Here describes general specification of analog output option board.
1 Operating Temp. 0 ~ 55 C
-
2 Storage Temp. 25 ~ 70 C
3
Operating
humidity
5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing)
5 Vibration
IEC61131-2
10 f 57 0.075
10 times
each
direction
(X,Y and Z)
57 f 150 9.8

(1G)
10 f 57 0.035
57 f 150 4.9

(0.5G)
6 Shocks
Peak acceleration : 147

(15G)
Duration : 11ms
7 Noise
Square wave
impulse noise
AC : 1,500 V
DC : 900 V
LSIS standard
Electrostatic
discharge
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 , 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast transient
/Burst noise
Classifi-
cation
Power
supply
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2 1
8
Ambient
conditions
-
9 Operating height 2000m or less
10 Pollution degree 2 or less
9 - 3


Here describes performance specification of analog output module.
Item Specification
No. of channels 2 channels
Analog
output
range
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistance: 2 or more)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(Load resistance: 450)
Output range can be set at user program or I/O parameter for each
channel
Digital
input
Range
Unsigned
value
0~4000
Precise value 0 ~ 1000 (DC0~10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC4~20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC0~20)
Percentile value 0 ~ 1000
Maximum resolution
1/4000 (DC 4 ~ 20mA: 1/3200)
2.5 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
6.25 (DC 4~20)
Maximum conversion speed 1/channel + scan time
Additional function
Channel output state setting (former, min, middle, max value)
Insulation method
no insulation between analog output channels
no insulation between output terminal and PLC main unit
Power supply Internal 5V
Current consumption 150
Weight 20g

Note1) In order to use analog output option board, the following version is needed.

XBC-DxxxE type V1.1
XBC-DxxxS type V1.1
XG5000 V.3.61

Note2) Offset/gain value on analog I/O range can be adjusted at XG5000 - I/O parameter
9 - 4

9.3 Designations and Functions

Here describes designation and functions.

Hook for fixation
Terminal block
Cover
Hook for fixation
Connector for
option board
Input
connector
35.0mm
49.0mm
10.3mm

Terminal block
(Analog input)

board
unit

9 - 5

9.4 Characteristic of I/O Conversion

The output ranges of voltage and current can be set up per channel with user program or I/O
parameters. The input types of digital data are defined as follows.
(1) Unsigned Value
(2) Signed Value
(3) Precise Value

Digital
input
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
4047
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
2047
0
250
500
750
1000
1011
DC 4 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 10 V
4 mA 20 mA 12 mA
0 mA
0 V 5 V 10 V
Analog
output
Analog output practical
range
Offset
Gain
20 mA 10 mA

(1) DC4~20mA range output
Digital input
range
Analog output current (mA)
4mA or
less
4 8 12 16 20
Over
20mA
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 or less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Over 4000
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 or
less
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 Over 2000
Precise value
(400 ~ 2000)
400 or less 400 800 1200 1600 2000 Over 2000
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000

9 - 6

(2) DC 0 ~ 20mA range output
Digital input
range
0mA or
less
0 5 10 15 20
Over
20mA
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 or less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Over 4000
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 or
less
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 Over 2000
Precise value
(400 ~ 2000)
0 or less 0 500 1000 1500 2000 Over 2000
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000

(3) DC 0 ~ 10V range output
Digital input
range
Analog output voltage (V)
0V or less 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 Over 10V
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 or less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Over 4000
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 or
less
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 Over 2000
Precise value
(400 ~ 2000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000

Note
Warning
(1) There is Dead Band area around voltage output (0V), current output (0mA).
(a) Digital input-based: about 0 ~ 10
(b) Analog output-based: voltage(about 0 ~ 25 ), current (about 0 ~ 50 )
(2) In Dead Band area, digital input and analog output may not coincide (within accuracy)

9 - 7

9.5 Accuracy

Accuracy for analog output value does not changed even if output range is changed. Figure below shows
the range of the accuracy with analog output range of 0 ~ 10 V and digital output type of unsigned value
selected.
Accuracy of XBO-DA02A is 1.0%.

2000 4000 0
10V
0V
5V
10.1V
9.9V
0.1V
-0.1V
Digital input
A
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t
20mA
20.2mA
19.8mA
0mA
0.2mA
-0.2mA
10mA

4000 1.0% = 40
So in case of 5V output, accuracy range is (5V - 400.0025V) ~ (5V+400.0025V) = 4.9 ~ 5.1V

4000 1.0% = 40
So in case of 10V output, accuracy range is (10V-400.0025V) ~ (5V+400.0025V) = 9.9 ~ 10.1V

9 - 8

9.6 Functions of Analog Output Option Board

Here describes functions of XBO-DA02A option board
Function Details
Enable/Disable
channel
1) It sets up Run/Stop of a channel that will operate an analog output.
2) You can save the time of whole operation by stopping unused channels.
The range of
output
voltage/current
1) It sets up the range of an analog output.
2) Analog output option board offers one voltage output (DC 0 ~ 10V) and two
current output (DC 4 ~ 20mA, DC 0 ~ 20mA).
The input data
type
1) It sets up the type of a digital input.
2) It offers four types of a digital input.
(Unsigned value, signed value, precise value, percentile value)
The status of
output
1) It sets up the output status of a channel when it switches Run to Stop.
2) It offers four types of output status.
(Former, min, middle, max value)

9.6.1 Channel Output State Setting Function

It sets output against PLC stop and abnormal state

(1) Function
It is used to output an already set value when PLC system switches RUN to Stop

(2) Type
You can select one among former, min, middle and max value.
(a) Former value: keeps last normal output value
(b) Min. value: outputs minimum value of the each output range
(c) Middle value: outputs middle value of the each output range
(d) Max. value: outputs max. value of the each output range.

(3) Example
When output is 10mA and range of output channel is 4~20mA, if system switches Run to Stop,
it outputs as follows according to output state setting.

(a) Former value: keeps previous output, 10mA
(b) Min. value: outputs min. value of corresponding range, 4mA.
(c) Middle value: outputs middle value of corresponding range, 12mA
(d) Max. value: outputs max. value of corresponding range, 20mA.

9 - 9


You can adjust output gain of the analog output option board.

When selecting current output for analog output range, the digital input (4000) corresponding to
analog output max. value (20mA) is standard gain value. When selecting voltage output, the digital
input (4000) corresponding to analog output max. value (10V) is standard gain value.

(1) You can adjust output gain at I/O parameter

(2) Output gain setting range = - 40 ~ 40


(4) Example
When you set Output gain as -5, 3996 (=4000-5) applies for gain.

Note
(1) When you adjust the output gain, max. resolution changes, too.

9 - 10

9.7 Wiring

9.7.1 Precautions for wiring

(1) Dont let AC power line at close range to output option board to prevent a surge or inductive
noise from the A.C. side.
(2) Select the cable with consideration of an ambient temperature and a permitted current limit. It is
recommended over AWG22 (0.3).
(3) Dont let the cable at close range to hot devices or materials. And dont bring it into contact with
oil for a long time. These are the factors of a short circuit occurs unusual operation or damages
devices.
(4) Check the polarity before external power is supplied to the terminal.
(5) It may produce inductive hindrance that is a cause of unusual operations or defects if you wire
the cable with a high-voltage line or a power line.
(6) Enable the only channel you want to use

9.7.2 Wiring example

(3) Terminal block configuration

(1) Current output
(2) Voltage output
V0+
I0+
V1+
I1+
COM
XBO-DA02A
CH0
CH1
510 or
less
Motor etc.
Motor etc.
2k or
above
450 or
less
9 - 11


You can specify operation parameters of the analog output option board through [I/O parameters] menu in
XG5000.

(1) Setting items
For the users convenience, XG5000 provides GUI (Graphical User Interface) for parameters setting of
analog output option board.
Followings are available through [I/O parameters] on the XG5000 project window.

Item Details
[I/O Parameters]
(1) Parameter setting
It specifies the following items for the option board operation.
- Channel Enable/Disable
- Analog output range (Voltage/current)
- Input data type
- Channel output type
- Output gain
(2) After the parameters that user specified in XG5000 are downloaded,
they will be saved to a flash memory in the XGB main unit.

(2) How to use [I/O Parameters] menu
(a) Run XG5000 to create a project. (Refer to XG5000 program manual for details on how to create
the project)

(b) Double-click [I/O Parameters] on the project window.

9 - 12

(c) Click the slot of the base that contains analog output option board in the [I/O Parameter Setting]
window.

(d) Click the arrow button then you can see the menu to choose the applicable module. Select the
applicable option board.

(e) Double-click the applicable slot that is selected for the parameters setting or click [Details].

9 - 13


9.9 Special Module Monitoring Function

The function of the special module monitor is as follows.

Note
3) The test function of the [Special Module Monitor] enables testing analog output option board
without sequence programming.

9 - 14

(a) Connecting XG5000 with PLC basic unit, [Special Module List] window will show base/slot
information and types of special module by click [Monitor] [Special Module Monitoring].
Special Module List will display the modules that are installed in PLC now.

(b) Select a special module then click [Module Info.] button to display the information as described
below.

(c) Click [Monitor] button in the [Special Module List] window to display the [Special Module
Monitor] window as below

9 - 15

(d) [Start Monitoring] button will show you digital input data of the operating channel.
Output monitoring
Detailed
information of
output CH0


(e) [Test] is used to change the parameters of the voltage output module. You can change the
XGB CPU units status is in [Stop Monitoring].


(f) [Close] is used to escape from the monitoring/test screen.
When closing the Monitoring/Test screen, the setting value is not saved anymore.
9 - 16

9.10 Register U devices (special module variable)

Register the variables for each option board referring to the special module information that is set in the

(1) Registration sequence
(a) Select a special module type in [I/O Parameter Setting] window.

(b) Double-click [Variable/Comment] from the project window.


9 - 17

(d) Click Yes.


(2) Save variables
(a) The contents of View Variables can be saved as a text file
(b) Click [Edit] [Export to File].
(c) The contents of View Variable are saved as a text file.

9 - 18

(3) View variables in a program

The figure below present examples of use in XGB compact E and S types

(a) The example of XG5000 is shown below.

(b) Select [View] [Variables]. The devices are changed into variables.

(c) Select [View] [Devices/Variables]. Device and variable both are displayed.

9 - 19

(d) Select [View] [Devices/Comments]. Device and comment both are displayed.

9 - 20

(e) Select [View] [Variable/Comments]. Variable and comment both are displayed.

9 - 21

9.11 Internal memory

Describes configuration and function of internal memory

Describes data I/O area
Variable name Type
Device
assignment
Description Read/Write Signal direction
Read Option CPU
_0x_DA0_ACT BIT U0x.01.2 CH0 active
Read Option CPU
_0x_DA1_ACT BIT U0x.01.3 CH1 active
_0x_DA0_ERR BIT U0x.01.A CH0 error
Read Option CPU
_0x_DA1_ERR BIT U0x.01.B CH1 error
_0x_DA0_OUTEN BIT U0x.06.0 CH0 output state setting
Write Option CPU
_0x_DA1_OUTEN BIT U0x.06.1 CH1 output state setting
_0x_DA0_DATA WORD U0x.07 CH0 input value Write Option CPU
_0x_DA1_DATA WORD U0x.08 CH1 input value Write Option CPU

Note
U0x.00.0

Ex1) CH0 input value of the module at slot 9 -> U09.07
Ex2) CH0 error of the module at slot 9 -> U09.01.A

Bit no
Word no
Slot
9 - 22

(1) Module Ready/Channel Error information (x: slot number)
(a) U0x.00.F: It will be ON when PLC CPU unit is powered or reset with the condition that an analog
option board has prepared to convert.
(b) U0x.00.0: It is the flag which displays error status of each channel in the analog option board.

- - - - - - - - - - -
U0x.00

Error occurrence
information
Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): Normal
R
e
a
d
y
E
r
r
o
r
- - -

Module READY
Bit On (1): Normal
Bit Off (0): error

(2) Channel operation information (x: slot number)
(a) This area is used to display the channel being used and channel error information.

- - CH1 CH0 - - - - - -
U0x.01

Operating CH
information
Bit Off (0): stop
- - - - CH1 CH0

Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): normal

(3) Output setting (x: slot number)
(b) If the output is not specified, output of all the channels will be disabled.

CH1 CH0 - - - - - -
U0x.06

Output setting
Bit On (1): enable output
Bit Off (0): disable output
- - - - - - - -

(4) Digital input
(a) Digital input value can be selected and used within the range of unsigned value (0~4047), signed
value (-2048~2047), precise value and percentile value (0~1011) based on input type.
Output CH0 input value U0x.07

9 - 23

9.11.2 Setting area of operation parameters

Memory
address
0 Enable CH BitOff (0): disable, bitOn (1): enable R/W
PUT
GET
1 Output range setting
Input range setting (4 bit per channel)
0: 4 ~ 20
1: 0 ~ 20
2: 0 ~ 10 V
R/W
2 Input data type setting
Input data type setting
(4 bit per channel)
0: 0 ~ 4000
1: -2000 ~ 2000
2: Precise value
3: 0 ~ 1000
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
R/W
8 CH output state setting
CH output state setting (4bit per channel)
0: Former value
1: min value
2: middle value
3: max value
R/W
11 Output CH0 gain weighting
-40 ~ 40
R/W
12 Output CH1 gain weighting R/W
50#: output ch range setting error
60#: output ch data type setting error
70#: output ch output state setting error
80#: output ch gain weighting setting error
90#: output ch input value excess error
(#: channel number)
R GET
9 - 24

(a) You can set Enable/Disable of analog output option board per each channel
- -
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
1
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
0
- - - - - -
Address0

Enable CH
Bit On (1): enable
- - - - - -


9 - 25

(2) Output range setting area (address 1)
(a) Set the type of output range with the following code

Bit (HEX) Input range
0000 (0) 4 ~ 20
0001 (1) 0 ~ 20
0010 (2) 0 ~ 10 V

But, U0X.01.A~ U0X.01.B (Setup error flag) will be ON.
Output CH 0
Address1

Output range (4bit per channel)
0 : 4 ~ 20
1 : 0 ~ 20
2 : 0 ~ 10 V
Output CH 1 - - - - - - - -

(e)This area is same as setting in Output range of I/O parameter

9 - 26

(3) Input data type setting area (address 2)
(a) Set the type of input data type with the following code
Bit (HEX) Input data type
0000 (0) 0~4000
0001 (1) -2000~2000
0011 (3) 0~1000

In case of precise value, input data type is designated as the following value according to each
output range type

Output range Precise value
4 ~ 20 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V 0 ~ 1000


Output CH 0
Address2

Input data type (4bit per channel)
0 : 0 ~ 4000
1 : -2000 ~ 2000
2 : precise value
3 : 0 ~ 1000
Output CH 1
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
- - - - - - - -

(e)This area is same as setting in Input type of I/O parameter

9 - 27

(4) Channel output state setting area (address 8)
(a) Set the output state setting with the following code

Bit (Hex) Channel output state
0000 (0) Former value
0001 (1) Min value
0010 (2) Middle value
0011 (3) Max value

(b) If you set more than 4, 0 (former value) will be set forcibly.

Output CH 0
Address8

Input data type (4bit per channel)
0 : Former value
1 : Min value
2 : Middle value
3 : Max value
Output CH 1 - - - - - - - -

(e)This area is same as setting in CH. Output type of I/O parameter

9 - 28

(5) Output gain weighting setting area (address 11~12)
(a) Set output gain weighting with value of -40~40
(b) If you set this as 0 (default value), 4000 will apply for gain value

Output CH0 gain (-40 ~ 40) Address11

(e) This area is same as setting in Output gain of I/O parameter

(c) When U0X.01.A~ U0X.01.B (setting error flat) is on, check that area and fix the corresponding


Type
Error
code
Setting
error
50# Output CH range setting error 2
#: CH number
Output CH 0,1
60# Output CH data type setting error 3
70# Output CH state setting error 4
80# Output CH gain weighting setting error 5
90# Output CH input value excess error 1

9 - 29


(1) This sample program sets up operating parameters of analog output option board.
(3) The sample program below controls the I/O data of the analog output option board at option slot
#0 (I/O slot #9) and check open wire.



(a) Output Channel 0 is set to operating channel and output range is set to 4~20mA.

9 - 30

`

(2) Sample Program

U09.01.A (Input Channel 0 Error) = Off
(b) When M0000 is ON, it turns on CH0 output state (U09.06.0) and allows output
(c) When M0000 is ON, D00100 data is moved to output CH0 input value (U09.07) and outputs.

9 - 31


output option board, and their solutions.


(1) Analog output value is abnormal.

Analog output value is abnormal.
Installation is OK.
No
Yes
FG ground is OK
in the user manual
No
Yes
Wiring is OK
(Current output wiring, voltage output
wiring)
Yes
setting
the user manual
No
Yes

Chapter 10 Analog I/O Option Board
10 - 1



Before using the analog I/O option board, follow steps below.

XBO-AH02A

Wiring
Reading/writing analog I/O data
Setting parameter
Programming
I/O type and range
Digital I/O range
Analog I/O range
Wiring
Wiring analog I/O
Analog I/O test
Parameter
Programming
Programming for reading/writing
analog data (U device)

or analog I/O data is not normal.

10 - 2

10.2 Specifications


Related
standards
1
Operating
temp.
0 ~ 55 C
2
Storage
temp.
25 ~ 70 C
3
Operating
humidity
4
Storage
humidity
5 Vibration
IEC61131-2
10 f 57 0.075
Each 10
times in
X,Y,Z
directions
57 f 150 9.8 (1G)
10 f 57 0.035
57 f 150 4.9 (0.5G)
6 Shocks
2
(15G)
directions)
IEC61131-2
7 Noise
Square wave
impulse noise
AC : 1,500 V
DC : 900 V
LSIS standard
Electrostatic
discharging
Voltage : 4 (contact discharging)
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 , 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast
Transient
/burst
noise
Class
Power
module
Digital/
Analog I/O
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2 1
8
Ambient
conditions
9
Operating
height
2000m or less
10
Pollution
degree
2 or less
10 - 3

Items Input performance specification
Analog
input
range
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
Set by external voltage/current wiring after being set at user program
or I/O parameter per each channel
Digital
output
Range
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20)
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
Max. resolution
1/4000 (DC 4~20: 1/3200)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
6.25 (DC 4~20)
Additional
function
Gain adjustment
function
10 - 4

Items Output performance specification
Analog
output
range
Range
DC 0 ~ 10V
(Load resistance: 2k or above)
DC 4 ~ 20
DC 0 ~ 20
(Load resistance: 450 )
Set at user program or I/O parameter per each channel per each
channel
Digital
input
Range
Unsigned
value
0 ~ 4000
Precise
value
0 ~ 1000 (DC 0 ~ 10V)
400 ~ 2000 (DC 4 ~ 20mA)
0 ~ 2000 (DC 0 ~ 20mA)
Percentile
value
0 ~ 1000
Max. resolution
1/4000 (DC 4 ~ 20: 1/3200)
2.5 (DC 0~10V)
5 (DC 0~20)
6.25 (DC 4~20)
Additional function
CH output status setting
(select among former, min, middle, max value)

(3) I/O Common performance specification
Items I/O common performance specification
Insulation method
Non-insulation betweens analog I/O channels
Non-insulation between I/O terminal and PLC main unit
I/O occupation point Fixed type: 64 points
Max. installation count
2(when using XBC-DxxxS/SU S type)
Weight 20g

Note1) In order to use analog I/O option board, the following version is needed.

XBC-DxxxE type V1.1
XBC-DxxxS type V1.1
XG5000 V.3.61

Note2) Offset/gain value on the analog output range can be adjusted at XG5000- I/O parameter
10 - 5

10.3 Name of Part and Function


Hook for fixation
Terminal block
Cover
Hook for fixation
Connector for
option board
Input
connector
35.0mm
49.0mm
10.3mm

Terminal block
(Analog Input/Output)

board
unit

10 - 6


The input ranges of voltage and current can be set up per channel with user program or I/O
parameters. The output types of digital data are defined as follows.
(1) Unsigned Value
(2) Signed Value
(3) Precise Value
10.4.1 Input characteristic
Data conversion characteristic per input range is as follows.

Digital
output
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
4047
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
2047
0
250
500
750
1000
1011
DC 4 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 10 V
4 mA 20 mA 12 mA
0 mA
0 V 5 V 10 V
Analog
input
Analog input practical
range
Offset
Gain
20 mA 10 mA
-48 -2048 -12

Digital
Output Range
3.81 4 8 12 16 20 20.18
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(400 ~ 2000)
381 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2018
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

10 - 7

Digital
Output Range
-0.24 0 5 10 15 20 20.23
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 2000)
-24 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2023
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

Digital
Output Range
-0.12 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 10.11
Unsigned Value
(0 ~ 4000)
-48 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4047
Signed Value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2048 -2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 2047
Precise Value
(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011
Percentile
Value(0 ~ 1000)
-12 0 250 500 750 1000 1011

10 - 8

10.4.2 Output characteristic
Data conversion characteristic per output range is as follows.

Digital
input
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
4047
-2000
-1000
0
1000
2000
2047
0
250
500
750
1000
1011
DC 4 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 20 mA
DC 0 ~ 10 V
4 mA 20 mA 12 mA
0 mA
0 V 5 V 10 V
Analog
output
Analog output practical
range
Offset
Gain
20 mA 10 mA

(1) DC 4~20mA range output
Digital input
range
4mA or
less
4 8 12 16 20
Over
20mA
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 or less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Over 4000
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 or
less
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 Over 2000
Precise value
(400 ~ 2000)
400 or less 400 800 1200 1600 2000 Over 2000
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000

(2) DC 0 ~ 20mA range output
Digital input
range
0mA or
less
0 5 10 15 20
Over
20mA
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 or less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Over 4000
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 or
less
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 Over 2000
Precise value
(400 ~ 2000)
0 or less 0 500 1000 1500 2000 Over 2000
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000

10 - 9

(3) DC 0 ~ 10V range output
Digital input
range
Analog output voltage (V)
0V or less 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 Over 10V
Unsigned value
(0 ~ 4000)
0 or less 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Over 4000
Signed value
(-2000 ~ 2000)
-2000 or
less
-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000 Over 2000
Precise value
(400 ~ 2000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000
Percentile value
(0 ~ 1000)
0 or less 0 250 500 750 1000 Over 1000

Note
Warning
(1) There is Dead Band area around voltage output (0V), current output (0mA).
(a) Digital input-based: about 0 ~ 10
(b) Analog output-based: voltage(about 0 ~ 25 ), current (about 0 ~ 50 )
(2) In Dead Band area, digital input and analog output may not coincide (within accuracy)

10 - 10

10.5 Accuracy

10.5.1 Input accuracy

Accuracy of digital output value does not changed even if input range is changed. Figure below shows
the range of the accuracy with analog input range of 0 ~ 10 V and digital output type of unsigned value
selected.
Accuracy of XBO-AH02A is 1.0%.

0
0V 5V
2000
10 V
4000
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

v
a
l
u
e
3980
4020
-20
20

[ Accuracy ]

4000 1.0% = 40
using 5V input.

4000 1.0% = 40
using 10V input.

10 - 11

10.5.2 Input accuracy

Accuracy for analog output value does not changed even if output range is changed. Figure below
shows the range of the accuracy with analog output range of 0 ~ 10 V and digital output type of
Accuracy of XBO-DA02A is 1.0%.

2000 4000 0
10V
0V
5V
10.1V
9.9V
0.1V
-0.1V
Digital input
A
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t
20mA
20.2mA
19.8mA
0mA
0.2mA
-0.2mA
10mA

4000 1.0% = 40
So in case of 5V output, accuracy range is (5V - 400.0025V) ~ (5V+400.0025V) = 4.9 ~ 5.1V

4000 1.0% = 40
So in case of 10V output, accuracy range is (10V-400.0025V) ~ (5V+400.0025V) = 9.9 ~
10.1V
10 - 12

10.6 Functions of Analog I/O Option Board

The functions of XBO-AH02A analog I/O option board are as follows.

Channel
Specify operation/stop of the channel which will perform A/D, D/A conversion
Specifying unused channels as Stop can shorten overall operation time.
I/O Voltage/current
range setting
Analog I/O option board provides 2 ranges(4~20mA, 0~20mA) of current I/O and 1
range ( 0~10V) of voltage I/O.
This option board provides 4 output data types (Unsigned, Signed, Precise, and
Percentile Values)
method
Sampling Process
- If A/D conversion method has not been specified, it processes sampling.
Averaging process
- Outputs A/D converted value averaged by count to reduce rapid change of input
value caused by external noise
D/A output status
setting
When switching form RUN to STOP, it sets output status of channel
Provides 4 types of output status (former, min, middle and max value)

In popular A/D conversion process, analog input signals are collected at constant time intervals and
A/D converted. The time elapsed for the analog signals to be converted into digital signals and

(Process Time) = (No. of Channels Used) x (Conversion Speed + Scan time)

(Ex.) Process time when using 1 of 2 I/O channels and scan time is 2;
1 x (1 + 2) = 3

The term sampling means taking sample value among continuous analog signal values at regular
intervals.

.

10 - 13

10.6.2 Count Averaging Function

The input values of the designated channel are accumulated for the preset cycles, and the average
value of the total sum is outputted in digital data.
Actual input value
Averaging
Section
Averaging
Section
Sampling
Section

Setting Range = 2 ~ 64000 [times]
For count averaging, averaging interval is calculated with the No. of channels used.

Averaging interval [ms] = Averaging count x (No. of channels used x1ms + Scan time)

Note
(1) Averaging interval varies according to scan time

10 - 14

10.6.3 Channel Output State Setting Function

It sets output against PLC stop and abnormal state

(1) Function
It is used to output an already set value when PLC system switches RUN to Stop

(2) Type
You can select one among former, min, middle and max value.
(a) Former value: keeps last normal output value
(b) Min. value: outputs minimum value of the each output range
(c) Middle value: outputs middle value of the each output range
(d) Max. value: outputs max. value of the each output range.

(3) Example
When output is 10mA and range of output channel is 4~20mA, if system switches Run to Stop,
it outputs as follows according to output state setting.

(a) Former value: keeps previous output, 10mA
(b) Min. value: outputs min. value of corresponding range, 4mA.
(c) Middle value: outputs middle value of corresponding range, 12mA
(d) Max. value: outputs max. value of corresponding range, 20mA.
10 - 15


You can adjust I/O gain of the analog I/O option board.

When selecting current input for analog input range, the digital output (4000) corresponding to analog
input max. value (20mA) is standard gain value. When selecting voltage input, the digital output
(4000) corresponding to analog input max. value (10V) is standard gain value.

(1) You can adjust input gain at I/O parameter

(2) I/O gain setting range = - 40 ~ 40


(4) Example
When you set Input gain as -5, 3996 (=4000-5) applies for gain.

Note
(1) When you adjust the I/O gain, max. resolution changes, too.

10 - 16

10.7 Wiring

(6) Enable only needed channels

10.7.2 Terminal block configuration

10 - 17

10.7.3 Analog input wiring example

(1) Current input wiring example

+
-
CH0
V0+
I0+
V0+
I0+
COM
R
R
R
*(b)
XBO-AH02A
*(a)
INPUT
OUTPUT

*(a) In case of current input, connect V+ terminal to I+ terminal
*(b) Input resistance of current input circuit is 250 (typ.).

(2) Voltage input wiring example

+
-
CH0
V0+
I0+
V0+
I0+
COM
R
R
R
XBO-AH02A
INPUT
OUTPUT
*(a)

*(a) Input resistance of voltage input circuit is 1 M (min.)

10 - 18

In voltage input, the wiring (cable) length between transmitter or sensor and option board has an
effect on digital-converted values of the option board as specified below;

Where,






( ) | | Ri Rc Rs
Vs Ri
Vin
+ +

=
2

100 1 %
|
.
|
\
|
=
Vs
Vin
Vi %

Vs
Rs
Rc
Rc
Ri
Load

Vin
10 - 19

10.7.4 Analog output wiring example

(1) Current output wiring example

V0+
I0+
V0+
I0+
COM
R
R
R
XBO-AH02A
INPUT
OUTPUT
510 or
less
Motor etc.

(2) Voltage output wiring example

INPUT
OUTPUT
2k or
above
Motor etc.
V0+
I0+
V0+
I0+
COM
R
R
R
XBO-AH02A

450 or
less
2 or
above
10 - 20


Analog I/O option boards operation parameters can be specified through XG5000s [I/O parameters].

(1) Settings
of analog option board. Setting items available through [I/O parameters] on the XG5000 project
window are as described below in the table.

Item Details
[I/O parameter] (a) Input parameter setting
Specify the following setting items necessary for the option board
operation.
4) Count averaging
5) Input gain
(b) Output parameter setting
Specify the following setting items necessary for the option board
operation.
1) Channel Enable/Disable
2) Analog output range (Voltage/current)
3) Input data type
4) Channel output type
5) Output gain

(c) If downloading is complete, Parameter set by user in XG5000 is saved
in Flash memory of XGB main unit.


10 - 21

(c) In the [I/O Parameter Setting] window, find out the slot of the base where the analog input
option board is installed, and click it.



10 - 22




Note
3) The test function of the [Special Module Monitor] enables testing analog input option board without

10 - 23

(a) With the XG5000 in connection (online) with the base unit of PLC, select [Monitor] ->
[Special Module Monitor]. The Select Special Module window shown below will appear
showing the type of the special modules and base/slot information. In the list dialog, the
modules present in the PLC system are displayed.



10 - 24

Detailed
information of
output CH0
Output monitoring
Input monitoring
Detailed
information of input
CH0


[Test] can be set up only when the operation status of the XGB base unit is STOP mode.

10 - 25

Max/Min value
monitoring
Max/Min value
reset


(g) Close

10 - 26


The variables for each module are automatically registered by referring to the information of the special
modules set up in the [I/O Parameter]. User can modify variables and descriptions.



(c) In the Edit menu, select Register U device

10 - 27

(d) Click Yes.



10 - 28


The figures below present examples of use in XGB compact E and S types



the same time.

10 - 29

(d) In the View' menu, click View Device/Comment to look up the devices and descriptions at
the same time.

10 - 30

(e) In the View' menu, click View Vriable/Comment to look up the devices and descriptions at the
same time.

10 - 31


An analog input option board has internal memory for data communication with XGB base unit.

Variable Type
Device
assignme
nt
Description
Read/
Write
Signal direction
Read Option CPU
_0x_AD0_ACT BIT U0x.01.0 Input CH0 Active
Read Option CPU
_0x_DA0_ACT BIT U0x.01.2 Output CH0 Active
_0X_AD0_IDD BIT U0x.01.4 Input CH0 Disconnection flag Read Option CPU
_0x_AD0_ERR BIT U0x.01.8 Input CH0 error
Read Option CPU
_0x_DA0_ERR BIT U0x.01.A Output CH0 error
_0x_AD0_DATA WORD U0x.04 Input CH0 converted value Read Option CPU
_0x_DA0_OUTEN BIT U0x.06.0 CH0 output status setting Write Option CPU
_0x_DA0_DATA WORD U0x.07 Output CH0 input value Write Option CPU

Note
U0x.00.0

Ex1) CH0 converted value of the module at slot 9 -> U09.04
Ex2) CH0 disconnection flag of the module at slot 9 -> U09.01.4

Bit no
Word no
Slot
10 - 32

(1) Module Ready/Error Flag (x: slot no.)
(a) U0x.00.F: at power on or reset of PLC CPU, turns on when the analog I/O conversion is
ready and analog conversion is performed.
(b) U0y.00.0: the flag indicating the error status of analog input option board module.

- - - - - - - - - - -
U0x.00

Error occurrence
information
Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): Normal
R
e
a
d
y
E
r
r
o
r
- - -

Module READY
Bit On (1): Normal
Bit Off (0): error

(2) Operation channel information/ channel error information flag (x: slot no.)
This is the area for storing the operation information and channel error information by channel.
- -
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
0
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0
- - - - - -
U0x.01

Operating CH
information
Bit Off (0): stop
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0
- -
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
0
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0

Bit On (1): error
Bit Off (0): normal

CH disconnection
Bit On (1): disconnection
Bit Off (0): normal
-
(3) Digital Output Values (x: slot no.)
(a) A/D converted digital values are outputted to buffer memory address U0x.04

(4) Output setting (x: slot number)
(b) If the output is not specified, output of all the channels will be disabled
-
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
0
- - - - - -
U0x.06

Output status setting
Bit On (1): enable output
Bit Off (0): disable output
- - - - - - - -
(5) Digital input
(a) Digital input value can be selected and used within the range of unsigned value (0~4047),
signed value (-2048~2047), precise value and percentile value (0~1011) based on input type.

10 - 33


Memory
Add.
0 Enable channel Bit Off (0): disable, Bit ON (1): enable R/W
PUT
GET
1 I/O range setting
Input range setting (4 bit per channels)
0: 4 ~ 20
1: 0 ~ 20
2: 0 ~ 10 V
R/W
2 I/O data type setting
(4 bit per channels)
0: 0 ~ 4000
1: -2000 ~ 2000
2: Precise value
3: 0 ~ 1000
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
R/W
3
average value setting
0 or 2 ~ 64000 [times] R/W
8 CH output state setting
CH output state setting (4bit per channel)
0: Former value
1: min value
2: middle value
3: max value
R/W
9
weighting
-40~40
R/W
11
Output channel 0 gain
weighting
R/W
100: input ch range setting error
200: input ch data type setting error
300: input ch average value setting error
400: input ch gain weighting setting error
500: output ch range setting error
600: output ch data type setting error
700: output ch output state setting error
800: output ch gain weighting setting error
900: output ch input value excess error
R GET

10 - 34

(a) You can set Enable/Disable of analog I/O option board per each channel
- -
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
H
0
I
n
p
u
t

C
H
0
- - - - - -
Address0

Enable CH
Bit On (1): enable
- - - - - -


10 - 35

(2) I/O range setting area (address 1)
(a) Set the type of I/O range with the following code

Bit (HEX) I/O range
0000 (0) 4 ~ 20
0001 (1) 0 ~ 20
0010 (2) 0 ~ 10 V

But, U0X.01.8~ U0X.01.A (Setup error flag) will be ON.
Input CH 0
Address1

I/O range (4bit per channel)
0 : 4 ~ 20
1 : 0 ~ 20
2 : 0 ~ 10 V
Output CH 1 - - - - - - - -

(e)This area is same as setting in Input range of I/O parameter

10 - 36

(3) I/O data type setting area (address 2)
(a) Set the type of I/O data type with the following code
Bit (HEX) Output data type
0000 (0) 0~4000
0001 (1) -2000~2000
0011 (3) 0~1000

In case of precise value, I/O data type is designated as the following value according to each I/O
range type

I/O range Precise value
4 ~ 20 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V 0 ~ 1000

But, U0X.01.8~ U0X.01.A (Setup error flag) will be ON.

Input CH 0
Address2

I/O data type (4bit per channel)
0 : 0 ~ 4000
1 : -2000 ~ 2000
2 : precise value
3 : 0 ~ 1000
Output CH 0
4 ~ 20 : 400 ~ 2000
0 ~ 20 : 0 ~ 2000
0 ~ 10 V: 0 ~ 1000
- - - - - - - -

(e)This area is same as setting in Output type of I/O parameter

10 - 37

(4) Count average value setting area (address 3)
(a) Set count average value with 0 or value of 2~6400
(b) If you set the count average value as 0, corresponding channel will not perform averaging
process and output sampled analog input value
(c) If you set 1 or more than 64001, 0 (Disable averaging) will be set forcibly.
But, U0X.01.8 (Setup error flag) will be ON.

Input CH0 count average value (0 or 2 ~ 64000 [times]) Address3

(e) This area is same as setting in Count-Avr of I/O parameter

10 - 38

(5) Channel output state setting area (address 8)
(a) Set the output state setting with the following code

Bit (Hex) Channel output state
0000 (0) Former value
0001 (1) Min value
0010 (2) Middle value
0011 (3) Max value

(b) If you set more than 4, 0 (former value) will be set forcibly.
But, U0X.01.A (Setup error flag) will be ON.
Output CH 0
Address8
Output CH state setting( 4 bit)
0 : Former value
1 : min value
2 : middle value
3 : max value
- - - - - - - -

- - - -

(e)This area is same as setting in CH. Output type of I/O parameter

10 - 39

(6) I/O gain weighting setting area (address 9~11)
(a) Set input gain weighting with value of -40~40
(b) If you set this as 0 (default value),
4000 will apply for input gain value
4000 will apply for output gain value


(e) This area is same as setting in I/O gain of I/O parameter

10 - 40

(c) When U0X.01.8~ U0X.01.A (setting error flat) is on, check that area and fix the corresponding


Type
Error
code
Input
error
100 Input CH range setting error 2

200 Input CH data type setting error 3
300 Input CH count average value setting error 4
400 Input CH gain weighting setting error 5
Output
error
500 Output CH range setting error 6
600 Output CH data type setting error 7
700 Output CH state setting error 8
800 Output CH gain weighting setting error 9
900 Output CH input value excess error 1


10 - 41


(1) This sample program sets up operating parameters of analog input option board.
(3) The sample program below controls the I/O data of the analog I/O option board at option slot #0
(I/O slot #9) and check open wire.



(b) Output Channel 0 is set to operating channel and output range is set to 4~20mA.

10 - 42

`

(2) Sample Program

set.

(3) Sample Program

U09.01.A (Input Channel 0 Error) = Off
(b) When M0000 is ON, it turns on CH0 output state (U09.06.0) and allows output
(c) When M0000 is ON, D00100 data is moved to output CH0 input value (U09.07) and outputs.
10 - 43


I/O option board, and their solutions.



Installation is OK.
No
Yes
FG ground is OK
in the user manual
No
Yes
Wiring is OK
(Current input wiring, voltage input
wiring)
Yes
setting
the user manual
No
Yes

10 - 44

(2) Analog output value is abnormal.

Analog output value is abnormal.
Installation is OK.
No
Yes
FG ground is OK
in the user manual
No
Yes
Wiring is OK
(Current output wiring, voltage output
wiring)
Yes
setting
the user manual
No
Yes

Chapter 11 RTD Input Option Board
11 - 1



Before using the RTD input option board, follow steps below.

XBO-RD01A

Wiring
Reading temperature data
Setting parameter
Programming
Specification
z Operating environment
z Digital input range
z Installation count
Wiring
z RTD input wiring
RTD input test
z XG5000 special module
monitor test mode
Parameter
z XG5000 I/O parameter
Programming
z Program for writing digital data
(U device)
If there is error or RTD input value is
abnormal, refer to the trouble shooting
11 - 2

11.2 Specification

11.2.1 General Specifications

Here describes general specifications of RTD input option board.
2 Storage Temp. 25 ~ +70 C
-
10 f < 57Hz 0.075mm
57 f 150Hz 9.8m/s
2
(1G)
10 f < 57Hz 0.035mm
5 Vibration
57 f 150Hz 4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
10 times
each
direction
(X,Y and Z)
6 Shocks
Peak acceleration : 147 m/s
2
(15G)
Duration : 11ms
IEC61131-2
Square wave
impulse noise
Electrostatic
discharge
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Classifi-
cation
Power
supply
7 Impulse noise
Fast transient
/Burst noise
Voltage 2kV 1kV
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
8
Operation
ambience
-
11 - 3


Here describes general specifications of RTD input option board.
XBO-RD01A
No. of input channels One channel
PT100 JIS C1604-1997
Input sensor
type
JPT100 JIS C1604-1981 , KS C1603-1991
PT100 -200 ~ 600
Temperature
input range
JPT100 -200 ~ 600
PT100 -2000 ~ 6000
Digital output
JPT100 -2000 ~ 6000
Accuracy Within 1.0%
Conversion speed 25ms/1Ch note1)
Channel to
Channel
Non-insulation
Insulation
Terminal to PLC
Power
Wiring method 3-wire type
Averaging Count averaging function
Function
Current
consumption
Inner DC5V 30
Weight 20g

Note1) Conversion speed can be delayed because of scan delay per channel by XGB main unit

11 - 4

11.3 Part Names and Functions

Here describes part names and functions.

Terminal block
(Analog input)

board
unit

11 - 5

11.4 Temperature Conversion Characteristic

Since RTD sensor has non-linear characteristic, RTD input module executes linearization per each
section.
The graph below is an example to describe the linearization process and is different with graph about
actual sensor temperature input.

(1) PT100: JIS1604-1997

(2) JPT100: JIS C1604-1981, KS C1603-1991

Non-linear characteristics: The resistance-temperature characteristics for RTD sensor are presented
with table (JIS C1604-1997). This characteristics table displays resistance value of the sensor to
temperature, namely, the change of the resistance value per increment of 1. When the
temperature is changed by 1, the change of resistance is not in constant width but in different
width per section, which is called the non-linear characteristics.
600.0
0.0
-200.0
18.52
Resistance ()
Temperature ()
100
313.71
Real Sensor characteristics
0.0
-
17.14
Resistance ()
Temperature ()
100
317.28
Real sensor characteristics
600.0
Remark
11 - 6

11.5 Conversion Speed

The conversion speed of RTD input option board is less than 25ms + 3 x scan time.
The conversion speed includes the time to convert input temperature (resistance value) to digital
value and to save the converted digital data into the internal memory.

Processing time = less than 25ms + 3 x scan time

11.6 Accuracy

The accuracy of RTD module is described below.
When the ambient temperature is 0 to 55: within 1.0% of available input range

Example) PT100 is used and the ambient temperature is normal.
To measure 100, the conversion data output range:
100 - [ { 600 - (-200) } x 1.0 % ] ~ 100 + [ { 600 - (-200) } x 1.0 % ]
Namely, 92.0 ~ 108.0 []

11.7 Temperature Display

(1) The input temperature is converted to digital value down to the one decimal place.

Ex.) If the detected temperature is 123.4, its converted value to be saved to the internal
memory will be 1234.

(2) Temperature can be converted to Celsius or Fahrenheit scale temperature value as desired.

Ex) If Pt100 sensor is used, the temperature of 100.0 can be converted to 2120 when
Fahrenheit scale is used.
Conversion to , 32
5
9
+ = C F
Conversion to , ( ) 32
9
5
= F C
(3) Maximum temperature input range is higher/lower within 10 than regular temperature input
range. However, the precision will not be guaranteed for any temperature out of regular
temperature input range.

Maximum temperature input ranges of sensor are as follows;
PT100 : -210.0 ~ 610.0
JPT100 : -210.0 ~ 610.0

11 - 7

11.8 Disconnection Detection Function

(1) As a module used to measure the temperature with the RTD temperature sensor directly
connected, it detects and displays disconnection of the sensor connected. If any disconnection
occurs in the sensor used and extended lead wire, it will turn on the disconnection diction bit

(2) The figure below shows the temperature sensors appearance of the 3-wired RTD.
(The appearance depends on sensor type)

* A disconnection: if disconnected between terminal A and module terminal block in the sensor
figure.
* B disconnection: if disconnected between terminal B (two for 3-wired sensor) and module
terminal block in the sensor figure, or if A and B lines are all disconnected.

(3) The basic connection between RTD module and RTD Sensor is based on 3-wired RTD sensor.
If 2-wired or 4-wired sensor is used, the connection between the sensor and the module shall be
kept as 3-wired. Disconnection will be detected on the basis of 3-wired wiring.

(4) In case of disconnection, operation of disconnection flag is as follows.

Connection status Channel status Disconnection flag
Run Off
Normal
Stop Off
Run On
Disconnection
Stop

Off
Run

On
Any sensor is not
connected
Stop Off

A terminal
B terminal
B
b
A
Module terminal block
11 - 8

11.9 Wiring

- 3 types of sensor-connecting methods are available (2, 3 and 4-wired).
- The standard wiring method for XBO-RD1A module is 3-wired wiring.
- Use an identical type of wire (thickness, length, etc.) for each 3 wire when extended lead wire is
used.
- The resistance of each conductor is to be less than 10. (If larger than this, it will cause an error.)
- Resistance difference of each conductor is to be less than 1. (If larger than this, it will cause an
error.)
- Length of wire is to be as short as possible and it is recommended to connect the wire directly to the
terminal block of module without connection terminal unit. If a connection terminal is to be used,
compensating wire shall be connected as shown below.



the module.
*2 Let the terminals B and b short on the terminal
block of the module if 2-wired sensor is to be
connected.
B
FG
b
A

*1
*2
Terminal block
NC
NC
*1
the module.
B
FG
b
A

Terminal block
NC
NC

11 - 9


1* If sensor and compensating wire are
shielded, shield line can be connected to FG
terminal of the module.
B
FG
b
A

*1
Terminal block
NC
NC
11 - 10

11.10 Average Function

It accumulates temperature conversion values of a selected channel as many as average value and
displays the average of the total sum in digital data

- Setting range = 2 ~ 64000 [times]

- Averaging interval is calculated according to the number of channel used

- Averaging interval[ms] = Averaging count x (25ms + 3*scan time)

Remark
(1) Averaging interval varies according to change of scan time.

11 - 11


Operation parameters of RTD input option board can be specified through [I/O parameters] of XG5000.

11.11.1 Setting items

of RTD module. Setting items available through [I/O parameters] of the XG5000 project window are
described below.
Item Details
[I/O Parameter]
(1) Specify the following setting items necessary for the module operation.
- Channel Run/Stop
- Sensor type
- Temp. unit
- Count average
(2) The data specified by user through S/W package will be saved on the
flash memory of basic unit when [I/O Parameters] are downloaded.

11.11.2 How to use [I/O Parameter]

(1) Run XG5000 to create a project. (Refer to XG5000 programming manual for details on how to
create the project)

(2) Double-click [I/O Parameter] on the project window.

(3) On the I/O parameters setting screen, find and click the slot of the base where RTD option board
is installed on.

11 - 12

(4) Click the arrow button on the screen to display the screen where an applicable option board can be
selected. Search for the applicable option board to select.

(5) After the option board selected, click [Details] or double-click relevant slot.

(6) A screen will be displayed to specify parameters for respective channels as shown below. Click a
desired item to display parameters to set for respective items.

(7) The initial values of respective items are as follows.
(a) Channel status setting screen

11 - 13

(b) Input sensor type setting screen

(c) Temp. unit setting screen

(d) Count average setting screen

(8) If necessary setting is complete, press OK.

11 - 14

11.12 Special Module Monitoring

Run Special Module Monitoring by selecting [Online] -> [Connect] and [Monitor] -> [Special Module
Monitoring]. If the status is not [On-Line], [Special Module Monitoring] menu will not be activated.

Remark



11 - 15

(a) [Special Module List] window will show base/slot information and types of special module by
click [Monitor] [Special Module Monitoring].In this list box, the modules that are now
installed in PLC system will be displayed.

(b) Select a special module then click [Module Info.] button to display the information as
described below.

(c) Select a special module then click [Start Monitoring] button to display the information as
described below.
11 - 16

(d) [Start Monitoring]: [Start Monitoring] button will show you digital input data of the operating


(e) [Test]: [Test] is used to change the parameters of the RTD input module. You can change the
XGB CPU units status is in [Stop].


more.

Remark
Monitoring screen
Detail of channel 0
11 - 17


(1) Procedure
(a) Select the special module in the [I/O Parameter Setting] window.

(b) Double click Variable/Comment from the project window. .


11.13 Register U devices (Special module variable)
11 - 18

(d) Click Yes.


(2) Save variables

(3) View variables
Example in the XGB compact E type and S type are as follows.



11 - 19



11 - 20


Here describes configuration and function of internal memory.

Data I/O area of RTD input option board is as shown below.
Variable Type Device Description Read/Write Signal direction
_0x_ERR Bit U0x.00.0 Module error Read
_0x_RDY Bit U0x.00.F Module Ready Read
Option CPU
_0x_CH0_ACT Bit U0x.01.0 CH 0 running Read Option CPU
_0x_CH0_BOUT Bit U0x.01.4 CH 0 disconnection Read Option CPU
_0x_CH0_TEMP Word U0x.04
CH 0 temp
.conversion value
Read Option CPU
In the device assigned, x stands for the slot no. on which module is installed.

(1) Module ready/error flag (x: slot number)
(a) U0x.00.F: It will be ON when PLC CPU is powered or reset with A/D conversion ready to
process A/D conversion.
(b) U0x.00.0: It is a flag to display the error status of A/D conversion option board.

(2) Channel run, stop information / channel disconnection information flag (x: slot number)
(a) It displays which channel is being used.

R
e
a
d
y

E
r
r
o
r


C
H
0

C
H
0
U0x.01
Bit On (1): Run
Bit Off (0): Stop
Disconnection information (bit)
Bit On (1): Disconnection
Bit Off (0): Normal
Error status
Bit On (1): error,
Bit Off (0): normal
U0x.00
Module READY
Bit On (1): normal,
Bit Off (0): error
11 - 21

(3) Temperature value
It displays current temperature value. Its form is temperature value 10.

CH0 temperature conversion value U0x.04
11 - 22

Operation parameter setting areas of RTD input option board are as follows.
Memory
address
Contents Setting value R/W Instruction
0
Channel
enable/disable
setting
CH status setting
0: Stop
1: Run
R/W
1 sensor type setting
Input range setting
0: PT100
1: JPT100
R/W
5
Temperature display
unit setting
Data type setting
0: Celsius
1: Fahrenheit
R/W
PUT
GET
6
disconnection
information
0: Normal
1: Disconnection
R GET
14
Count average
value
0 or 2~64,000 R/W
PUT
GET
100: sensor type setting error
300: count average value setting error
R GET

(1) Run channel setting (address 0)
(a) You can enable/disable the RTD input option board
(b) If Run channel is not specified, all channels will be stop status.
(c) When using Put instruction, Channel Status address is as follows

(d) Vales set in B1 ~ B15 are ignored.
(e) This area shows the same results with Channel status in I/O parameter setting window.

C
H
0
Bit On (1): Run,
Bit Off (0): Stop
Address 0
11 - 23

(2) Sensor type setting (address 1)
(a) Sets sensor type with the following code.

Word Sensor type
0 PT100
1 JPT100

(b) When input value is larger than 2, 0 (PT100 type) is selected by force.
(c) In case of using PUT instruction, Sensor Type Setting Area is as follows.

(3) Setting temperature display unit (address 5)
(a) Sets temp. display unit with the following code.
Bit Temp. display unit
0 Celsius
1 Fahrenheit

(b) When input value is larger than 2, 0 (Celsius) is selected by force.
(c) In case of using PUT instruction, Output Data Type Area is as follows.

(4) Disconnection information (address 6)
(a) Displays disconnection information of channel.
(b) In case of using GET instruction, Disconnection Information address is as follows.

bit15 bit14 Bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 Bit0

C
H
0
CH0 disconnection information (0: normal, 1: disconnection)
Address 5
Address 1
Sensor type setting
0: PT100
1: JPT100
Temp. unit setting
Bit Off(0): Celsius
Bit On(1): Fahrenheit
Address 6
11 - 24

(5) Count average value setting (address 14)
(a) Count average value should be 0 or 2~64000.
(b) If count average value is set as 0, averaging process is not applied and sampling-processed
temperature value is outputted.
(c) When count average value is larger than 64001, 0 (Averaging disabled) is selected by force
(d) In case of using PUT instruction, Count Average Value Setting address is as follows.

(6) Error information (address 15)
(a) Saves error code detected at setup (in case of setup by the program)
(b) Setting error is canceled when invalid setting is corrected by resetting
(c) In case of GET instruction, setting error information address is as follows.

Type
Error
code
100 Input sensor type setting error 1
Setup
error
300
Input count average value rage
setting error
2
-
CH0 count average setting: 0 or 2~64,000
CH0 setup error information
Address 14
Address 15
11 - 25


- Here describes how to specify the operation condition of RTD input option board.
- RTD input option board is installed on slot 9.
- Initial setting value is saved in internal memory of module with one input.
- The following program is an example to read temperature value and disconnection information.

(1) Program example using [I/O Parameter Setting]

D0 area
information to M0
11 - 26

(2) Program example using PUT/GET command

CH Enable
Sensor type (PT100)
Temperature unit (Celsius)
Count average value setting
Moving channel 0 temp.
value to D0
information to M0
11 - 27


Describes troubleshooting about the problem that occurs during using RTD input option board

4. 16.1 Troubleshooting
(1) Temperature conversion value is not normal.
Temperature conversion value is not
normal
Installation is correct
Install the option board correctly.
No
Yes
FG ground is normal
manual
No
Yes
Wiring is normal
Wire properly referring to user manual No
Yes
(Channel status, sensor type setting)
Set parameter properly referring to user
manual.
No
Yes
Contact the nearest agency or LS
branch office.

4.16.2 Stats check of RTD input option board through XG5000 system monitor

Module type, module information, O/S version and module status of RTD input module can be


(d) Module status: shows the present error code.
Chapter 12 Thermocouple Input Option Module

12 - 1


12.1 Setting sequence before operation

Setting sequence before operation

Before using the thermocouple input module, follow steps below.

XBO-TC02A

Wiring
Reading temp. data
Setting parameter
Programming
Specification
- Operating environment
- Thermocouple sensor type and temperature range
- Digital output range
- Equip-able number
- External power selection
Wiring
- Power wiring
- Thermocouple input wiring
Thermocouple input test
- XG5000 special module monitor
test mode
Parameter
- XG5000 I/O parameter
Programming
- Program to read analog data
(U device)
If there is error or thermocouple input
data is abnormal, refer to the trouble
shooting.

12 - 2

12.2 Specification

12.2.1 General specification

General specifications of thermocouple input option module are as follows.

Related
standards
1
Operating
temp.
0 ~ 55 C
2
Storage
temp.
25 ~ +70 C
3
Operating
humidity
4
Storage
humidity
10 f < 57Hz 0.075mm
57 f
150Hz
9.8m/s
2
(1G)
10 f < 57Hz 0.035mm
5 Vibration
57 f
150Hz
4.9m/s
2
(0.5G)
Each 10
times in
X,Y,Z
directions
IEC61131-2
6 Shocks
2
(15G)
directions)
IEC61131-2
Square wave
impulse noise
Electrostatic
discharging
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m
IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Class
Power
module
Digital/
Analog I/O
7 Noise
Fast
Transient
/burst
noise Voltage 2kV 1kV
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
8
Ambient
conditions
9
Operating
height
2000m or less
10
Pollution
degree
2 or less

12 - 3


Performance specifications are as follows

Items Specification
Thermocouple K / J type
(JIS C1602-1995)
K type sensor -200.0 ~ 1300.0 Range of input
temperature J type sensor -200.0 ~ 1200.0
Digital output Temp. display unit
16 bit binary data
(K, J, type: 0.1)
Conversion speed 50ms/2chanelles note1)
Auto compensation by RJC sensing (Thermistor) Reference
junction
compensation
Average process Count averaging Additional
function Alarm Input disconnection detection
Warming-up time 15 min or above note2)
Insulation method
Non-insulation between input channels
Non-insulation between input terminal and PLC
main unit
Supply power Internal 5V
I/O occupied points Fixed type: 64 points
Weight 20g

Note1) Conversion speed can be delayed because of scan delay per channel by XGB main unit
Note2) Warming-up time: for stability of measured temperature, 15 min is necessary after power is on.

12 - 4

12.3 Name and Function of Each Part

Describes name and function of each part

Terminal block
(Analog input)

board
unit


12 - 5

12.4 Characteristic of Thermocouple Temperature Conversion

Thermocouple input module connect 2 kinds of thermocouple directly, input characteristic are as
described below.
(1) Thermocouple K (JIS C1602-1995): -200 (-5891 ) ~ 1300 (52410 )

(2) Thermocouple J (JIS C1602-1995): -200 (-7890 ) ~ 1200 (69553 )

Thermocouple characteristics: thermocouple sensor measures temperature by using fine voltage
(electromotive force), which occurs when applying temperature gradient to a junction between two
different metals.
The temperature-electromotive force relation specification of normal thermocouple sensor provides
the electromotive force, which is measured when a sensors measuring point is at O. On that
account, when measuring temperature by using thermocouple sensor, cold junction compensation
(reference junction compensation, RJC) is used. (built-in function of temperature measuring module).

Remark
Temperature
Temperature
E
l
e
c
t
r
o
m
o
t
i
v
e

f
o
r
c
e
E
l
e
c
t
r
o
m
o
t
i
v
e

f
o
r
c
e

12 - 6

12.5 Accuracy

Accuracy / Resolution are as follows according to ambient temperature

Accuracy - note1)
Thermocouple
type
Measurement
temperature
range
Indication temperature
range
Normal
temperature
(25)
Operating
temperature -
note2)
(0 ~ 55)
Resolution
-200.0 ~ 0.0 0.2
K
-200.0 ~
1300.0 0.0 ~ 1300.0
16.0
0.1
-200.0 ~ -100.0 0.2
J
-200.0 ~
1200.0 -100.0 ~ 1200.0
15.0
0.1

Note1) Total accuracy (normal temp.) = accuracy (normal temp.) + cold junction compensation accuracy
= (full scale X 0.2% + 1.0)
Cold junction compensation accuracy = 1.0
Note2) Temp. coefficient: 100 ppm/

(1) When ambient temp. is normal (25 5): within the 1% of entire measurement temp. range
(2) When ambient temp. is operating temp. (0 ~ 55): within the 1% of measurement temp. range

Ex.) When K type thermocouple is used and ambient temperature is normal.
In case of measuring 1000 temperature, output range of conversion data is
1000 - [{1300 - (-200)} x 1 %] - 1 ~ 1000 + [{1300 - (-200)} x 1%] + 1
namely, 984.0 ~ 1016.0 [] .

(1) For stabilization of measurement temperature, warming-up time more than 15 min. is necessary, after
restart.
(2) If ambient temperature changes rapidly, measurement temperature may change temporally. Keep the
ambient temperature steady for stabilization of measuring temperature.
(3) If wind of the cooling pan contacts with module directly in the panel, accuracy decreases. Do not
contact with wind directly.
Note

12 - 7

12.6 Conversion speed

(1) Conversion speed: 50ms/2Ch

(2) Sequential process method
The next channel is converted after conversion of one channel is completed.
(Run/Stop of the respective channels can be set independently.)

(3) Concept of conversion time
The time taken to convert the temperature from terminal block to digital value and save it at
internal memory

Processing time = less than 50ms + 6 x scan time

Example) PLC average scan time: 1 ms
When using all channels: conversion time = 50ms+6 X1ms = 56 ms

SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 SCAN4 SCAN5 SCAN6
CH1
CH0
RJC
SCAN
()
: Scan Time
SCAN
START
SCAN
END
: Register Setting Time
: A/D Conversion Time
50ms + 6 scan

12 - 8

12.7 Function

12.7.1 Disconnection detection function

Thermocouple input module has a function that detects the disconnection and displays it.
That the module detects and displays disconnection means that the following cabling path would have
partially bad connection, which requires taking measures

(1) If disconnection occurs between thermocouple or compensating cable and module, it generates
error code.

(2) Disconnection can be detected by channels. However, it is available for the only channel(s)
designated for operation.

Thermocouple connection
status
Channel run Disconnection flag
Run Off
Normal
Stop Off
Run On
Thermocouple
disconnection
Stop Off

(3) In case disconnection occurs, disconnection flag of each channel will be turned on and in case
disconnection is canceled, it will be turned off.

Disconnection flag Contents

(4) When disconnection occurs, the min value among indication temperatures is displayed

Type
Displayed temperature in case of
disconnection
K type -250.0
J type -210.0


12 - 9

12.7.2 Average function

(1) Count average
It accumulates temperature conversion values of a selected channel as many as average value
and displays the average of the total sum in digital data

- Setting range = 2 ~ 64000 [times]

- Averaging interval is calculated according to the number of channel used

- Averaging interval[ms] = Averaging count x (50ms + 6 scan time)

Remark
(1) Averaging interval varies according to change of scan time.


12 - 10

12.8 Installation and Wiring

Installation environment

Attention should be paid to the followings in order to secure the reliance and stability of the system.

(1) Environmental Conditions
(a) Install on a water-proof and dust-proof control board.
(b) Place free of continuous impact or vibration.
(c) Place not directly exposed to direct sunrays.
(d) Place where dew does not form due to rapid temperature change.
(e) Place where ambient temperature is maintained between 0 - 55.

(2) Installation Construction
(a) In case of screw hole processing or wiring construction, wiring dregs should not go into PLC.
(b) Install on a position easy to access.
(c) Should not install on the same panel which high voltage device is installed on.
(d) It should be 50mm and longer distant from duct and modules.
(e) Should ground in the environment where is not interrupted from noise.
(f) Install not to contact with cooling pan in the panel

(3) Cautions in handling
It describes caution in handling from unpacking module to installation.
(a) Do not fall or apply excessive impact on it.
(b) Never attempt to separate PCB from the case.
(c) Make sure that any impurities including wiring dregs should not go into the upper part of
module during wiring work.

Wiring

(1) Cautions in wiring
(a) Do not place AC power line close to the AUX signal line of the module. To avoid surge or
induced noise occurring from AC, make sure to leave a proper space.
(b) Cable should be selected by considering ambient temperature and allowable current and the
specification of cable should be as follows.

Cable specification
Lower limit Upper limit
0.18mm
2
(AWG24) 1.5 mm
2
(AWG16)

(c) If cable is placed too close to any heating device or materials or if it directly contacts oil and
similar materials for a long time, it may cause short-circuit, resulting in breakdown and
malfunction.
(d) Check the polarities during terminal strip wiring
(e) Wiring with high voltage cable or power line may cause induction problem, causing malfunction
or trouble.
(f) External DC24V power should be same with power of XGB. If external DC24 V power of
thermocouple input module is turned on/off while power of XGB main unit is on, temperature
input value may have an error.
(g) Thermocouple input module may use 4 types of thermocouple sensors. (K / J / T / R)

12 - 11

(2) Terminal array
Terminal array of thermocouple input module is as follows.

(3) Wiring example
Thermocouple can be connected with module directly. If point where temperature is measured is
far from the module, use the compensating cable to connect
(The compensating cables are different according to thermocouple type. For more information
about the compensating cable, contact the producer of thermocouple.)

1) In case sensor and compensating cable are shielded, shield connection is possible to PLC FG terminal.
2) It is necessary to use extension terminal block of which material is kept at uniform temperature in order
to reduce error.
3) Compensating cable should use the same type of sensor, which was used for measuring.

Signal
name
Purpose
CH0 +
CH0 -
CH1 +
CH1 -
NC Not used

12 - 12

12.9 Operation Setting and Monitor

Operation Parameter Setting

Operation parameter of thermocouple input module can be set through [I/O Parameter] of XG5000

(1) Setting items
For user convenience, parameter setting of thermocouple input module is provided by GUI
(Graphical User Interface) method in the XG5000. The items which can be set through [I/O
Parameter] in the project window are as follows.

Items Contents
[I/O Parameter]
(a) Sets the following items for operation of module.
2) Sensor type (K / J)
3) Filter setup (Filter constant)
4) Averaging process (Count averaging)
(b) The parameter set by the user is saved in the flash memory of XGB main
unit after download.

(2) How to use [I/O Parameter]

(a) Execute the XG5000 and make the project.
(For how to make the project, refer to the XG5000 user manual)

(b) Double-click [I/O Parameter] on the project window.


12 - 13

(c) If [I/O Parameter Setting] window shows, find slot of base where module is installed and click it

(d) Register the module on a slot where module is installed on as follows.

(e) Select a module and click [Details] or double-click a module for parameter setup.


12 - 14

(f) Parameter setup screen appears as follows. If you click the item you want to set, settable
parameter will be displayed.

(g) The initial values of each item are as figure shown below


2) Sensor type (K / J)


12 - 15

3) Temp. unit (Celsius / Fahrenheit)

4) Average processing (Count averaging)

5) If you input invalid number, error message will be displayed.
(When average value is out o range)


12 - 16

Special module monitoring function

While XG5000 is connected with PLC, through [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring], the user can
test the operation of the module.

Remark
1) If system resource is short, the screen may not be displayed properly. In case of this, shut down
other application program and restart the XG5000.
2) On the [Special Module Monitoring] status, I/O parameter is set temporarily to execute the test. So
if [Special Module Monitoring] status ends, I/O parameter is not saved.
3) By test function of [Special Module Monitoring], the user can check if analog module operates
properly or not without any sequence program.

(1) How to use special module monitoring

(a) Start of [Special Module Monitoring]
While XG5000 is connected with PLC, start [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring]. If that is
not online status, [Special Module Monitoring] is not activated.


12 - 17

(b) How to use [Special Module Monitoring]
1) Click [Monitor] -> [Special Module Monitoring] while XG5000 is connected with PLC basic
unit. Special Module List screen is displayed as shown below and displays information of
base/slot with special module type. On the list dialog box, the modules currently equipped
at the PLC are displayed.

2) Clicking [Module Info.] shows the information of special module

3) Clicking [Monitor] shows the following screen


12 - 18

4) [Start Monitoring]: [Start Monitoring] button will show you digital input data of the operating


5) [Test]: [Test] is used to change the parameters of the Thermocouple input module. You can
change the parameters when you click the values at the bottom of the screen. It is only
available when XGB CPU units status is in [Stop].


12 - 19

Register U devices (Special module variable)

It registers the variables for each module referring to the special module information that is set in the

(1) Procedure



12 - 20

In case of XEC, select [Edit] - [Register special module variable]


12 - 21

(d) If you click yes, U device will be registered automatically. At this time, if there is U device
comment inputted previously, the previous comment will be removed.


(2) Save variables
(c) The contents of View variable are saved as a text


12 - 22

(3) View variables
(a) The example program of XG5000 is as shown below


(c) Select [View] -> [Devices/Variables]. Devices and variables are both displayed


12 - 23



12 - 24


It describes the configuration and function of internal memory

Data I/O area (U device)

(1) Data sent from module to XGB main unit (XGB PLC input area, read only
Device
assignment
Signal
direction
U0x.00.E BIT Module H/W error
On: error
Off: normal
R
U0x.00.F BIT Module Ready
On: ready
Off: not ready
R

U0x.01.1 BIT CH 1 running
Channel running
On: run, Off: stop
R
U0x.01.5 BIT CH 1 disconnection
Thermocouple sensor
On: disconnection, Off:
normal
R
TC02ACPU
U0x.05 WORD CH 1 temp. conversion value
Temp. conversion value
(Measured temp.10)
R
TC02ACPU
Ex) U0A.04: 10
th
slot CH0 temp. conversion value (word)

12 - 25

How to set operation parameter

Operation parameter of thermocouple input module can be set by two methods.

(1) Setting operation parameters through [I/O parameter setting] window.


12 - 26

(2) Writing operation parameters through program (PUT instruction is used.)

Remark
How to use PUT instruction
COMMAND
PUT
PUT
COMMAND
P sl PUTP
sl S2 N S1
S2 N S1

[Area setting]
Operand Description Data size
sl Slot no. where special module is mounted WORD
S1 Internal memory address of special module WORD
S2 Device to save in special module WORD
N The number of data WORD

indicates PUT instruction.

12 - 27

Operation parameter setting area

It describes operation parameter setting area of thermocouple input module.

Memory
address
Hex. Dec.
00
H
0
Designate a channel to
use
bit0: bit3, 0: stop, 1: run R/W
01
H
1
02
H
2
K:0, J:1 R/W
05
H
5
Designate temperature
metric system
bit0: bit3, 0: Celsius, 1:
Fahrenheit
R/W
0E
H
0F
H
Count average: 2~64000 times R/W
PUT
GET
10
H
10#: sensor type setting error
20#: count average value
setting error
R GET
11
H
17
Cold junction
compensation temp.
Measured value of cold junction
compensation temp.
R GET
12
H
~18
H

18
~24
System area
(Offset gain storage area)
Read/Write unavailable unavailable -

Remark
Warning (1) System area (Offset gain storage area) is area where Read/Write is unavailable.
If this area changes, malfunction or breakdown may occur.


12 - 28

(1) Designating Channel (Address 0)
(a) Temperature conversion module Enable/Disable can be set to each channel.
(b) By prohibiting a channel not to use from conversion, conversion interval by channels can be
shortened.
(c) If channel to use is not designated, every channel can not be used.
(d) In case of using PUT instruction, temperature conversion module Enable/Disable are as
follows.

- - CH1 CH0 - - - - - -
Channel status
Bit On (1): Enable
Bit Off (0): Disable
- - - - - -

Bit Description
0 Stop
1 Run

(e) Vales set in B4 ~ B15 are ignored.
(f) This area shows the same results with Channel status in I/O parameter setting window.

(2) Sensor type setting area (Address 1~2)
(a) Sets sensor type with the following code.

Word Sensor type
0 K
1 J

(b) When input value is larger than 2, 0 (K type) is selected by force
(c) In case of using PUT instruction, Sensor Type Setting Area is as follows.

B15 B14 B13 B12 Bt11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Address 1
Address 2

(d) Vales set in B8 ~ B15 are ignored.
(e) This area shows the same results with sensor type designation in I/O parameter setting
window.

12 - 29

(3) Temp. unit setting area (Address 5)
(a) Temp. unit (Celsius/ Fahrenheit) of thermocouple input module can be set per channel.
(b) In case of PUT instruction, Temp. unit setting area is as follows.

Address 5

C
H
1
C
H
0

Bit Description
0 Celsius
1 Fahrenheit

(c) Vales set in B2 ~ B15 are ignored.
(d) This area shows the same results with temp. unit setting in I/O parameter setting window.

(4) Average value setting area (Address 14~15)
(a) Average value can be set per channel.
(b) If count average value is set as 0, averaging process is not applied and sampling-processed
thermocouple input value is outputted.
(c) In case of using PUT instruction, average value setting address is as follows.

Address 14
Address 15
CH# average value setting
Count-average: 2 ~ 64000[times]

Temp unit setting
0: Celsius
1: Fahrenheit

12 - 30

(d) This area shows the same results with count average value setting in I/O parameter setting
window.
(e) In the I/O parameter setting window, prohibition function is provided not to set value that is out
of range. (In case of setting value that is out of range, error message is displayed.)

1) Count-Avr. setting

(5) Setting error information area (Address 16)
(a) Saves error code detected at setup by the program
(b) Setting error is canceled when invalid setting is corrected by resetting
(c) When U0X.01.8~ U0X.01.9 (setting error flag) is on, you can cancel the error by checking this
area and resetting
(d) In case of GET instruction, setting error information address is as follows.

Address 16
CH0, 1 setting error information

Type
Error
code
10# Input sensor type setting error 1
Setting
error
20#
Input count average value rage
setting error
2
# means channel number
Input channel 0,1

(e) If there are more than one errors, error code having higher priority will be saved.
.

(10) Cold junction compensation temp. area (Address 17)
(a) Cold junction compensation temp. can be seen per channel.
(b) In case of GET instruction, cold junction compensation temp. area is as follows.

Address 17
CH0,1 cold junction compensation temp.

(11) System area (offset gain storage area: address 18~24)
(a) In the system area (18~24: offset gain storage area), Read/Write is unavailable

Caution
If the user changes this area, it may cause malfunction or breakdown.
So do not handle this area.

12 - 31


(1) It describes how to set operation parameter.
(2) The initial settings are saved in the internal memory of thermocouple module
(3) The following is program example that reads the temp. value of thermocouple input module of slot
1 and check whether disconnection occurs or not.

Example using [I/O Parameter]

(1) I/O parameter setting window

(2) Program example

(a) If module is under normal operation, M0000 is on.
U0A.00.F(module Ready) = On
U0A.00.E(module H/W error) = Off
U0A.01.0(CH0 running) = On
(b) If M0000 is on, temp. conversion value (U0A.04) of CH0 moves to D0000.
(c) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, U0A.01.4 (CH0 disconnection) is on and M0001 bit is set.

12 - 32

Program example using PUT/GET instruction

(1) Program example

(a) It writes h0001 at address 0 of slot 1 in order to enable CH0 by using PUT instruction.
(b) If module is under normal operation, M0000 is on.
U0A.00.F(Module Ready) = On
U0A.00.E(Module H/W error) = Off
U0A.01.0(CH 0 running) = On
(c) If M0000 is on, temp. conversion value of CH0 moves to D0000.
Current temp. conversion value, 278(27.82) is saving in U0A.04.
(d) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, U0A.01.4 (CH0 disconnection) is on and M0001 bit is set.
(e) If M0000 is on, setting error (address 16) of CH0 moves to D0001. Since setting error (address
16) of CH0 is 0, there is no setting error.


12 - 33

Example when error occurs

(1)

(a) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, U0A.01.4 (CH0 disconnection) is on and M0001 bit is set
(b) If disconnection error occurs at CH0, min. value within the range of K type temperature senor
is displayed at U01.04.
(c) It is monitored as follows according to monitor display type.
When monitoring the temp. conversion value, select Unsigned Decimal.

Monitor display type Display content
Unsigned Decimal 63036
Signed Decimal -2500 (-250.0)
Hexadecimal hF63C
As Instruction 63036


12 - 34


The chapter describes diagnostics and measures in case any trouble occurs during use of
thermocouple input module.

Status in case of error

You can check whether there is error or not according to the module status.

Items Normal Disconnection
Module H/W error
(Heavy error)
Operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Min. temp. is displayed
Module function stops
Measure - Checking sensor wiring Customer service

Stats check of module

Module type, module information, O/S version and module status of thermocouple input module can
be checked through XG5000 system monitoring function.



12 - 35

Troubleshooting

Temperature conversion value is not
normal
Installation is correct
Install the option board correctly.
No
Yes
FG ground is normal
manual
No
Yes
Wiring is normal
(K,J type thermocouple sensor input
wiring)
Wire properly referring to user manual No
Yes
(Channel status, input range setting)
Set parameter properly referring to user
manual.
No
Yes
Contact the nearest agency or LS
branch office.

Chapter 13 PID Function (Built-in function)

13 - 1


13.1 General

13.1.1 General
Here describes built-in PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) function. When there is plant (target of control),
Control means that the user changes the status such as velocity, temperature, position, voltage, current etc.
as the user wishes. Here describes PID control that is most frequently used among diverse control methods.
Basic concept of PID control is as follows. First, it detects the PV (Process Value) through sensor and
calculates what the difference with SV (Set value) is. Then it outputs MV (Manipulated Value) for PV to be
same with SV.
At this time, 3 types of operation, such as Proportion, Integration, Derivation is executed according to the
requirement of the user. PID control has high compatibility, flexibility, affordability in comparison with Robust
control and Linear optimal control. In case of other control methods, since control device can be applied to
the system after mathematical analysis of system, if system or the requirement of the user changes, the
analysis of system is done again. But in case of PID control, PID device copes with change of system or
requirement of the user with simple auto-tunings without analysis of system rapidly.
The figure 6.1 is example indicating system configuration of temperature control of heating system.

< Figure 8.1 PID Temperature control system with PLC >

At this time, PLC becomes control device for this system, output temperature of heating system becomes
target for control. And temperature sensor and valve becomes devices to detect and manipulate the status
of system respectively. If temperature sensor detects the output temperature and inputs that to PLC, PLC
manipulate the valve status through PID operation and control the quantity of gas that goes into heating
system. So temperature of heating system changes. This process is called control loop and PID control is
executed by repeating the control loop. The control loop is repeated with a cycle of ms ~ s.

13 - 2

13.1.2 Features
The built-in PID control functions of XGB series feature as follows.

(1) Since operations are executed within CPU part, it can be controlled by PID parameters and PLC
program without PID module.

(2) A variety of controls can be selected
That is, a user can easily select P operation, PI operation and PID operation.

(3) Precise control operation
It can make precise PID control operations possible through floating point operations.

(4) PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) output available.
It outputs control operation results to the output contact point designated by a user through PWM.

(5) Improving convenience of control settings and monitoring
Through parameter setting method and K area flag, it maximizes control parameter settings
during operation and convenience of monitoring

(6) Freely selectable operation direction
Forward, reverse and mixed forward/reverse operations are available

(7) Cascade operation realizing quick and precise PID control
It can increase quickness of response to disturbance through cascade loop.

(8) Various additional functions
PID control can be achieved by various methods a user wishes because set value ramp, the
present value follow-up, limiting change of values and types of alarm functions are provided.


13 - 3

13.2 PID Control

13.2.1 Basic theory of PID control
Here describes basic theory of PID control and how to configure PID control.

(1) Terms
Terms used in this user manual are as follows.

PV: status of plant detected by sensor (Process value)
SV: Target value (Set Value) to control plant, if control is done normally, PV should follow the SV.
E: error between SV and PV. It can be expressed as (SV-PV).
Kp: proportional coefficient
Ti: Integral time constant. Sometimes called integral time
Td: Derivative time constant. Sometimes called derivative time
MV: Control input or control device output. The input to plant to make PV follow the V
Ts: Sampling time, a cycle of operation to execute PID control

(2)PID operation expression
Basic PID operation expressions are as follows.

PID control operation expressions of XGB series are more complicate than expression (8.2.1) ~
(8.2.5) mathematically but those are base on the above expression. The followings describe the
characteristics of control process with an example that controls the output temperature of heating
system in figure 7.1. At this example, the system and PID parameters imaginary to help the
comprehension and those may be different with real heating system. If the heating system in
figure 7.1 is expressed as second order system with transfer function like expression (8.2.6) in
frequency domain, it is expressed as differential equation like expression (8.2.6) in the time
domain.

That is, x(t) is Manipulated value and y(t) is Process value.

PV SV E
E K MV
P P

Edt
T
K
MV
i
P
i
dt
dE
T K MV
d P d

d i P
MV MV MV MV
)) 5 3 )( 1 2 (
32
s s
Transfer function
=
(8.2.6)
) ( ) ( 5
) (
32
13 ) (
32
6
2
2
t x t y
dt
t dy
dt
t y d

(8.2.7)
(8.2.1)
(8.2.2)
(8.2.3)
(8.2.4)
(8.2.5)

13 - 4

At this system, we assume that the PID parameter is specified as shown below to describe the PID control
operation.

Items Value Items Value
Output temperature of
heating system (PV)
0
Proportional coefficient
(K
P
)
5
Target temperature
(SV)
50 Integral time (T
i
) 3s
Cycle of operation 0.01s Derivative time (T
d
) 0.19s
<Table 8.1 example of control of heating system>

At this system, if we assume that target value of output temperature is 50 and initial value of output
temperature is 0, SV and PV becomes 50 and 0 respectively. In case of this, PID controller acts as follows.

(3) Proportional control (P control)
In the proportional control, the controller yields output that is proportional to error.
Manipulated value of controller by Proportional control is as follows.

(8.2.8)

(a) If P control starts, output of controller by initial P operation is as follows.

200 4 50
0
MV

If P control is executed for 10 seconds, output temperature will be as table 8.2.
If this is expressed with graph, it will be as figure 8.2.

Time Target temp.
Proportional
coefficient
Output temp. Error
0 50 5 0 50
1 50 5 44.98 5.02
2 50 5 53.08 -3.08
3 50 5 50.15 -0.15
4 50 5 48.42 1.58
5 50 5 48.28 1.72
6 50 5 48.44 1.56
7 50 5 48.49 1.51
8 50 5 48.49 1.51
9 50 5 48.49 1.51

< Table 8.2 example of Proportional control >

P P
K E MV

13 - 5

< Figure 8.2 simulation of proportional control >

(b) Concerning the result of simulation, it has the maximum overshoot of about 23.4 at 0.62s
and after 7s, it converges at 48.49 with offset of 1.51 (about 3%).

(c) Offset is an unavoidable error when only P control is executed. Offset decreases proportional
to P coefficient but overshoot increases proportional to P coefficient. Table 8.3 and figure 8.3 is
simulation of offset and overshoot according to P coefficient.

Time
Target
temperature
Kp = 5 Kp = 2.5 Kp = 1
0 50 0 0 0
1 50 45.02 63.46 46.67
2 50 53.11 42.52 46.77
3 50 50.15 47.93 41.38
4 50 50.22 47.25 41.60
5 50 48.27 46.96 43.30
6 50 48.35 46.92 43.25
7 50 48.44 46.90 43.21
8 50 48.53 46.90 43.18
9 50 48.53 46.90 43.18
<Table 8.3 Temperature- time table according to P coefficient>

Offset
Max. overshoot

13 - 6

< Figure 8.3 Temperature- time graph according to P coefficient >

(c) Considering table 8.3, as P coefficient decreases, offset increases but overshoot decreases.

(d) Generally, offset cant be solved with only P control. In order to remove the offset, P control
and I control is used together.

(4) Proportional Integral Control (PI Control)
In I control, it yields the output proportional to error accumulated according to time. And the
expression is as follows.

(a) In the expression 8.2.9, Ti means the time takes for MV
i,
output by I control, to be added into
real output.

(b) Generally, I control is used with P control. So the expression of PI control is as follows.

(c) In the above heating system, the simulation results are as shown in the table 8.4 when
proportional coefficient is 2.5 and integral time is 1.5s.

Time
Target
temp.
Proportional
coefficient
Integral
time
P Control PI Control
0 50 2.5 1.5 0 0
1 50 2.5 1.5 63.46 74.41
2 50 2.5 1.5 42.52 40.63
3 50 2.5 1.5 47.93 52.99
4 50 2.5 1.5 47.05 49.67
Edt
T
K
MV
i
P
i
Edt
T
K
K E MV MV MV
i
P
P i P
(8.2.9)
(8.2.10)

13 - 7

Time
Target
temp.
Proportional
coefficient
Integral
time
P Control PI Control
5 50 2.5 1.5 46.96 49.70
6 50 2.5 1.5 47.12 50.38
7 50 2.5 1.5 47.03 49.76
8 50 2.5 1.5 47.07 50.14
9 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 49.94
10 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.02
11 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 49.99
12 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00
13 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00
14 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00
15 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00
< Table 8.4 Temp.- time table >

(d) Considering table 8.4 and figure 8.4, if P and I control is used together, offset is removed and
temp. converges at 50, target temp. after 12s

(e) But in this case, convergence time is longer than that of P control and overshoot is larger.
Generally, as integral time increases, overshoot decrease. About this, refer to the figure 8.5.

< Figure 8.4 Temp.- time graph >


13 - 8

< Figure 8.5 overshoot according to integral time >

(f) Like this, if I control is used, overshoot is larger. According to system, large overshoot can be
problem. In order to solve this, PID control is used.

(5) Proportional integral derivative control (PID control)
In D control, when status of system changes rapidly, D control yields the output to reduce the
error. Namely, D control yields the output proportional to change velocity of current status. So if
D control is used, response speed of controller about status change of system increases, and
overshoot decreases. Output of controller by D control is as shown in expression 8.2.11.

.

(a) In the expression 8.2.11, Td means the time takes for MV
d
output by I control, to be added into
real output.

(b) Generally, D control is not used solely but with PD control. So PID control is expressed as
expression 8.2.12.

(c) The figure 8.6 is simulation result when PID control is applied to above heating system.
dt
dE
T K MV
d P d

dt
dE
T K Edt
T
K
K E MV MV MV MV
d p
i
P
P d i P

(8.2.11)
(8.2.12)

13 - 9

Time
Target
temp.
Proportional
coefficient
Integral
time
Derivative
time
PI
Control
PID
Control
0 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 0 0
1 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 74.41 55.50
2 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 40.63 56.33
3 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 52.99 52.50
4 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.67 50.92
5 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.70 50.34
6 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.38 50.12
7 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.76 50.05
8 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.14 50.02
9 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.94 50.01
10 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.02 50.00
11 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.99 50.00
12 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.00 50.00
13 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.00 50.00
< Table 8.5 comparison of PI control and PID control >

< Figure 8.6 comparison of PI control and PID control >

(d) Considering table 8.5, in case PID control is used, max. overshoot decreases from 16.5 to
8.5. At this time, P coefficient, integral time, derivative time are not optimal values, just one of
the examples. Actually, P coefficient, integral time, derivative time values vary according to PID
control system.


13 - 10

13.2.2 Functional specifications of PID control
(1) Functional Specifications
The performance specifications of the built-in PID control function in XGB series are summarized
in the below table.
Item Specifications
No. of loops 16 Loop
Scope of
setting
PID
constants
Proportional
constant(P)
Real number (0 ~ 3.40282347e+38)
Integral constant(I) Real number (0 ~ 3.40282347e+38), unit: second
Differential
constant(D)
Real number (0 ~ 3.40282347e+38), unit: second
Scope of set value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of present value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of maneuver value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of manual maneuver value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Indication
RUN/STOP
Operation: PID RUN Flag On (by loops)
Stop: PID RUN Flag Off (by loops)
Error
Normal: PID Error Flag Off (by loops)
Error: PID Error Flag On,
Error code occurrence (by loops)
Warning
Normal: PID Warning Flag Off (by loops)
Error: PID Warning Flag On,
Warnig code occurrence (by loops)
Control operation
Control of P,PI,PD and PID, control of forward/reverse
operation
Control interval 10.0ms ~ 6,553.6ms (0.1msUnit)
Additional
functions
PWM output Supportable
Mixed forward/reverse
output
Supportable
Limiting change of
present value
INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Limiting change of
maneuver value
INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Equally dividing set
value
0 ~ 65,536 (frequency of control cycle time)
Present value follow-
up
0 ~ 65,536 (frequency of control cycle time)
Cascade control Supportable.
Min./max. present
value
-32,768 ~ 32,767
Differential filter 0.01 ~ 655.35 (x 100 Scaled Up)
Dead band setting 0 ~ 65,535
Prevention of dual
integral accumulation
Supportable
PID operation pause Supportable
< Table 8.6 built-in PID control performance specification >


13 - 11

13.2.3 PID control parameter setting
To use the built-in PID control function of XGB series, it is necessary to set PID control parameters by
loops in the parameter window and operate it though the commands. Here, it explains parameters to
use PID control functions and how to set them.

(1) PID parameter settings
Follow the steps below to set the PID control function parameters of XGB series.
(a) If selecting the built-in parameters in Parameter of the project window, it shows the built-in
parameter setting window as in below figure.

< Figure 8.7 Parameters setting window >

(b) If selecting PID Control, it shows the PID control parameter setting window as in below figure.

[ Figure 8.8 Built-in PID function parameters setting window ]

13 - 12

(c) Input items
The items to set in the built-in PID function parameter window and the available scope
of them are summarized in below table.

Items Description Scope
RUN mode Set the operation mode of PID control.
Auto/manual
operation
RUN direction Set the operation direction of PID control. Forward/reverse
Prevention of dual
integral accumulation
Set whether to allow dual integral accumulation. Disabled/enabled
PWM output
Set whether to allow PWM output of maneuver
value.
Disabled/enabled
Operation cycle time
Set the operation cycle time of PID control
cycle.
100 ~ 65535
Set value Set target control value. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Proportional gain Set proportional gain. Real number
Integral time Set integral time. Real number
Differential time Set differential time. Real number
Limiting change of
present value
Set the limited change of present value per
operation cycle.
-32,768 ~ 32,767
Limiting change of
maneuver value
Set the limited change of maneuver value per
operation cycle.
-32,768 ~ 32,767
Max. maneuver value Set the max. maneuver value for control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Min. maneuver value Set the min. maneuver value for control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Manual maneuver
value
Set the manual maneuver value for control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
DeadBand setting Set the deadband width of the set value. 0 ~ 65,535
Differential filter value Set the filter coefficient of differential operation. 0 ~ 65,535
PWM junction Set the junction to which PWM output is out.
P20 ~ P3F
(%QX0.0.0~%QX0.0.31)
PWM output cycle Set the output cycle of PWM output. 100 ~ 65,535
Set value ramp Set the frequency of set value ramp. 0 ~ 65,535
Present value follow-
up
Set the follow-up frequency of the present value
follow-up function.
0 ~ 65,535
Min. present value Set the min. value of the input present value. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Max. present value Set the max. value of input present value. -32,768 ~ 32,767
< Table 8.7 PID function parameter setting items >


13 - 13

(2) Description of Setting of PID Parameters

(a) Operation mode
It is the mode to set the operation for PID control of a loop in question.
The available scope is automatic operation or manual operation.
If automatic operation is selected, it outputs the PID control result internally operated by the
input PID control parameter as the maneuver value while if manual operation is selected, it
outputs the value input to the manual maneuver value parameter without PID operation
modified. The default is automatic operation.

(b) Operation direction
It is designed to set the operation direction for PID control of a loop in question. The available
scope is forward or reverse direction. At the moment, forward direction means increase of PV
when MV increases; reverse direction means decrease PV when MV increases. For instance, a
heater is a kind of forward direction system because PV(temperature) increases when
output(heating) increases. A refrigerator is a kind of reverse direction system in which
PV(temperature) decreases when output increases.

(c) Prevention of dual integral accumulation
It makes dual integral accumulation function enabled/disabled. To understand integral
accumulation prevention function, it is necessary to explain the phenomenon of integral
accumulation first of all. Every drive has a limit. That is, a motor is limited to the speed and a
valve can become status overcoming the complete open/close. If it happens that MV output
from a control is beyond the output limit of a drive, its output is maintained as saturated, which
may deteriorate the control performance of a system and shorten the life of a drive. Formula
(7.2.3) shows that the integral control among PID control output components accumulates
errors as time goes on, from which it may take more time to return the normal status after the
actuator is saturated in a system of which response characteristically is slow. It is so called
integral accumulation phenomenon as illustrated in Fig. 7.9, which shows that if the initial error
is very large, the error is continuously accumulated by integral control. Accordingly, a drive is
saturated within its output upper limit while the control signal is getting larger, keeping being
saturated for a long while until the drift becomes negative and the integral term turns small
enough. Due to the operation, the PV may have a large over-shoot as seen in the figure. Such
a wind-up phenomenon may occur if the initial drift is large or by a large disturbance or due to
malfunction of a device.
The PID function of XGB series is basically with the integral accumulation prevention function,
cutting off any integral accumulation phenomenon. In addition, it can detect a time when SV is
suddenly decreased, providing a more strong dual integral accumulation prevention function.

< Figure 8.9 Integral accumulation phenomenon >
Time

Target
value

Upper limit of drive output

PV

MV

Drive saturation

Integral accumulation phenomenon


13 - 14

(d) PWM Output Enabled
PWM output means an output method to turn a junction on off with a duty proportional to control
output calculated by a uniform output cycle. If PWM output is enabled, it realizes PWM output in
accordance with PWM output cycle set in the parameter of PWM output junction(P20 ~ P3F)
designated in the parameter. At the moment, the PWM output cycle follows the PWM output cycle
separately set in PID operation cycle. figure shows the relation between PID control output and
PWM output.

i.e.) if PWM output cycle: 1 second, PWM output junction: P20, max. output: 10000, min. output: 0

Time Output P40 junction operation
0 sec 5000 0.5 sec On, 0.5 sec Off
1 sec 3000 0.3 sec On, 0.7 sec Off

[ Figure 8.10 Relation between PWM output cycle and MV ]

(e) Set value
It sets the target of a loop in question, that is, the target status a user wishes to control. In case of
the PID control built in XGB, physical values (temperature, flow rate, pressure and etc) of an
object to control is not meaningful and instead, it should use the physical amount of an object to
control after converting them into numerals. For instance, in order to control a system using a
sensor that the output is 0V when its heating device temperature is 0 while it is 10V when the
temperature is 100 as much as 50, it is necessary to set SV as 2000 (as long as it uses AD
input module XBE-AD04A).

(f) Operation cycle
It sets the cycle to yield control output by executing the built-in PID operation. The setting cycle is
0.1ms and available between 10ms ~ 6553.5ms (setting value: 100 ~ 65,535) while it is set at a
unit of integer per 0.1ms. For instance, to set PID operation per 100ms, set the operation cycle as
1000.

(g) Proportional gain
It is intended to set the proportional coefficient of a PID loop in question (Kp). As larger Kp, the
proportional control operation is getting stronger. The scope is real number.

(h) Integral time
It sets the integral time of PID loop in question (Ti). As larger the integral time, the integral
operation is getting weaker. The scope is real number at the unit of second.
P20 output

0.5sec

0.5sec

= 1

0.3sec

0.7sec

MV = 5000

MV = 7000

Output cycle = 1sec

Output cycle = 1sec

Time

(%QX0.0.0
output)

13 - 15

(i) Differential time
It sets the differential time of PID loop in question (Td). As larger the differential time, the
differential operation is getting stronger. The scope is real number at the unit of second.

(j) Limiting change of present value
It sets the limit of change in present value of PID loop in question. If PV suddenly changes due to
signal components such as sensors malfunction, noise or disturbance during control of PID, it
may cause sudden change of PID control output. To prevent the phenomenon, a user can set the
max. limit of change in present value that is allowed per PID operation cycle. If the change of
present value is limited accordingly, it may calculate the present value as much as the limit
although the present value is changed more than the limit once the limit of change in present
value is set. If using the PV change limit function, it may prevent against sudden change of
control output owing to noise or etc. If it is, however, set too small, it may reduce the response
speed to the PV change of an actual system, not to sudden change by noise or etc, so it is
necessary to set the value appropriately according to the environment of a system to control in
order that the PV toward the set value does not take a longer time. The available scope is
between -32,768 ~ 32,767. If setting the PV change limit as 0, the function is not available.

(k) Limiting change of MV (MV function)
It limits the max. size that control output, which is output by PID operation is changed at a time.
The output MV in this operation cycle is not changed more than the max. change limit set in the
previous operation cycle. The function has an effect to prevent a drive from operating excessively
due to sudden change of output by preventing sudden change of output resulting from
instantaneous change of set value. If it is, however, set too small, it may cause taking a longer
time until PV reaches to its target, so it is necessary to adjust it appropriately. The available
scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767. If setting it as 0, the function does not work.

(l) Max. MV
It sets the max. value of control output that may be output by the result of PID operation. The
available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767. if it exceeds the max. output designated by PID
operation result, it outputs the set max. output and alerts the max. output excess warning. For
the types and description of warnings, refer to Error/Warning Codes.

(m) Min. MV
It sets the min. value of control output that may be output by the result of PID operation. The
available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767. If it is smaller than the min. output value designated
by PID operation result, it outputs the set min. MV and alerts the min. output shortage warning.
For the types and description of warnings, refer to Error/Warning Codes.

(n) Manual MV
It sets the output when the operation mode is manual. The available scope is between -32,768 ~
32,767.

(o) DeadBand setting
It sets the deadband between set value and present value. Although it may be important to
reduce normal status reply of PV for its set value even when MV fluctuates heavily, depending on
control system, it may be more important to reduce the frequent change of MV although the
normal status reply is somewhat getting larger. DeadBand may be useful in the case.
Below figure shows an example of DeadBand setting.

13 - 16

[ Figure 8.11 Example of DeadBand setting ]

If setting deadband as in the figure, the PID control built in XGB may regard the error between PV
and set value as 0 as long as PV is within the available scope of deadband from set value.

That is, in this case, the change of MV is reduced. The available scope of setting is between 0 ~
65,535 and if it is set as 0, it does not work.

(p) Differential Filter Value Setting
It sets the coefficient of differential filter. Since differential control outputs in proportion to gradient
of error and gradient of PV change, it may suddenly change MV as it generates a large response
to instantaneous noise or disturbance. To prevent it, XGB series uses a value to which PV is
filtered mathematically for differential control. Differential filter value is the coefficient to determine
the filter degree for differential control. As smaller differential value set, as stronger differential
operation is. The available scope is between 0 ~ 65,535 and if it is set as 0, the differential filter
does not work.

(q) Setting set value ramp
Since the drift is suddenly large if SV is heavily changed during PID control, MV is also changed
heavily to correct it. Such an operation may cause excessive operation of a system to control and
a drive. To prevent it, SV ramp is used, changing SV gradually step by step when modifying SV
during operation. If using the function, SV is gradually changed by SV ramp when SV is changed
during PID control. At the moment, SV ramp setting represents the frequency of PID operation
cycle taken from when SV starts changing to when it reaches to the final SV. For instance, if SV
is to be changed from 1000 to 2000 during operation as PID operation cycle is 10ms and its SV
ramp is 500, SV may reach to 2000 after 500X10ms = 5 seconds, that is, as it increases each 2
per operation cycle and after the 500th operation scans. The available scope of setting is
between 0 ~65,535 and it is set as 0, it does not work.

[ Figure 8.12 SV Ramp function ]

Time

Existing SV

XG5000

Modified SV

If SV Ramp is not used

If SV Ramp is used

SV * operation cycle

DeadBand
PV

13 - 17

(r) PV Follow-up setting
It is intended to prevent any excessive operation of a drive resulting from sudden change of
output at the initial control and changes SV gradually from PV at the time when PID operation
starts, not directly to SV in case control just turns from stop to operation mode or it changes from
manual to automatic operation. At the moment, SV represents the frequency of PID operation
cycles taken from when control starts to when it reaches to the set SV (other operations are same
as SV ramp function). The available scope is between 0 ~ 65,535. If SV is changed again while
PV follow-up is in operation, the SV would be also changed according to SV ramp.

(s) Min./max. PV
It sets the min./max. value entered as the present value of PID control. The available scope is
between -32,768 ~ 32,767.


13 - 18

13.2.4 PID flag
The parameter set by the XGB series built-in PID control function is saved into the flash memory of
the basic unit. Such parameters are moved to K area for the built-in PID function as soon as PLC
turns from STOP to RUN mode. PID control operation by PID control command is executed through K
area data for PID functions. Therefore, if a user changes the value in the trend monitor window or
variable monitor window during operation, PID operation is executed by the changed value. At the
moment, if PLC is changed to RUN again after being changed to STOP, it loads the parameters in
flash memory to K area, so the data changed in K area is lost. Thus, to keep applying the parameters
adjusted in K area, it is necessary to write the parameter set in K area to flash memory by using WRT
command. (In case of IEC, APM_WRT)

(1) PID Flag Configuration
K area flags for XGB series built-in PID control function are summarized in the below table.

Loop K area IEC type Symbol
Data
type
Default Description
Common
K12000~F %KX19200~15 _PID_MAN Bit Auto
PID output designation(0:auto,
1:manual)
K12010~F %KX19216~31 _PID_PAUSE Bit RUN PID pause (0:RUN, 1:pause)
K12020~F %KX19232~47 _PID_REV Bit Forward
Control direction(0:forward,
1:reverse) operation control
K12030~F %KX19248~63 _PID_AW2D Bit Disabled
Dual integral accumulation
prevention(0:enabled, 1:disabled)
K12040~F %KX19264~79 _PID_REM_RUN Bit Disabled
PID remote operation(0:disabled,
1:enabled)
K1205~K1207 %KW1205~%KW1207 Reserved WORD - Reserved area
K12080~F %KX19328~43 _PID_PWM_EN Bit Disabled
PWM output enable(0:disabled,
1:enabled)
K12090~F %KX19344~59 _PID_STD Bit -
PID operation indication(0:stop,
1:run)
K12100~F %KX19360~75 _PID_ALARM Bit - PID warning(0:normal, 1:warning)
K12110~F %KX19376~91 _PID_ERROR Bit - PID error(0:normal, 1:error)
K1212~K1215 %KW1212~%KW1215 Reserved WORD - Reserved
Loop 0
K1216 %KW1216 _PID00_SV INT 0 PID SV
K1217 %KW1217 _PID00_T_s WORD 100 PID operation cycle[0.1ms]
K1218 %KD609 _PID00_K_p REAL 1 PID proportional constant
K1220 %KD610 _PID00_T_i REAL 0 PID integral time[sec]
K1222 %KD611 _PID00_T_d REAL 0 PID differential time[sec]
K1224 %KW1224 _PID00_d_PV_max WORD 0 PID PV change limit
K1225 %KW1225 _PID00_d_MV_max WORD 0 PID MV change limit
K1226 %KW1226 _PID00_MV_max INT 4000 PID MV max. value limit
K1227 %KW1227 _PID00_MV_min INT 0 PID MV min. value limit
K1228 %KW1228 _PID00_MV_man INT 0 PID manual output
K1229 %KW1229 _PID00_PV INT - PID PV
< Table 8.8 K area flags for PID control >

13 - 19

Loop K area IEC type Symbol
Data
type
Default Description
Loop 0
K1230 %KW1230 _PID00_PV_old INT - PID PV of previous cycle
K1231 %KW1231 _PID00_MV INT 0 PID MV
K1232 %KD616 _PID00_ERR DINT - PID control error
K1234 %KD617 _PID00_MV_p REAL 0
PID MV proportional value
component
K1236 %KD618 _PID00_Mv_i REAL 0
PID MV integral control
component
K1238 %KD619 _PID00_MV_d REAL 0
PID MV differential control
component
K1240 %KW1240 _PID00_DB_W WORD 0 PID deadband setting
K1241 %KW1241 _PID00_Td_lag WORD 0 PID differential filter coefficient
K1242 %KW1242 _PID00_PWM WORD H20 PID PWM junction setting
K1243 %KW1243 _PID00_PWM_Prd WORD 100 PID PWM output cycle
K1244 %KW1244 _PID00_SV_RAMP WORD 0 PID SV Ramp value
K1245 %KW1245 _PID00_PV_Track WORD 0 PID PV follow-up setting
K1246 %KW1246 _PID00_PV_MIN INT 0 PID PV min. value limit
K1247 %KW1247 _PID00_PV_MAX INT 4000 PID PV max. value limit
K1248 %KW1248 _PID00_ALM_CODE Word 0 PID warning code
K1249 %KW1249 _PID00_ERR_CODE Word 0 PID error code
K1250 %KW1250 _PID00_CUR_SV INT 0 PID SV of current cycle
K1251-1255 %KW1251-1255 Reserved WORD - Reserved area
Loop 1 K1256~K1295
1
%KW1256~%KW1295 - - - PID Loop1 control parameter
~
Loop16 K1816~K1855 %KW1816~%KW1855 - - - PID Loop16 control parameter
< Table 8.8 K area flags for PID control (continued) >
K1200 ~ K1211 areas are the common bit areas of PID loops while each bit represents the status of
each PID control loop. Therefore, each 16 bits, the max number of loops of XGB PID control
represents loop status and setting respectively. K1216 ~ K1255 areas are K areas for PID control
loop 0 and save the loop 0 setting and status. It also contains parameters such as SV, operation
cycle, proportional coefficient, integral time and differential time set in the built-in parameter window
and the XGB built-in PID function executes PID control by each device value in question. In addition,
the output data such as MV calculated and output while PID control is executed is also saved into
the K areas. By changing the values in K areas, control setting may be changed any time during
PID control.
By changing value of area, you can change control setting whenever you want
during the PID control
1) PID control flag expression : _PID[n]_xxx
[n] : loop number
xxx : flag function
i.e.) _PID10_K_p : means K_p of loop 10.

1
Occupies 40 words per loop.
Remark

13 - 20

2) PID flag function
Each function of K area flags for XGB series built-in PID control function is summarized as follows.

(a) Common bit area
The area is a flag collecting operation setting and information consisting of bits to each 16 loop.
Each bit of each word device represents the information of each loop. That is, n th bit represents
the information about PID loop n.

1) _PID_MAN (PID RUN mode setting)

I
t determines whether to operate the PID control of n loop automatically or manually. For more
information about RUN mode, refer to 6.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If the bit is off, it
operates automatically; if on, it runs manually.

2) _PID_PAUSE (PID Pause setting)

It changes PID control of n loop to pause status. If PID control is paused, the control MV is
fixed as the output at the time of pause. At the moment, PID operation is continued internally
with output fixed. If changing pause status to operation status again, it resumes control, so it
may take a longer time until the PV is going to SV once system status is largely changed during
pause. If the bit is off, it cancels pause; if on, it operates as paused.

3) _PID_REV (PID RUN direction setting)

I
t sets the RUN direction of PID control of nth loop. For more information about run direction,
refer to 7.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If the bit is off, it operates normally; if on, it
operates reversely.

4) _PID_AW2D (Dual Integral accumulation prevention setting)

I
t sets enable/disable of dual integral accumulation prevention of nth loop. For more
information about dual integral accumulation prevention, refer to 7.2.3 PID control parameter
setting. If the bit is off, it is enabled; if on, it is disabled.
Flag name address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_MAN
(PID RUN mode setting)
K1200n %KX19200 + n BIT Available
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_PAUSE (PID pause setting) K1201n %KX19216 + n BIT Available
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_REV
(PID RUN direction setting)
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_AW2D
(dual integral accumulation
prevention setting)

13 - 21

5) _PID_REM_RUN (PID remote operation setting)

X
GB series built-in PID function can be started by both run from commands start junction and
remote run bit setting. That is, XGB starts PID control if PIDRUN commands start junction is on
or remote run setting bit is on. Namely, if one of them is on, it executed PID control.

6) _PID_PWM_EN (PWM output enable)

I
t determines whether to output the MV of PID control of nth loop as PWM output. For more
information about PWM output, refer to 8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If the bit is off, it is
disabled; if on, it is enabled.

7) _PID_STD (PID RUN status indication)

I
t indicates the PID control RUN status of n th loop. If a loop is running or paused, it is on while
if it stops or has an error during RUN, it is off. In the area as monitoring area, it is changed to
the current run status by PLC although a user enters any value temporarily.

8) _PID_ALARM (PID Warning occurrence)

I
t indicates warning if any warning occurs during PID control of nth loop. Once a warning
occurs during PID control operation of a loop, it is on while if it is normal, it is off. At the moment,
despite of warning, PID control continues without interruption, but it is desirable to check
warning information and take a proper measure. Once a warning occurs, the warning code is
also indicated in warning code area of a loop. For more information about the types of warning
codes and measures, refer to 8.5. In the area as monitoring area, it is changed to the current
run status by PLC although a user enters any value temporarily.

9) _PID_ERROR (PID Error occurrence)

I
f an error that discontinues running during PID control of n th loop occurs, it indicates the
errors occurrence. If an error generates warning, it is on; if normal, it is off. When an error
occurs, PID control stops and MV is output as the min. output set in parameter. Also, if an error
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_REM_RUN
(PID remote run setting)
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_PWM_EN
(PWM output enable)
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_STD
(PID RUN status indication)
K1209n %KX19344 + n BIT Unavailable
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_ALARM
(PID Warning occurrence)
Flag name Address
IEC type
address
Unit Setting
_PID_ERROR
(PID error occurrence)

13 - 22

occurs, the error code is indicated in the error code area of a loop. For more information about
type of error codes and measures, refer to 8.5. In the area as monitoring area, it is changed to
the current run status by PLC although a user enters any value temporarily.

(b) PID Flag area by loops
PID flag areas by loops are allocated between K1216 ~ K1855 and for totally 16 loops, each 40
words is allocated per loop. Therefore, the individual data areas of n th loop are between K
(1216+16*n) ~ K (1255+16*n). Every setting of the PID flag areas by loops may be changed
during PID control operation. Once the settings are changed, they are applied from the next PID
control cycle.

1) _PIDxx_SV (PID xx Loop SV setting)

It sets/indicates the SV of PID control of xx th loop. For more information about SV, refer to
8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767.

2) _PIDxx_T_s (PID xx Loop operation cycle)

It sets/indicates the operation cycle of PID control of xx th loop. For more information about
operation cycle, refer to 8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. The available scope is between
100 ~ 65,535.

3) _PIDxx_K_p (PID xx Loop proportional constant)

It sets/indicates the proportional constant of PID control of xx th loop. For more information
about proportional constant, refer to 7.2.3 PID Control Parameter Setting. The available scope
is real number (-3.40282347e+38 ~ -1.17549435e-38 , 0 , 1.17549435e-38 ~ 3.40282347e+38).
If it is, however, set as 0 and lower, the PID control of a loop generates an error and does not
work.

4) _PIDxx_T_i (PID xx Loop Integral time)

It sets/indicates integral time of PID control of xx th loop. The available scope is real number. If
it is set as 0 and lower, it does not execute integral control.

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_SV
(PID xx Loop SV setting)
K1216+16*xx %KW1216+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_T_s
(PID xx Loop operation cycle)
K1217+16*xx %KW1217+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_K_p
(PID xx Loop proportional constant)
K1218+16*xx %KD609+20*xx REAL Real number
_PIDxx_T_i
(PID xx Loop integral time)

13 - 23

5) _PIDxx_T_d (PID xx Loop differential time)

It sets/indicates differential time of PID control of xx th loop. The available scope is real
number. If it is set as 0 and lower, it does not execute differential control.

6) _PIDxx_d_PV_max (PV change limit)

It sets the PV change limit of xx th loop.
For more information about PV change limit, refer to 8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If it is
set as 0, the PV change limit function does not work.

7) _PIDxx_d_MV_max (MV change limit)

It sets the MV change limit of xxth loop. For more information about MV change limit, refer to
8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If it is set as 0, the MV change limit function does not work.

8) _PIDxx_MV_max, _PIDxx_MV_min, _PIDxx_MV_man (max. MV, min. MV, manual MV)

It sets the max. MV, min. MV and manual MV of xx th loop. For more information about max.
MV, min. MV and manual MV, refer to 8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If the max. MV is set
lower than the min. MV, the PID control loop generates an error and does not work.

9) _PIDxx_PV (prevent value)

It is the area that receives the present value of xx th PID control loop. PV is the present status
of the system to control and is normally saved into U device via input devices such as A/D input
module if it is entered from a sensor. The value is used to execute PID operation by moving to
_PIDxx_PV by means of commands like MOV.

10) _PIDxx_PV_OLD (PV of previous control cycle)

The area indicates the PV just before the xx th PID control loop. The flag, as a dedicated
monitoring flag, would be updated by PLC although a user directly enters it.
_PIDxx_T_d
(PID xx Loop differential time)
_PIDxx_d_PV_max
(PV change limit)
K1224+16*xx %KD612+20*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_d_MV_max
(MV change limit)
K1225+16*xx %KD610+20*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_MV_max (max. MV) K1226+16*xx %KW1226+16*xx
INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_MV_min (min. MV) K1227+16*xx %KW K1227+16*xx
_PIDxx_MV_man (manual MV) K1228+16*xx %KW K1228+16*xx
_PIDxx_PV
(present value)
K1229+16*xx %KW1229+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_PV_OLD
(PV of previous control cycle)
K1230+16*xx %KW1230+16*xx INT Unavailable

13 - 24

11) _PIDxx_MV (Control MV)

The area shows the MV of xx th PID control loop. As the area in which XGB built-in PID
operation result is output every PID control cycle, it delivers the value in the area to U device
every scanning by using commands like MOV in the program and outputs to D/A output module,
operating a drive.

12) _PID00_ERR (Present error)

T
he areas shows the current error of xx th PID control loop. It is also used as an indicator about
how much gap the present status has with a desired status and if an error is 0, it means the
control system reaches a desired status exactly. Therefore, if control starts, error is quickly
reduced at transient state and it reaches normal state, maintaining remaining drift as 0, it could
be an ideal control system. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, is updated although a user
directly enters it.

13) _PIDxx_MV_p, _PIDxx_MV_i, _PIDxx_MV_d (P/I/D control components of MV)

It indicates n th loop MV by classifying proportional control MV, integral control max. MV and
differential control MV. The entire MV consists of the sum of these three components. The flag,
as a dedicated monitoring, is updated although a user directly enters it.

14) _PIDxx_DB_W (DeadBand setting)

It sets the deadband of xx th loop. For more information about Deadband function, refer to
8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If it is set as 0, the function does not work.

15) _PIDxx_Td_lag (Differential filter coefficient)

It sets the differential filter coefficient of xx th loop. For more information about differential filter
coefficient, refer to 8.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If it is set as 0, the function does not
work.

_PIDxx_MV (control MV) K1231+16*xx %KW1231+16*xx INT Unavailable
_PID00_ERR
(present error)
K1232+16*xx %KW1232+16*xx DINT Unavailable
_PIDxx_MV_p
(MV proportional control component)
K1234+16*xx %KD616+20*xx
REAL Unavailable
_PIDxx_MV_i
(MV integral control component)
K1236+16*xx %KD617+20*xx
_PIDxx_MV_d
(MV differential control component)
K1238+16*xx %KD618+20*xx
_PIDxx_DB_W
(DeadBand setting)
K1240+16*xx %KW1232+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_Td_lag
(differential filter coefficient)
K1241+16*xx %KW1241+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

13 - 25

16) _PIDxx_PWM (PWM output junction setting)

It sets the junction to which PWM output of xx th loop is output. PWM output junction is valid
only between H20 ~ H3F. If any other value is entered, PWM output does not work.

17) _PIDxx_PWM_Prd (PWM Output cycle setting)

It sets the PWM output cycle of xx th loop. The available scope is between 100 ~ 65,535 at the
unit of 0.1ms.

18) _PIDxx_SV_RAMP (SV ramp setting)

It sets the SV ramp value of xx th loop. For more information about SV ramp of PV, refer to

19) _PIDxx_PV_Track (PV follow-up setting)

It sets the PV follow-up SV of xx th loop. For more information about PV follow-up, refer to

20) _PIDxx_PV_MIN, _PIDxx_PV_MAX(Min. PV input, Max. PV input)

It sets the min./max. PV of xx th loop.

21) _PIDxx_ALM_CODE (Warning code)

It indicates warning code if a warning occurs during xx th loop run. The flag, as a dedicated
monitoring, is updated although a user directly enters it. For more information about warning
code, refer to 8.5.

_PID00_PWM
(PWM output junction setting)
K1242+16*xx %KW1242+16*xx WORD H20 ~ H3F
_PIDxx_PWM_Prd
(PWM output cycle setting)
K1243+16*xx %KW1243+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_SV_RAMP
(SV ramp setting)
K1244+16*xx %KW1244+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_PV_Track
(PV follow-up setting)
K1245+16*xx %KW1245+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_MV_p
(MV proportional control component)
K1246+16*xx %KW1246+16*xx
INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_MV_i
(MV integral control component)
K1247+16*xx %KW1247+16*xx
_PIDxx_ALM_CODE
(Warning code)
K1248+16*xx %KW1248+16*xx WORD Unavailable

13 - 26

22) _PIDxx_ERR_CODE (Error code)

It indicates error code if an error occurs during xx th loop run. The flag, as a dedicated
monitoring, is updated although a user directly enters it. For more information about warning
code, refer to 8.5.

23) _PIDxx_CUR_SV (SV of the present cycle)

It indicates SV currently running of xx th loop. If SV is changing due to SV ramp or PV follow-
up function, it shows the currently changing PV. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, is updated
although a user directly enters it.

_PIDxx_ERR_CODE
(error code)
_PIDxx_CUR_SV
(SV of the present cycle)
K1250+16*xx %KW1250+16*xx INT Unavailable

13 - 27

13.3 PID Instructions
It describes PID control commands used in XGB series. The command type of PID control used in
XGB series built-in PID control is 4.

(1) PIDRUN
PIDRUN is used to execute PID control by loops.

- Operand S means the loop no. to execute PID control and avaiable only for constant(0~15).
- If start signal is on, the PID control of a loop starts.
- In case of IEC type, PID control is conducted by PIDRUN function block.
- In case of XGB IEC type, inputs 0 at BLOCK

- PID_STAT, only supported on IEC type, indicates status of PID operation. For meaning of
inidcation data, refer to indication contents of PID STATE.


13 - 28

Indication contents of PID STATE
Item Indicatio
n
Flag name Contents
ALARM
16#0001 PV_MIN_MAX_ALM
Current value exceeds range of maximum, minimum
value
16#0002
PID_SCANTIME_AL
M
Operation cycle is too short.
16#0003 PID_dPV_WARN
Variation of current value of this PID cycle exceeds the
current value variation limit.
16#0004 PID_dMV_WARN
Variation of manipulated value of this PID cycle exceeds
the manipulated value variation limit.
16#0005
PID_MV_MAX_WAR
N
Manipulated value of this PID cycle exceeds maximum
manipulated value.
16#0006 PID_MV_MIN_WARN
Manipulated value of this PID cycle is smaller than
minimum manipulated value.
ERROR
16#0100 MV_MIN_MAX_ERR
Maximum manipulated value is set to be smaller than
minimum manipulated value.
16#0200 PV_MIN_MAX_ERR
Maximum current value is set to be smaller than current
manipulated value.
16#0300 PWM_PERIOD_ERR PWM output cycle is set to be smaller than 100(10ms).
16#0400 SV_RANGE_ERR
In case of forward operation, set value at start of auto-
tuning is smaller than current value. In case of reverse
operation, set value at start of auto-tuning is larger than
current value.
16#0500
PWM_ADDRESS_E
RR
PWM output is set as contact point other
than %QX0.0.0~0.0.31.
16#0600 P_GAIN_SET_ERR Proportional constant is set to be smaller than 0.
16#0700 I_TIME_SET_ERR Integral constant is set to be smaller than 0
16#0800 D_TIME_SET_ERR Differential constant is set to be smaller than 0
16#0900
CONTROL_MODE_E
RR
Control mode is other than P, PI, PD and PID.
16#0B00 PID_PERIOD_ERR; PIC operation cycle is set to be smaller than 100(10ms)
16#0C00 HBD_WRONG_DIR
In combined operation, directional parameter of forward
operation loop is set as reverse operation or directional
parameter of reverse operation loop is set as forward
operation
16#0D00
HBD_SV_NOT_MAT
CH
In combined operation, set values of two loops are different
16#0E00 LOOP_EXCEED PID LOOP number is larger 15

13 - 29

(2) PIDCAS
PIDCAS is a command to execute CASCADE control.

- Operand M and S mean master loop and slave loop respecively and available only for
constant(0~15).
- If start junction is on, cascade control is executed through master loop and slave loop.
- In case of IEC type, PIDCAS function block is used for cascade control.

Cascade control is called a control method which is intended to increase control stability through
quick removal of disturbance by connecting two PID control loops in series and is structured as
follows.

[Figure 8.13 Comparison of single loop control and cascade control]

Looking at the figure, it is found that cascade control contains slave loop control within external
control loop. That is, the control output of external loop PID control is entered as SV of the
internal loop control. Therefore, if steam valve suffers from disturbance in the figure, single loop
PID control may not be modified until PV, y(s) appears while cascade control is structured to
remove any disturbance by the internal PID loop control before any disturbance that occurs in
its internal loop affects the PV, y(s), so it can early remove the influence from disturbance.
XGB internal PID control connects two PID control loops each other, making cascade control
possible. At the moment, MV of external loop is automatically entered as the SV of internal loop,
so it is not necessary to enter it through program.

13 - 30

(3) PIDHBD
PIDHBD is a command to execute the mixed forward/reverse E control.

- Operand F and R represent forward operation loop and reverse operation loop and available
only for constant(0~15).
- If start junction is on, it starts the mixed forward/reverse operation from the designated
forward/reverse loops.
- In case of IEC type, combined operation is executed by using PIDHBD function block

The mixed forward/reverse control is called a control method to control forward operation control
output and reverse operation control operation alternatively to a single control process. The XGB
built-in PID control enables the mixed forward/reverse control by connecting two PID control loops
set as forward/reverse operations. At the moment, it uses PIDHBD command. For more information
about the command, refer to 8.2.5. The mixed forward/reverse run is executed as follows in the
XGB built-in PID control.

(a) Commencement of mixed run
If PIDHBC command starts first, it starts reverse run when PV is higher than SV; it starts
forward run if PV is lower than SV.

(b) Conversion of RUN direction
The conversion of run direction is executed according to the following principles. In case of
forward operation run, it keeps running by converting to reverse operation once PV is over SV
+ DeadBand value. At the moment, the DeadBand setting value uses the deadband of a loop
set for forward operation. If PV is below SV DeadBand value during reverse operation, it also
keeps running by converting to forward operation. In the case, the DeadBand setting uses the
deadband of a loop set for reverse loop. It may be illustrated as 8.14.


13 - 31

[Figure 8.14 Conversion of RUN direction in the mixed forward/reverse control]

(c) At the moment, every control parameter uses the parameter of a loop set for forward operation
while MV is output to MV output area of a loop of forward operation. Reversely, every control
parameter uses the parameter of a loop set for reverse operation during reverse operation run
while MV is also output to MV output area of reverse operation loop.

(d) WRT
WRT is a command to save K area flags changed during operation to the internal flash memory of
PLC.

- Once start juction is on, it writes K area values to flash memory.
- Each operand description is summarized as follows.

Operand
Item
designated
Available device Remark
OP1 Slot Constant Designating basic uit as 0
OP2 N/A
P,M,L,K,D,Z,R,
constant
Not used
OP3 Parameter type P,M,L,K,D,Z,R,constant
0 : positioning X axis
1 : positioning Y axis
2 : HS counter
3 : PID parameter
4 : PID auto-tuning parameter


13 - 32

- In case of IEC type, APM_WRT funcion block is used.


13 - 33

13.4 PID Auto-tuning

13.4.1 Basic theory of PID auto-tuning
It describes the function of PID auto-tuning.
The performance of PID controller is very different according to P, I, D coefficient. Generally, It is very
difficult and takes long time to predict the system and set P, I, D coefficient because of non-periodical
disturbance, interference of other control loop, dynamic characteristic of control system though the
engineer is good at handling the PID controller. So auto-tuning that sets the PID coefficient
automatically is very useful. Generally, there are many methods in setting the PID coefficient. Here, it
will describe Relay Auto-tuning.
(1) PID coefficient setting by Relay auto-tuning
It makes critical oscillation by force and uses the width and period of oscillation to specify the PID
coefficient. It applies max. output and min. output to control system for auto-tuning. Then,
oscillation with steady period and steady width occurs around the Set value like figure 6.15, and it
can calculate the boundary gain by using it like expression (8.3.1).

< Figure 8.15 Relay auto-tuning >

width
output Min output Max
K
u
) . . ( 4
(8.3.1)

At this time, oscillation period is called boundary period. If boundary gain and period is specified,
use table 8.9, Ziegler & Nichols tuning table to specify the PID coefficient. This Relay tuning is
relatively simple to configure and easy to know the boundary gain and period so it is used
frequently and XGB built-in PID auto-tuning uses this method.
Controller
Proportional gain
(Kp)
Integral time(Ti)
Differential
time(Td)
P u
K 5 . 0

- -
PI u
K 45 . 0

2 . 1 /
u
P

-
PID u
K 6 . 0

2 /
u
P

8 /
u
P

< Table 8.9 Ziegler & Nichols tuning table >

13 - 34

13.4.2 PID Auto-Tuning function specifications
The specifications of the XGB series built-in PID auto-tuning function are summarized as in Table.

Item Specifications
Scope of SV INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of PV INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of MV INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Error indication
Normal: error flag off
Error: error flag off, error code occurs
AT direction setting Forward/reverse
Control cycle 100 ~ 65,536 (0.1msUnit)
Additional
function
PWM output Supportable
Hysteresis Supportable
[Table 8.10 Spec. of built-in PID auto-tuning function]

13.4.3 Auto-tuning parameter setting

To use the XGB series auto-tuning function, it is necessary to start it by using a command after
setting auto-tuning parameters by loops in the parameter window. It explains the parameters to
use auto-tuning function and how to set them.

(1) Auto-tuning parameter setting
To set the parameters of XGB series auto-tuning function, follow the steps.

(a) If selecting parameter in project window and the built-in parameter, it shows the built-in
parameter setting window as seen in below figure.

< Figure 8.16 Built-in parameter setting window >

13 - 35

(b) If selecting auto-tuning, it shows the parameter setting window as seen in figure 8.17.

<Figure 8.17 Built-in auto-tuning function parameter setting window>

(c) Input items
Table shows the items to set in auto-tuning parameter window and the available scopes.

Items Description Scope
RUN direction Set the run direction of auto-tuning. Forward/reverse
PWM output enable
Set whether to set PWM output of MV
enabled/disabled.
Disable/enable
SV Set SV. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Operation time Set auto-tuning operation time. 100 ~ 65535
Max. MV Set the max. MV in control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Min. mV Set the min. MV in control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
PWM junction
designation
Designate the junction to which PWM output is
output.
P20 ~ P3F
PWM output cycle Set the output cycle of PWM output. 100 ~ 65,535
Hysteresis setting Set the hysteresis of auto-tuning MV. 0 ~ 65,535
< Table 8.11 Auto-tuning function parameter setting items>

(2) Description of auto-tuning parameters and how to set them

(a) RUN direction
RUN direction is to set the direction of auto-tuning run of a loop. The available option is forward
or reverse. The former (forward) means that PV increase when MV increases while the latter
(reverse) means PV decreases when MV increases. For instance, a heater is a kind of forward
direction system because PV (temperature) increases when output (heating) increases. A
refrigerator is a kind of reverse direction system in which PV (temperature) decreases when
output increases.

(b) PWM output enable
PWM output means an output method to turn a junction on off with a duty proportional to control

13 - 36

output calculated by a uniform output cycle. If PWM output is enabled, it realizes PWM output in
accordance with PWM output cycle set in the parameter of PWM output junction (P20 ~ P3F, in
case of IEC type, %QX0.0.0~%QX0.0.15) designated in the parameter. At the moment, the PWM
output cycle follows the PWM output cycle separately set in auto-tuning operation cycle.

(c) SV
It sets the auto-tuning SV of a loop in question. Similar to PID control, physical values
(temperature, flow rate, pressure and etc) of an object to control is not meaningful and instead, it
should use the physical amount of an object to control after converting them into numerals. For
instance, in order to control a system using a sensor that the output is 0V when its heating device
temperature is 0 while it is 10V when the temperature is 100 as much as 50, it is
necessary to set SV as 2000(as long as it uses AD input module XBE-AD04A).

(d) Operation time
It sets the cycle to execute operation for auto-tuning. The setting cycle is 0.1ms and available
between 10ms ~ 6553.5ms (setting value: 100 ~ 65,535) while it is set at a unit of integer per
0.1ms.

(e) Max./min. MV
It sets the max./min. value of output for auto-tuning. The available scope is between -32,768 ~
32,767. If the max. MV is set lower than min. MV, the auto-tuning function of a loop generates an
error and does not work.

(f) Hysteresis setting
Looking at relay tuning in figure 8.15, it shows it outputs the max. MV as auto-tuning starts but it
converts to min. output as PV is over SV and then, it converts to the max. output as PV is lower
than SV. However, if input PV contains noise components or reply components, auto-tuning
ends by a slight vibration of PV around SV, yielding incorrect tuning result. To prevent it,
hysteresis may be set. XGB auto-tuning converts output at SV + Hysteresis when PV increases
or at SV Hysteresis when it decreases once hysteresis is set. With it, it may prevent incorrect
tuning by a slight vibration around SV.

[Figure 8.16 Example of Hysterisis setting ]

PV
MV
SV
Hysteresis
SV+Hysteresis
SV- Hysteresis

13 - 37

13.4.4 Auto-tuning flag

The parameters set in the XGB series auto-tuning function are saved to the flash memory of basic unit.
Such parameters are moved to K area for auto-tuning function as soon as PLC enters to RUN mode
from STOP. Auto-tuning operation using auto-tuning command is achieved by data in K area. At the
moment, if PLC is changed to RUN again after being changed to STOP, it takes the parameters in
flash memory to K area, so the data changed in K area is lost. Therefore, to continuously apply the
parameters adjusted in K area, it is necessary to write the parameters set in K area into flash memory
by using WRT command. (In case of IEC type, APM_WRT function block)

(1) Auto-tuning flag configuration
The K area flags of XGB series auto-tuning function are summarized in Table 8.12.
Loops K area IEC type Symbol Data type Default Description
Common
K18560~F
%KX29696
~%KX29711
_AT_REV Bit Forward
Auto-tuning direction(0:forward,
1:reverse)
K18570~F
%KX29712
~%KX29727
_AT_PWM_EN Bit Disable
PWM output enable(0:disable,
1:enable)
K18580~F
%KX29728
~%KX29743
_AT_ERROR Bit -
Auto-tuning
error(0:normal,1:error)
K1859 %KW1859 Reserved WORD - Reserved area
Loop0
K1860 %KW1860 _AT00_SV INT
0
AT SV loop 00
K1861 %KW1861
_AT00_T_s
WORD
100
AT operation cycle
(T_s)[0.1msec]
K1862 %KW1862 _AT00_MV_max INT
4000
AT MV max. value limit
K1863 %KW1863 _AT00_MV_min INT
0
AT MV min. value limit
K1864 %KW1864 _AT00_PWM WORD
0
AT PWM junction setting
K1865 %KW1865 _AT00_PWM_Prd WORD
0
AT PWM output cycle
K1866 %KW1866 _AT00_HYS_val WORD
0
AT hysterisis setting
K1867 %KW1867 _AT00_STATUS WORD
0
AT auto-tuning status indication
K1868 %KW1868 _AT00_ERR_CODE WORD
0
AT error code
K1869 %KD _AT00_K_p REAL
0
AT result proportional coefficient
K1871 _AT00_T_i REAL
0
AT result integral time
K1873 _AT00_T_d REAL
0
AT result differential time
K1875 _AT00_PV INT
0
AT PV
K1876 _AT00_MV INT
0
AT MV
K1877~1879
%KW1877
~%KW1879
Reserved Word
0
Reserved area
[Table 8.12 K area flags for auto-tuning]
K1856 ~ K1859 areas (In case of IEC type, %KW1856~%KW1859) are the common bit areas for
auto-tuning and each bit represents auto-tuning loop status respectively. K1860~K1879 areas save
the setting and status of loop 0 as the K area for auto-tuning loop 0. In the area, the parameters
such as PV, operation cycle and etc set in the built-in parameter window are saved and the XGB
built-in auto-tuning function executes auto-tuning by the device values and saves the results into the
K areas.

13 - 38

(2) Auto-tuning flag function
Each function of K area flags for XGB series auto-tuning is summarized as follows.

A) Common bit area
The area is a flag collecting operation setting and information consisting of bits to each 16 loop.
Each bit of each word device represents the information of each loop.

1) _AT_REV (auto-tuning run direction setting)

It determines the run direction of auto-tuning of n th loop. If the bit is off, it is forward operation;
if on, it is reverse operation.

2) _AT_PWM_EN (PWM output enable)

It sets whether to output the auto-tuning MV of n th loop as PWM output. If the bit is off, it is
disabled; if on, it is enabled.

3) _AT_ERROR (Auto-tuning error occurrence)

It indicates the error in case an error that discontinues operation during auto-tuning of nth loop
occurs. If an error occurs, it is on; if normal, it is off. Once an error occurs, auto-tuning stops
and the MV is output as the min. output set in the parameter. Also, if an error occurs, it
indicates the error code in the error code area of a loop. For more information about error code
types and measures, refer to 8.5. The area, as a dedicated monitor area, is updated although a
user directly enters it.

B) Auto-tuning flag area by loops
The auto-tuning flag areas by loops are K1860 ~ K2179 and each 20 words per loop are
allocated to totally 16 loops. Therefore, individual data area of n th loop is between K
(1860+16*n) ~ K (1879+16*n).

1) _ATxx_SV (auto-tuning xx Loop SV setting)

It sets/indicates the auto-tuning SV of xxth loop.
The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767.

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_AT_REV
(PID RUN direction setting)
_AT_PWM_EN
(PWM output enable)
_PID_ERROR
(PID error occurrence)
_ATxx_SV
(AT xx Loop SV setting)
K1860+16*xx %KW1860+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767

13 - 39

2) _ATxx_T_s (Auto-tuning xx Loop operation cycle)

It sets/indicates the operation cycle of xx th loop auto-tuning. The available scope is 100 ~
65,535.

3) _ATxx_MV_max, _ATxx_MV_min(max. MV, min. MV)

It sets max. MV and min. MV of xx th loop respectively. If the max. MV is set lower than min.
MV, the auto-tuning loop generates an error and does not work.

4) _ATxx_PWM (AT output junction setting)

It sets the junction that PWM output of xxth loop is output. The PWM output junction is valid
only between H20 ~ H3F (hex). If any other value is entered, PWM output does not work.

5) _ATxx_PWM_Prd (PWM output cycle setting)

It sets the PWM output cycle of xx th loop. The available scope is between 100 ~ 65,535 at the
unit of 0.1ms.

6) _ATxx_HYS_val (Hysterisis setting)

It sets the hysterisis of xx th loop. For more information about hysterisis function, refer to 6.3.3
Auto-Tuning Parameter Setting. If it is set as 0, it does not work.

7) _ATxx_STATUS (Auto-tuning status)

It indicates the auto-tuning status of xx th loop. If auto-tuning is in operation, it is 1; if
completed, it is 128. In any other cases, it shows 0.

_PIDxx_T_s
(Auto-tuning xx Loop operation cycle)
K1861+16*xx %KW1861+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535
_PIDxx_MV_max (Max. MV) K1862+16*xx %KW1862+16*xx
INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_MV_min (Min. MV) K1863+16*xx %KW1863+16*xx
_AT00_PWM
(AT output junction setting)
K1864+16*xx %KW1864+16*xx WORD H20 ~ H3F
_ATxx_PWM_Prd
(PWM output cycle setting)
K1865+16*xx %KW1865+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535
_ATxx_HYS_val (Hysterisis setting) K1866+16*xx %KW1866+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535
_ATxx_STATUS
(Auto-tuning status)

13 - 40

8) _ATxx_ERR_CODE (Error code)

It indicates error code in case an error occurs during the auto-tuning of xxth loop. The flag, as
a dedicated monitor, is updated although a user directly enters it. For more information about
error code, refer to 8.5.

9) _ATxx_K_p, _ATxx_T_i, _ATxx_T_d (AT result proportional coefficient, integral time, differential
time)

The area indicates proportional coefficient, integral time and differential time calculated after
the auto-tuning of xx th loop is normally completed. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring,
updated although a user directly enters it.

10) _ATxx_PV (PV)

It is the area to receive PV of xx th auto-tuning loop. PV is the present status of a system to
control and in case of PID control, the entry from a sensor is saved into U device through input
devices such as A/D input module and it moves the value to _ATxx_PV by using commands
such as MOV every scanning, executing auto-tuning.

11) _ATxx_MV (Auto-tuning MV)

It is the area to output MV of xx th auto-tuning loop. Every auto-tuning cycle, it saves XGB
auto-tuning and it delivers the value in the area by using commands like MOV in a program and
operates a drive every scanning.

_ATxx_ERR_CODE
(Error code)
_ATxx_K_p
(proportional coefficient)
K1869+16*xx %KD934+20*xx
Real Unavailable
_ATxx_T_i
(integral time)
K1871+16*xx %KD1004+20*xx
_ATxx_T_d
(differential time)
K1873+16*xx %K1005+20*xx
_ATxx_PV (PV) K1875+16*xx %KW1875+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_ATxx_MV (auto-tuning MV) K1876+16*xx %KW1876+16*xx INT Unavailable

13 - 41

13.4.5 Auto-tuning instructions

The commands used in XGB series auto-tuning are as follows.

1) PIDAT
PIDAT is a command to execute auto-tuning by loops.

- Operand S means the loop no. to execute auto-tuning and avaiable only for constant(0~15).
- If start junction is on, the PID control of a loop starts.
- In case of IEC type, the following PIDAT function block is used for start of auto-tuning


13 - 42

13.5 Example Programs

The paragraph explains example programs regarding the directions of XGB built-in PID function. The
example programs are explained with water level system as illustrated in 8.17.

[ Figure 8.17 Example of water level control system ]

13.5.1 System structure

The example system in figure is an example of a system to control a pails water level to a desired
level. The pails water level is sensed by a water level sensor and entered to A/D input module while
PID control operation result, MV is output to a pump through D/A output module, controlling a pumps
rotation velocity, regulating the water amount flowing into a pail and regulating the water level as
desired. Each mechanism is explained as follows.

(1) XGB basic unit
The XGB basic unit operates by PID control operating PID control operation. It receives PV from
A/D input module (XBF-AD04A), executes the built-in PID control operation, output the MV to D/A
(XBF-DV04A) and executes PID control.

(2) A/D input module (XBF-AD04A)
It functions as receiving PV of an object to control from a water level sensor and delivering it to
basic unit. XBF-AD04A is a 4CH analog input module and settings of analog input types and
scopes can be changed in the I/O parameter setting window appeared when selecting I/O
parameter in the parameter item of project window. For more information, refer to Analog I/O
Module.

(3) D/A output module (XBF-DV04A)
It functions as delivering control MV from basic unit to a drive (pump). XBF-DV04A is a 4CH
analog voltage output module and ranges 0 ~ 10V. For detail setting, refer to Analog I/O Module.

XG5000

RS-232C

0~10V

0~10V

Tank
Pump
Water
level sensor

XGB D/A A/D

Tank


13 - 43

(4) Water Level Sensor
A water level sensor plays a role to deliver the PV of an object to control to XGB by measuring the
water level of a pail and outputting it within 0 ~ 10V. Since the types and output scope of water
level sensors varies, the output scope of a sensor should be identical with that of A/D input
modules input scope. The example uses a water level sensor outputting between 0 ~ 10V.

(5) Drive (pump)
A drive uses a pump that receives control output of XGF-DV04A and of which rotation velocity is
variable. For accurate PID control, the output scope of XBF-DV04A (0~10V) should be same with
that of a pumps control input. The example uses a pump that receives its control input between 0 ~
10V.

13.5.2. Example of PID Auto-tuning

Here, with examples, it explains how to calculate proportional constant, integral time and differential
time by using PID auto-tuning function

(1) PID auto-tuning parameter setting

(a) If double-clicking Parameter Built-in Parameter PID Auto-tuning parameter in the
project window, it opens up the auto-tuning parameter setting window as illustrated in
figure 8.18.

[Figure 8.18 Auto-tuning parameter setting window]

(b) Set each parameter and click OK.
In the example, Loop 0 is set as follows.

RUN direction: forward
- Since in the system, water level is going up as MV increases and pumps rotation
velocity increases, it should be set as forward operation.

PWM output: disabled
- In the example, auto-tuning using PWM is not executed. Therefore, PWM output is set
as disabled.

SV: 1000(2.5V)
- It shows an example in which XBF-AD04A is set as the voltage input of 0~10V.


13 - 44

Max. MV: 4000
- Max. MV is set as 4000. If MV is 4000, XBF-DV04A outputs 10V.

Min. MV: 0
- Min. MV is set as 0. If MV is 0, XBF-DV04A outputs 0V.

PWM junction, PWM output cycle
- It is not necessary to set it because the example does not use PWM output.

Hysteresis setting: 10

(2) A/D input module parameter setting

(a) If double-clicking Parameter I/O parameter, it opens up the setting window as illustrated
in figure 7.19.

[ Figure 8.19 I/O parameter setting window ]

(b) If selecting A/D module for a slot in A/D input module, it opens up the setting window as
illustrated in figure 8.20.

[ Figure 8.20 A/D input mode setting window ]

(c) Check A/D Module operation parameter and click OK. The example is set as follows.

RUN CH: CH0 RUN
- The example receives the water level sensor input as CH0.


13 - 45

Input scope: 0 ~ 10V
- Set XBF-AD04A input scope as 0 ~ 10V so that it should be identical with the output
scope of water level sensor.

Output data type: 0 ~ 4000
- It converts the input 0 ~ 10V to digital value from 0 ~ 4000 and delivers it to basic unit.
- In the case, the resolving power of digital value 1 is 10/4000 = 2.5mV

Filter process, averaging: disabled
- The example sets the input values in order that filter process and averaging are not
available.
- For more information about each function, refer to 12 Analog I/O Module.

(3) D/A Output Module Parameter setting

(a) Set the parameter of D/A output module(XBF-DV04A) that output MV to a drive.
How to set them is as same as A/D input module. In the example, it is set as follows.

RUN CH: CH0 RUN
- In the example, MV is output as CH0 of D/A output module.
Output scope : 0 ~ 10V
Input data type: 0 ~ 4000


13 - 46

4) Example of PID Auto-tuning program
The example of PID auto-tuning program is illustrated as figure 8.21.

< Figure 8.21 Auto-tuning example program >

(a) Devices used

Device Data type Application
F0099 BIT It is always on, so it readily operates once PLC is RUN.
U01.01.0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Slot 1 A/D input module.
U02.02.0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Slot 2 D/A output module.
U01.02 INT PV entered to A/D input module.
U02.03 INT MV entered to D/A output module.
K1875 INT Device to which PV is entered for LOOP 0 auto-tuning
K1876 INT Device to which auto-tuning MV of LOOP 0 is output.
K18677 BIT Junction that is on once auto-tuning is complete.
K18580 BIT Junction that is on once auto-tuning has an error.
K1863 INT Min. MV of auto-tuning designated in parameter.

(b) Program explanation

1) Since F0099(always on) is ON if PLC is converted form STOP to RUN, CH0 of A/D and D/A
starts operating.
2) At the moment, PV entered to CH0 is moved to K1875, the input device of PV and saved
accordingly.
3) Once M0000 junction is on, the auto-tuning of loop 0 starts.

13 - 47

4) The auto-tuning MV of loop 0 that is output by PIDAT command is output to D/A output
module by line 14 MOV command.
5) If auto-tuning is complete or there is any error during auto-tuning, M0001 junction is set,
blocking operation of PIDAT command and it outputs min. MV set in parameter to D/A
output module.

(c) Monitoring and changing PID control variables using K area
In XGB series built-in auto-tuning, it can monitor and change RUN status of auto-tuning by
using K area allocated as fixed area by loops.

1) Variable registration
If selecting Register in Variable/Description by right clicking in the variable monitor
window, Variable/Device Selection window appears. Select Item as PID, deselect
View All and enter 0(means loop number) in Parameter No, K area device list to save
every setting and status of loop 0 appears as shown figure 8.22. Then, if selecting a
variable to monitor and clicking OK, a selected device is registered to variable monitor
window as illustrated in figure 8.23. Through the monitor window, a user can monitor
auto-tuning run status or change the settings.

[Figure 8.22 Variable registration window]

[Figure 8.23 Auto-tuning variables registered]

13 - 48

(d) In case of IEC type, example program
In case of IEC type, the following program is used.


13 - 49

(5) Observing RUN status by using trend monitor function
Since it is possible to monitor the operation status of XGB series built-in auto-tuning graphically,
it is useful to monitor the operation status of auto-tuning clearly.
(a) If selecting Monitor Trend monitor menu, it shows the trend monitor widow as illustrated in
figure 8.24.

[ Figure 8.24 Trend Monitor window ]

(b) If right-clicking trend setting, a user can select a variable to monitor as illustrated in figure
8.25.

[ Figure 8.25 window to register trend monitor variable ]

(c) For more information about trend monitor, refer to XG5000 Uses Manual.

13.5.3. Stand-along operation after PID Auto-Tuning

13 - 50

Here, with example, it explains how to execute PID control followed by PID auto-tuning.

(1) PID auto-tuning parameter setting

PID auto-tuning parameters are set as same as examples of 8.4.2 Example of PID Auto-
tuning.

(2) Setting parameters of A/D input module and D/A output module

Set the parameters of A/D input module and D/A output module as same as the example in
8.4.2 Example of PID Auto-tuning.

(3) PID parameter setting

(a) If double-clicking Parameter Built-in Parameter PID PID Parameter, it shows the
built-in PID parameter setting window as seen in figure 8.26.

[ Figure 8.26 Auto-tuning parameter setting window ]

(b) Set each parameter and click OK.
In the example, Loop 0 is set as follows.

RUN mode: automatic
- Set as automatic in order that PID control is executed as the built-in PID operation
outputs MV.

RUN direction: forward
- Since in the system, water level is going up as MV increases and pumps rotation
velocity increases, it should be set as forward operation.

PWM Output: disabled
- In the example, auto-tuning using PWM is not executed. Therefore, PWM output is set

13 - 51

as disabled.

SV: 1000(2.5V)
- It shows an example in which XBF-AD04A is set as the voltage input of 0~10V

Operation cycle: 1000
- In the example, it is set that PID control is executed every 100ms.

Proportional gain, integral time and differential time
- It should be initially set as 1,0,0 because PID auto-tuning results is used with PID
constant.

Max. MV: 4000
- Max. MV is set as 4000. If MV is 4000, XBF-DV04A outputs 10V.

DeadBand: 0
- It is set as 0 because the example does not use DeadBand function.

Differential filter setting: 0
- it is also set as 0 because the example does not use differential filter.

Min. MV: 0
- Min. MV is set as 0. If MV is 0, XBF-DV04A outputs 0V.

PWM junction, PWM output cycle
- It is not necessary to set them because the example does not use PWM output.

SV ramp, PV follow-up: 0
- It is not necessary to set SV ramp and PV follow-up because the example does not
use them.

Min. PV, Max. PV: 0
- Set them as 0 and 4000 respectively so that it could be identical with A/D input
modules input scope.


13 - 52

(c) Example of PID control program after PID auto-tuning
The program example for PID auto-tuning is illustrated as figure 8.27.

[Figure 8.27 Example program of PID control after auto-tuning]

1) Devices used

Device Data type Application
F0099 BIT It is always on, so it readily operates once PLC is RUN.
U01.01.0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Slot 1 A/D input module.
U02.02.0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Slot 2 D/A output module.
U01.02 INT PV entered to A/D input module.
U02.03 INT MV entered to D/A output module.
K1875 INT Device to which PV is entered for LOOP 0 auto-tuning
K1876 INT Device to which auto-tuning MV of LOOP 0 is output.
K18677 BIT Junction that is on once auto-tuning is complete.
K18580 BIT Junction that is on once auto-tuning has an error.
K1863 INT Min. MV of auto-tuning designated in parameter.
K1229 INT Device to which PV is entered for Loop 0 PID control
K1876 INT Device to which MV of loop 0 PID control is output.


13 - 53

2) Program explanation

a) Since F0099 (always on) is ON if PLC is converted form STOP to RUN, CH0 of A/D and
D/A starts operating.
b) Once M0000 junction is on, the auto-tuning of loop 0 starts. At the moment, PV entered to
CH0 is moved to K1875, the PV input device of loop 0 and saved accordingly.
c) The auto-tuning MV of Loop 0 output by PIDAT command is output to D/A output module
by line 11, MOV command.
d) Once auto-tuning is complete, it moves P, I, D coefficients generated from auto-tuning to
the input devices of P, I and D, K1218,K1220 and K1222, sets M001 and starts the
operation of PID loop 0.

3) In case of IEC type, program example is as shown below.


13 - 54

13.6 Error/Warning Codes

It describes error codes and warning codes of the XGB built-in PID function. The error codes and warning
codes that may occur during use of the XGB built-in PID function are summarized as table. If any error or
warning occurs, remove potential causes of the error by referring to the tables.

8.6.1. Error codes

Error
codes
Indications Measures
H0001 MV_MIN_MAX_ERR
It occurs when max. MV is set lower than min. MV. Make
sure to set max. MV larger than min. MV.
H0002 PV_MIN_MAX_ERR
It occurs when max. PV is set lower min. Pv. Make sure to
set max. PV larger than min. PV.
H0003 PWM_PERIOD_ERR
It occurs when the period of auto tuning or PID operation
loop is set under 100(10ms). Make sure to set output
period more than 100.
H0004 SV_RANGE_ERR
It occurs when SV is larger than PV at the start time of
auto-tuning if auto-tuning is forward or when SV is larger
than PV at the start time of auto-tuning if auto-tuning is
reverse.
H0005 PWM_ADDRESS_ERR
It occurs when the junction designated as PWM output
junction is beyond between P20 ~ P3F.
H0006 P_GAIN_SET_ERR It occurs when proportional constant is set lower than 0.
H0007 I_TIME_SET_ERR It occurs when integral time is set lower than 0.
H0008 D_TIME_SET_ERR It occurs when differential time is set lower than 0.
H0009 CONTROL_MODE_ERR It occurs when control mode is not P, PI, PD or PID.
H000A TUNE_DIR_CHG_ERR
It occurs when operation direction is changed during auto-
tuning. Never attempt to change operation direction during
auto-tuning.
H000B PID_PERIOD_ERR
It occurs when period of operation is smaller than 100
(10ms) at Auto-tuning or PID operation.
Make sure to set period of operation larger than 100.
H000C HBD_WRONG_DIR
In mixed operation, It occurs when the direction parameter
of forward operation set to reverse operation or the
direction parameter of reverse operation set to forward
operation. Make sure set to appropriate direction each
loop.
H000D HBD_SV_NOT_MATCH
In mixed operation, it occurs when the Set value of each
loop is not concurrent. Make sure set to Set value
concurrently.
[Table 8.13 : PID error codes]


13 - 55

13.6.2. Warning codes

Error
codes
Indications Measures
H0001 PV_MIN_MAX_ALM It occurs when the set PV is beyond the min./max. PV.
H0002 PID_SCANTIME_ALM
It occurs when PID operation cycle is too short. It is
desirable to set PID operation cycle longer than PLC scan
time.
H0003 PID_dPV_WARN
It occurs when the PV change of PID cycle exceeds PV
change limit.
H0004 PID_dMV_WARN
It occurs when the PV cycle MV change exceeds MV
change limit.
H0005 PID_MV_MAX_WARN
It occurs when the calculated MV of PID cycle exceeds the
max. MV.
H0006 PID_MV_MIN_WARN
It occurs when the calculated MV of PID cycle is smaller
than the min. MV
[Table 8.14 : PID error codes]

Appendix 1

Appendix 1- 1
Appendix 1 Standard Resistor of Pt RTD

Pt100
-200 18.52
-100 60.26 56.19 52.11 48.00 43.88 39.72 35.54 31.34 27.10 22.83
0 100.00 96.09 92.55 88.22 84.27 80.31 76.33 72.33 68.33 64.30
Temp.() 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0 100.00 103.90 107.79 111.67 115.54 119.40 123.24 127.08 130.90 134.71
100 138.51 142.29 146.07 149.83 153.58 157.33 161.05 164.77 168.48 172.17
200 175.86 179.53 183.19 186.84 190.47 194.10 197.71 201.31 204.90 208.48
300 212.05 215.61 219.86 222.68 226.21 229.72 233.21 236.70 240.18 243.64
400 247.09 250.53 253.96 257.38 260.78 264.18 267.56 270.93 274.29 277.64
500 280.98 284.30 287.62 290.92 294.21 297.49 300.75 304.01 307.25 310.49
600 313.71
JPt100
-200 17.14
-100 59.57 55.44 51.29 47.11 42.91 38.68 34.42 30.12 25.80 21.46
0 100.00 96.02 92.02 88.01 83.99 79.96 75.91 71.85 67.77 63.68
Temp.() 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0 100.00 103.97 107.93 111.88 115.81 119.73 123.64 127.54 131.42 135.3
100 139.16 143.01 146.85 150.67 154.49 158.29 162.08 165.86 169.63 173.38
200 177.13 180.86 184.58 188.29 191.99 195.67 199.35 203.01 206.66 210.3
300 213.93 217.51 221.15 224.74 228.32 231.89 235.45 238.99 242.53 246.05
400 249.56 253.06 256.55 260.02 263.49 266.94 270.38 273.8 277.22 280.63
500 284.02 287.4 290.77 294.12 297.47 300.8 304.12 307.43 310.72 314.01
600 317.28

Appendix 2 Thermo electromotive force and compensating force

Appendix 2 - 1

Appendix 2 Thermo Electromotive Force and Compensating Cable

2.1 Table of Thermo Electromotive Force

unit: v
Type K
Temp.
()
Temp.
()
Type J
Temp.
()
Temp.
()
unit: v

Appendix 2 - 2

Type T

Type R

unit : v
unit: v

Appendix 2 - 3

2.2.1 Common limit and overheat limit

Symbol of materials
Former symbols
(cf)
Nominal diameter
(mm)
Common limit (1)
C
Overheat limit (2)
C
K CA
0.65 650 850
1.00 750 950
1.60 850 1050
2.30 900 1100
3.20 1000 1200
J IC
0.65 400 500
1.00 450 550
1.60 500 650
2.30 550 750
3.20 600 750
T CC
0.32 200 250
0.65 200 250
1.00 250 300
1.60 300 300
R - 0.50 1400 1600

Remarks

(1): common limit refers to the temperature limit that continuously use in the air.
(2): overheat limit refers to the temperature limit that may inevitably use for a short time.

2.2 Thermocouple

Appendix 2 - 4

2.2.2 Allowance by temperature

Symbol of materials
Former symbols (cf)
Temperature Grade Allowance
K CA
0 C ~ lower than 1000C 0.4 1.5C or 0.4% of temperature measured
0C ~ lower than 1200C 0.75 2.5C or 0.75% of temperature measured
-200C~ lower than 0C 1.5 2.5C or 1.5% of temperature measured
J IC
0C~ lower than 750C 0.4 1.5 C or 0.4% of temperature measured
0C~ lower than 750C 0.75 2.5C or 0.75% of temperature measured
T CC
0C~ lower than 350C 0.4 0.5C or 0.4% of temperature measured
0C~ lower than 350C 0.75 1C or 0.75% of temperature measured
-200C~ lower than 0C 1.5 1C or 1.5% of temperature measured
R - 0 C ~ lower than 1600C 0.25 1.5 C or 0.25% of temperature measured

Remark

Allowance refers to the allowable max. limit subtracting the actual temperature of junction from the converted temperature,
based on thermo electromotive force table. In addition, the allowance will be bigger one of C or %.


Appendix 2 - 5
2.3 Compensating Cable

2.3.1 Type and specifications of compensating cable

Type of
compound
thermocouple

Type of
compensating type
Sectional ratio by
application and
allowance
Materials
Operating
temp.
range
(C)
Temp.
of
thermo.
and
junction
(C)
Electric
resistan
ce of
compen
sating
cable
()
(2)
Electric
resistan
ce of
return
cable
()
(2)
Sheath
colors
Corecablescolor
Remarks
S
y
m
b
o
l

F
o
r
m
e
r

s
y
m
b
o
l

s
y
m
b
o
l

F
o
r
m
e
r

s
y
m
b
o
l

+ point - point +
K CA
KX-G WCA-G
Common for
general us
Alloy of
nickel and
chrome
Alloy of
nickel
-20~90
-20~150
2.5
1.5
Blue Red White

KX-GS WCA-GS
Common for
general use
1.5
KX-H WCA-H
Common for
heat-resistance
0~150
2.5
KX-HS WCA-HS
Common for
heat-resistance
1.5
WX-G WCA-G
Common for
general us
Iron
Alloy of
copper
and nickel
-20~90
3.0 0.5

WX-H WCA-H
Common for
heat-resistance
0~150
VX-G WCA-G
Common for
general us
Copper
Alloy of
copper
and nickel
-20~90 -20~100
2.5
0.8
J IC
JX-G WIC-G
Common for
general us
Iron
Alloy of
copper
and nickel
-20~90
-20~150
0.8 Yellow Red White

JX-H WIC-H
Common for
heat-resistance
0~150
T CC
TX-G WCC-C
Common for
general us
Copper
Alloy of
copper
and nickel
-20~90
2.0
0.8 Brown Red White
TX-GS -
Precise for
general use
1.0
TX-H WCC-H
Common for
heat-resistance
0~150
2.0
TX-HS -
Precise for
heat-resistance
1.0
R -
Rx-G
-

Common for
general us
Copper
Alloy of
copper
and nickel
0~90
0~150
+3
(1)

0.1 Black Red White
RX-H
Common for
heat-resistance
0~150 - 7

Remark

(1): The thermocouple electromotive force of thermocouple R and S is non-linear, so it does not indicate the actual
temperature measurement error.
(2): applicable to nominal cross-sectional area of 1.25mm
2
and more.

Appendix 3

Appendix 3- 1
Appendix 3 Dimension

1) Dimension of XBF-AD04A
Unit: mm

2) Dimension of XBF-DV04A
Unit: mm

Appendix 3

Appendix 3- 2

3) Dimension of XBF-DC04A
Unit: mm

4) Dimension of XBF-RD04A
Unit: mm

XBF-DV04A
XBF-RD04A
ALM
Appendix 3

Appendix 3- 3

5) Dimension of XBF-TC04S
Unit: mm

6) Dimension of XBF-AH04A
Unit: mm

VI
XBF-AH04A

Appendix 3

Appendix 3- 4
7) Dimension of XBF-AD08A
Unit: mm

8) Dimension of XBO-AD02A
Unit: mm

Appendix 3

Appendix 3- 5
9) Dimension of XBO-DA02A
Unit: mm

10) Dimension of XBO-AH02A
Unit: mm

Appendix 3

Appendix 3- 6
11) Dimension of XBO-RD01A
Unit: mm

12) Dimension of XBO-TC02A
Unit: mm

Warranty and Environmental Policy

Warranty

1. Warranty Period
The product you purchased will be guaranteed for 18 months from the date of manufacturing.

2. Scope of Warranty
Any trouble or defect occurring for the above-mentioned period will be partially replaced or repaired. However, please note the following
cases will be excluded from the scope of warranty.

(1) Any trouble attributable to unreasonable condition, environment or handling otherwise specified in the manual,
(2) Any trouble attributable to others products,
(3) If the product is modified or repaired in any other place not designated by the company,
(4) Due to unintended purposes
(5) Owing to the reasons unexpected at the level of the contemporary science and technology when delivered.
(6) Not attributable to the company; for instance, natural disasters or fire

3. Since the above warranty is limited to PLC unit only, make sure to use the product considering the safety for system configuration or
applications.

Environmental Policy

LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd supports and observes the environmental policy as below.

LS Industrial Systems considers the
environmental preservation as the preferential
management subject and every staff of LS
Industrial Systems use the reasonable
endeavors for the pleasurably environmental
preservation of the earth.

LS Industrial Systems PLC unit is designed to
protect the environment. For the disposal,
separate aluminum, iron and synthetic resin
(cover) from the product as they are reusable.
Environmental Management About Disposal

HEAD OFFICE
LS tower, Hogye-dong, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-do 1026-6,
Korea http://eng.lsis.biz
Tel : (82-2)2034-4870/Fax : 82-2-2034-4648 e-mail : [email protected]
LS Industrial Systems Tokyo Office _ Tokyo, Japan
Address: 16FL. Higashi-Kan. Akasaka Twin Tower 17-22,
Akasaka.Monato-ku Tokyo 107-8470. Japan
Tel : 81-3-3582-9128/Fax : 81-3-3582-2667 e-mail : [email protected]
LS Industrial Systems(ME) FZE _ Dubai, U.A.E.
Address : Jafza View Tower Lob 19, Room 205 Along Sheikh Zayed
Road Jebel Aali Free Zone Dubai, United Arab Emirates
LS Industrial Systems Shanghai Office _ Shanghai, China
Address : Room E-G. 12FL Hiamin Empire Plaza. No.726. West.
Yan'an Road Shanghai 200050. P.R. China e-mail : [email protected]
Tel : 86-21-5237-9977(609)/Fax : 89-21-5237-7189
LS Industrial Systems Beijing Office _ Beijing, China
Address : B-Tower 17FL. Beijing Global Trade Center B/D. No. 36.
East BeisanHuan-Road. DongCheng-District. Beijing 100013. P.R. China
Tel : 86-10-5825-6027(666)/Fax : 86-10-5825-6028 e-mail : [email protected]
LS Industrial Systems Guangzhou Office _ Guangzhou, China
Address : Room 1403.14FL. New Poly Tower.
2 Zhongshan Liu Road.Guangzhou.P.R China

LS Industrial Systems Chengdu Office _ Chengdu, China
Address : 12FL. Guodong Buiding. No.52 Jindun
Road Chengdu.610041. P.R. China
Tel : 86-28-8612-9151(9226)/Fax : 86-28-8612-9236 e-mail : [email protected]
LS Industrial Systems Qingdao Office _ Qingdao, China
Address : YinHe Bldg. 402 Room No. 2P Shandong Road,
Qingdao-City,Shandong-province 266071, P.R. China
LS Industrial Systems Europe B.V. , Netherlands
Address : 1st. Floor, Tupolevlaan 48, 1119NZ, Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands
Tel : +31 (0)20 654 1420/Fax : +31 (0)20 654 1429 e-mail : [email protected]
Wuxi LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd _ Wuxi, China
Address : 102-A. National High & New Tech Industrial Development Area.
Wuxi. Jiangsu. 214028. P.R. China
Dalian LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. _ Dalian, China
Address : No. 15. Liaohexi 3-Road. Economic and Technical Development zone.
Dalian 116600. China

LS Industrial Systems constantly endeavors to improve its product so that
information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd 2010 All Rights Reserved.

10310000920
2011. 2
LS values every single customers.
Quality and service come first at LSIS.
Always at your service, standing for our customers.

http://eng.lsis.biz

Manual XGB Analog 10310000920 Eng V1.6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual XGB Analog 10310000920 Eng V1.6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual XGB Analog 10310000920 Eng V1.6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions should be taken when designing and installing a PLC system?

What should be done if a system error is detected during PLC operation?

Right choice for ultimate yield

= count processing Average

= count processing Average

Chapter 3 Analog Output Module

You might also like